HomeMy WebLinkAboutMSC International; 2003-10-24; Part 2 of 23.02 APPLICATION
I
A. Under concrete slabs on grade:
1. Apply soil poison uniformly to all areas where concrete slab on grade is indicated on
the Drawings.
a.
b.
On top of base under the slabs, apply at a rate of not less than 5.6 liters (1-1/2
gallons) per three-square meters (1 0 square feet);
Along both side of foundation walls, along interior foundations, and around
plumbing, apply at a rate of not less thag 15 liters (4 gallons) per 3 lineal m (1 0
lineal feet).
B. Elsewhere, apply soil poisoning uniformly under sidewalks and all other paved areas
within 1.5 m (5 feet) of the building, at a rate of not less than 3.7 liters (one gallon) per
three-square meter (1 0 square feet).
3.03 PROTECTION OF TREATED SURFACES
A. Unless the treated surfaces are to be covered immediately, take all means necessary to
prevent disturbance of the treated areas by human or animal contact.
END OF SECTION
SOIL TREATMENT
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
02280-3
1.01
1.02
1.03
1.04
1.05
SECTION 02501
PAVING AND RESURFACING
PART 1 - GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
A. Repair and resurfacing of existing roadway and area of paving damaged or removed
during construction.
REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS
Whenever the words "Standard Specifications" are referred to, the reference is to the
State of California, Department of Transportation, Standard Specifications dated
latest edition.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Comply with "Standard Specifications" of State of California, Department of
Transportation (CALTRANS).
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
All work, material, procedures and practices under this section shall conform with
requirements of the California Air Resources Board (CAW) and the Air Pollution
Control District having jurisdiction.
SUBMITTALS
Submit the following:
A. Samples: Furnish, without additional cost to the Owner, such quantities of
construction materials as may be required by the Engineer for test purposes. The
Contractor shall cooperate with the Engineer and fumish necessary facilities for
sampling and testing of all materials and workmanship. All materials furnished and
all work performed shall be subject to rigid inspection, and no materials shall be
used in the construction work until it has been inspected by the Engineer.
B. Submit a signed verification from each source of supply for each construction
material employed on this project indicating that the materials meet the Specification
requirements.
C. Mix design for asphalt concrete and test results of California Test 367.
PAVING AND RESURFACING
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
02501-1
D. Submit manufacturer’s certification of the actual volatile organic compounds (VOC)
content for xl pavement paints and bituminous pavement sealers proposed for use on
this project. Submit certification of the actual VOC content for coatings
manufactured after 1 September 1987. For coatings manufactured before
1 September 1987, submit VOC content and date of manufacture. VOC content
shall be measured in grams per liter by weight of coating as applied excluding water
and color added to the tint base.
E. Submit verification that bituminous pavement sealers and paint products furnished
meet applicable regulations as to allowable VOC content for the time and place of
application and use intended.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PAVING MATERIALS
A. Aggregate Base: Standard Specifications, Section 26. Class and size as indicated on
the Drawings; or if not indicated on the Drawings, use Class 2, 3/4-inch maximum
(Green Book Class “A” aggregate base).
B. Alternative aggregate base - existing ac paving and base may be pulverized in place
and moved to a stockpile area(s) as designated on the drawings. Pulverize the
existing materials and handle in full accordance with Cal-Trans methodology and
specifications.
B. Prime Coat: Liquid asphalt, Grade SC-70 or MC-70, Standard Specifications,
Section 93.
C. Tack Coat and Seal Coat: Emulsified asphalt, Grade SS-1 or SS-lh, Standard
Specifications, Section 94.
D. Asphalt Concrete: TypeB, 1/2-inch maximum, medium grading, Standard
Bitumin ratio shall be selected by the supplier in Specification Section 39.
accordance with paragraph 39-2.02 of the Standard Specifications (AR 4000).
2.02 HEADERS
A. At straight sections, wood headers shall be constructed of 2-inch x 6-inch
construction heart redwood, held in place by 2-inch x 4-inch stakes, of the same
materials, 2-feet long and set at 8-foot centers.
B. At curved sections, wood headers shall be constructed of three 1/2-inch x 4-inch
construction heart redwood bender boards. Boards shall be lapped at one-third of the
length of individual boards, with no two boards lapped at the same place. Hold
boards in place with stakes same as above.
PAVING AND RESURFACING
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
0250 1-2
- 2.03 PAVEMENT PAINT
Comply with Section 84-3.02 of the Standard Specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
3.03
GENERAL
A. This Specification shall cover newly surfaced areas as well as restoration of existing
surfacing.
B. Adjust existing and new manholes, meter boxes, cleanouts, etc. to match the new
grade.
PAVEMENT CUTTING
After backfilling trenches and prior to paving, saw cut existing pavement parallel to
the trench (using a concrete saw) to a minimum depth equal to or greater than one-
half the thickness thereof. The pavement shall be cut back 6 inches on each side of
the trench or excavation wall. Re-cut and restore any pavement damaged outside
these lines at the expense of the Contractor. Should voids develop under the existing
pavements during construction, those affected pavements shall be neatly saw cut in
straight lines and replaced after the voids have been filled.
PLACEMENT OF AGGREGATE BASE
A. Subgrade Preparation: Water or dry subgrade as required to bring the soil to within
2 percent of the optimum moisture content for proper compacting. Compact to a
relative compaction of not less than 95 percent in the upper 6 inches. When
compaction of the subgrade areas on fill and embankments has been properly
obtained, only such additional rolling will be required as necessary to obtain a
thoroughly compacted subgrade immediately prior to placing the aggregate base
thereon.
B. Aggregate Base Tolerance: Do not place the aggregate base before the subgrade is
approved by the Engineer. The fmished aggregate base shall not vary more than
0.05 foot above, nor 0.10 foot below, the planned grade.
C. Aggregate Base Placing: Spread the aggregate base material on the prepared
subgrade by means of suitable spreading devices. The aggregate base material may
be dumped in piles upon the subgrade and spread by bulldozing ahead from the
dumped material. Each layer shall not exceed 0.50 feet. Segregation of large or fine
PAVING AND RESURFACING
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
0250 1-3
particles of aggregate shall be avoided, and the material as spread shall be free from
pockets of large and fine material.
D. Compaction: Compact each layer of aggregate base material to not less than 95%
relative compaction as determined by Test Method Calif. No. 216 or ASTM D1556
(Sand Cone), or Calif. No. 23 1 or ASTM D2922 (Nuclear method when approved by
the Engineer). Compaction shall be in accordance with Section 26-1.05 of the
Standard Specifications. Water aggregate base after compaction as provided in
Section 17 of the Standard Specifications. Paragraph 17-1.04 is not applicable.
3.04 ASPHALT CONCRETE INSTALLATION
A. Apply prime coat at a rate of 0.15-gallon per square yard. Blot any excess which has
not penetrated the base with sand. Remove any loose sand.
B. Apply tack coat a rate of 0.05-gallon per square yard.
C. Spread and compact asphalt concrete in accordance with Standard Specifications
Section 39 to the thickness shown on the Drawings.
D. Protect asphaltic concrete paving until surface has cooled sufficiently to permit
traffic without damage.
E. Immediately remove spilled and splattered materials from adjacent surfaces.
3.05 PAVEMENT MARKINGS
A. Replace existing pavement markings that are removed or damaged by the
construction.
B. Apply pavement markings in accordance with Section84 of the Standard
Specifications. Paragraphs on measurement and payment are not applicable.
3.06 HEADERS
Install wood headers along pavement edges where indicated on the Drawings. Install
new headers where existing wood headers are damaged during construction, or
removed for construction. Install headers with uniform slope between spot elevation
indicated on the Drawings or to conform to existing grades.
END OF SECTION
PAVING AND RESURFACING
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
025 0 1 -4
_-
SECTION 02514
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING (SIDEWALKS)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
B.
1.02
A.
B.
C.
1.03
A.
SUMMARY
Provide Portland cement concrete paving where shown on the Drawings, as specified
herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation.
Related work:
1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to,
General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these
Specifications.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods
needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
Do not commence placement of concrete until mix designs have been reviewed and
approved by the Owner's Designated Representative and all governmental agencies
having jurisdiction, and until copies of the approved mix designs are at the job site and
the batch plant.
Provide access for, and cooperate with, the inspector and testing laboratory described in
Section 01410 of these Specifications.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 0 1620.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 FORMS
A. Provide wood or metal formwork, including adequate bracing, to the lines and grades
shown on the Drawings within a vertical tolerance of 15 mm (0.05') and an alignment
tolerance of 25 mm (1 'I) at any point.
B. Earth forms will not be permitted for paving.
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
025 14-1
2.02 REINFORCEMENT
A. Comply with the following as minimums:
1.
2. Welded wire fabric: ASTM A1 85
3. Bending: ACI 318.
Bars: ASTM A61 5, grade 60, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, using
deformed bars for number 3 and larger.
B. Fabricate reinforcement to the required shapes and dimensions, with fabrication
tolerances complying with the CRSI "Manual of Standard Practices."
C. Do not use reinforcement having any of the following defects:
1.
2.
3.
Bar lengths, depths, or bends exceeding the specified fabricating tolerances;
Bends or kinks not indicated on the Drawings or required for the Work;
Bars with cross-section reduced due to excessive rust or other causes.
D. Incorporate glass fiber reinforcement in all exposed portland cement slabs per
manufacturers recommendations.
2.03 CONCRETE
A. Comply with the following as minimums:
1.
2. Aggregate, general:
Portland cement: ASTM C 150, type I or 11, low alkali.
a. ASTM C30, uniformly graded and clean;
b. Do not use aggregate known to cause excessive shrinkage.
Aggregate, coarse: Crushed rock or washed gravel with maximum size between 20
mm (3/4") and 38 mm (1-1/2"), and with minimum size number 4.
Aggregate, fine: Natural washed sand of hard and durable particles varying fiom
fine to particles passing a 9.5 mm (3/8") screen, of which at least 12% shall pass a
50-mesh screen.
3.
4.
5. Water: Clean and potable.
B. Use only such additives as are recommended in the mix design and approved by the
Owner's Designated Representative and governmental agencies having jurisdiction.
C. Provide concrete in the proportions established by the mix design required under Section
01410 of these Specifications, and to the compressive strength shown on the Drawings.
D. Provide "Hunt TLF" curing agent manufactured by Hunt Process Co., Inc., at the
manufacturer's recommended rate of application.
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
025 14-2
2.04 OTHER MATERIALS
- A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Owner's
Designated Representative.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
3.02
A.
3.03
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.04
A.
SURFACE CONDITIONS
Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
FINAL PREPARATION OF SUBGRADES
After preparation of subgrade as specified in another Section of these Specifications,
thoroughly scarify and sprinkle the entire area to be paved, and then compact to a
smooth, hard, even surface of 90% compaction to receive the aggregates.
PLACEMENT OF BASE COURSE
Base (where required):
1.
2. Compact to 95%.
Spread the specified coarse aggregate to a thickness providing the compacted
thickness shown on the Drawings.
Thickness tolerance: Provide the compacted thicknesses shown on the Drawings within
a tolerance of minus OOmm to plus 13 mm (0.0" to plus 0.5").
Smoothness tolerance: Provide the lines and grades shown on the Drawings within a
tolerance of 15 mm (0.05') vertically and 25 mm (1") in alignment at any point.
Correct deviations by removing materials, replacing with new materials, and reworking
or recompacting as required.
Use only the amount of moisture needed to achieve the specified compaction.
INSTALLATION
Upon completion of base course and formwork, install reinforcement as shown on the
Drawings.
1.
2.
Clean reinforcement to remove loose rust and mill scale, earth, and other materials
which reduce bond or destroy bond with concrete.
Position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement by formwork,
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
025 14-3
construction, and concrete placement operations.
Place reinforcement to obtain the required coverages for concrete protection. 3.
B. Transit mix the concrete in accordance with provisions of ASTM C94.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
With each load, provide ticket certifying to the materials and quantities and to
compliance with the approved mix design.
On the transit-mix ticket, state the time water was first added to the mix.
At the batch plant, withhold 9.25 liters (2-1/2 gal) of water per cubic meter (cu yd)
of concrete.
Upon arrival at the job site, and as directed by the testing laboratory inspector, add
all or part of the withheld water before the concrete is discharged from the mixer.
Mix not less than five minutes after the withheld water has been added, and not less
than one minute of that time immediately prior to discharge of the batch.
Unless otherwise directed, provide 15 minutes total mixing time per batch after first
addition of water.
C. Do not use concrete that has stood over 30 minutes after leaving the mixer, or concrete
that is not placed within 60 minutes after water is introduced into the mix.
D. Conveying:
1.
2.
Place concrete in accordance with the following and pertinent recommendations
contained in ACI 304.
Deposit concrete continuously in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be
placed on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause formation of seams or
planes of weakness within the section.
If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified
herein.
Perform concrete placing at such a rate that concrete which is being integrated with
fresh concrete is still plastic.
Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable in its final location so as to avoid
segregation due to rehandling and flowing.
Do not subject concrete to any procedure which will cause segregation.
Do not use concrete which becomes non-plastic and unworkable, or does not meet
required quality control limits, or has been contaminated by foreign materials.
Remove rejected concrete from the site.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
E. Deposit and consolidate concrete in a continuous operation within the limits of
construction joints until the placing of a panel or section is completed.
1.
2.
3.
Bring surfaces to the correct level with a straightedge, and then strike off.
Use bullfloats or darbies to smooth the surface, leaving it free from bumps and
hollows.
Do not sprinkle water on the plastic surface. Do not disturb the surfaces prior to
start of finishing operations.
_-
F. Expansion joints:
1. Do not permit reinforcement to extend continuously through any expansion joint.
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING
025 14-4
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
2.
3.
4.
Locate expansion joints where indicated, filled to full depth with expansion joint
material.
In curbs, locate 13 mm (1/2") thick joint at the beginning and end of curves, and at
7.62 m (25'-0") centers elsewhere.
In curbs and paving, hold down 13 mm (1/2") and seal exposed joints with joint
sealer.
G. Finishing:
1.
2.
3.
Begin floating when the water sheen has disappeared and when the surface has
stiffened sufficiently to permit the operation.
During or after the first floating, check the planeness of surface with a ten foot
straightedge applied at not less than two different angles.
Cut down high spots and fill low spots, and produce a surface level within 6 mm in
600 mm (1/4" in two feet) as determined by 600 mm (2 ft) straightedge placed
anywhere on the surface in any direction.
Refloat the surface immediately to a uniform sandy texture.
While the surface is still plastic, provide a textured finish by drawing a fiber bristle
broom uniformly over the surface.
a. Unless otherwise directed by the Owner's Designated Representative, provide
the texturing in one direction only.
b. Provide medium broom finish texturing as directed by the Owner's Designated
Representative.
4.
5.
3.05 CURING AND PROTECTION
A. Beginning immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying,
excessively hot or cold temperatures and mechanical injury.
END OF SECTION
i
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
02514-5
SECTION 02529
CONCRETE CURB, GUTTERS, AND SIDEWALKS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
Provide concrete curbs, curbs and gutters, gutters, and sidewalks as shown on the
drawings and as specified herein.
1.02 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS
Wherever the words "Standard Specifications" are referred to, the reference is to the
State of California, Department of Transportation, Standard Specifications dated January
1998.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit certificate of compliance indicating that the concrete complies with the
specifications as product submittals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS -
2.01 CONCRETE
A. Comply with the Standards Specifications. Cement: Type 11 Modified.
B. See specification section 025 14 for sidewalk specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with the Standard Specifications, Section 73, and Paragraphs 1.02 through 1.06,
inclusive.
B. Unless shown otherwise on the Drawings, replace existing curbs, curbs and gutters,
gutters and sidewalks in kind.
C. Adjust structures such as valve boxes, manhole fiames and covers, and electrical vaults
to grade after the curb and gutter or sidewalk has been constructed for a reasonable
distance on all sides of the structure. Complete the concrete work after the structure is
adjusted.
END OF SECTION
CONCRETE CURB, GUTTERS, AND SIDEWALKS
02 529- 1
G&A/99 16-CPWF-Tech Specs Project No. X-XXX
27 FEBRUARY 2003
SECTION 02660
,-
PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES (WATER, SEWER, AND GAS)
(DESIGN BUILD)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Requirements specified in Division 1 form a part of this section.
B. Work Included in this Section: Furnish and install all piping, including fittings, valves,
and accessories as shown on the Drawings, described in the Specifications and as
required to completely interconnect all piping for a complete and operable systems.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All materials and equipment furnished under this section shall: (1) be of a manufacturer
who has been regularly engaged in the design and manufacture of the materials and
equipment for at least 5 years; and (2) be demonstrated to the satisfaction of the
Engineer that the quality is equal to the materials and equipment made by those
manufacturers specifically named herein, if an alternate product manufacturer is
proposed.
B. Factory Quality Control: The Contractor shall test all products as required herein and by
the reference specifications.
C. Field Quality Control.
1. The City will:
a. Inspect field welds and test the welds if it is deemed necessary.
b. Perform bacteriological analysis for pipelines to be disinfected.
a. Perform leakage tests.
b. Be responsible for the costs of additional inspection and retesting by the City
2. The Contractor shall:
resulting from non-compliance.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Layouts and Schematics: Submit detailed installation drawings of all piping and
connected equipment. The drawings shall include each pipe, all fittings, valves, and
other appurtenances (Product Review submittal).
PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
02660-1
2. Submit data to show that the following items conform to the Specification
requirements:
a. Pipe, fittings, and accessories.
b. Fitting, joint fabrication and handhole details for pretensioned concrete cylinder
c. Design calculations for pretensioned concrete cylinder pipe if used.
d. Flexible couplings and flanged coupling adapters.
e. Restrained joints.
f. Valves.
g. Air release valves.
h. Pressure relief valves.
i. Pressure reducing valves.
j. Fire hydrants.
k. Water meters.
3. Submit certified test reports as required herein and by the referenced standard
specifications.
4. Disinfection Schedule and Procedures including:
a. "Normal" disinfection procedure.
b. Emergency disinfection procedure for mains and services which must be returned
to service immediately.
c. Disinfection schedule including number and type of services and length of
disruption of service.
d. Disinfecting agent@).
e. Method of disposal of chlorinated water.
pipe if used (Product Review submittal).
B. Manuals: The Contractor shall furnish manufacturer's installation and operation
manuals, bulletins, and spare parts lists for the following items:
1. All valves over 4-inch size.
2. Air release valves.
3. Pressure relief valves.
4. Pressure reducing valves.
5. Water meters.
C. Affidavits: Submit affidavits from the manufacturer of the following valves and meters:
1. Butterfly valves.
2. Gate valves.
3. Air release valves.
4. Pressure relief valves.
5. Pressure reducing valves.
6. Water meters.
The preceding submittals shall be in the Product Information Category except where
noted.
PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
02660-2
1.04 POTHOLING (CHECK ON LOCATIONS)
A. Do not prepare any shop drawings for, or make final order for, or design any pipe
materials for any particular section of pipeline until all utilities in that section of pipeline
have been exposed, and until such time as no interferences are found between said
existing utilities and the proposed pipeline alignment. If interferences are found in any
particular section of pipeline, do not prepare any shop drawings for, or make final order
for, or design any pipe materials for that particular section of pipeline until the pipeline
alignment has been modified by the Engineer to eliminate all such interferences.
1.05 APPURTENANCES
Provide all necessary assembly bolts, washers and nuts, thrust blocks, supports, gaskets,
flanges, and all other appurtenant items shown on the Drawings, specified or required
for the proper installation and operation of the piping, and devices included in or on the
piping, equipment, and piping accessories.
1.06 CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURE
A. Construction under this Contract involves expansion and/or modification of the existing
water, sewer, gas, electric and telecommunication systems which must continue to
provide service to all buildings during construction.
B. Connections and utilities changes must be programmed to provide the least possible
interruptions of service. Prior to any shutdown all materials, fittings, supports,
equipment and tools shall be on the site and all necessary labor scheduled prior to
starting any connection work. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing at
least 7 days in advance of any required shutdowns so that affected customers may be
notified. In general, shutdowns shall not exceed four hours in duration unless
specifically authorized or indicated in the suggested construction sequence. If a
shutdown of more than four hours is required, the Contractor shall first install temporary
water service connections to all affected houses and other buildings. All temporary
piping shall be disinfected in accordance with Paragraph 3.06 before being put into
service.
C. All work under this Contract shall be conducted in a manner which will minimize
shutdowns, open roadways, or traffk obstructions caused by the construction.
Shutdowns causing damage to adjacent public and private property shall not be
permitted, and any damage resulting shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.
D. Planned utility service shutdowns shall be accomplished during periods of minimum
use. In some cases this will require night or weekend work, which shall be at no
additional cost to the City. The Contractor shall program his work so that service will be
restored in the minimum possible time, and shall cooperate with the City in reducing
PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
02660-3
shutdowns of the utility system to a minimum. No utility interruption will be permitted
without the prior approval of the Engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.02
A.
B.
C.
GENERAL
Pipe and valve sizes are nominal inside diameter unless otherwise noted.
All materials delivered to the job site shall be new, free from defects, and marked to
identie the material, class, and other appropriate data such as thickness for piping.
Acceptance of materials shall be subject to strength and quality testing in addition to
inspection of the completed product. Acceptance of installed piping systems shall be
based on inspection and leakage and bacteriological tests as specified hereinafter.
Buried nuts and bolts for flanges and couplings shall be Type 304 stainless steel unless
otherwise specifically specified herein.
Fusion Epoxy Coating: Materials and application shall be in accordance with
AWWA C2 13, expect application shall be by the fluid bed method only unless the
greatest dimension of the article to be coated exceeds ten feet, in which case electrostatic
spray method may be used.
PIPING MATERIALS
Pipe Designation: Piping materials are designated on the Drawings.
Pipe Systems: Each designation identifies not only the pipe itself, but the entire system
as well as including the associated fittings, appurtenances, and installation and test
procedures.
Ductile Iron Water Main @I):
1. Pipe: Ductile iron, thickness Class 50, AWWA C151.
2. Joints: Push-on, AWWA C1 1 1 as modified.
a. Gaskets: Chloroprene.
b. Restrained joints: Where required by the Drawings, provide restrained joints
capable of deflection after the restraint is installed. Joints shall not separate
under an internal pressure of 250 psi. TR-FLEX by United States Pipe &
Foundry Company; equivalent by American Cast Iron Pipe Company; or equal.
3. Fittings: Ductile iron or cast iron push-on joints, AWWA C 1 10.
a. Special Fittings: Special fittings not available in ductile iron or cast iron pipe
may be fabricated of fusion epoxy lined and coated welded steel pipe with a
PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
02660-4
design pressure of 250 psi. Design and wall thickness shall be submitted to the
Engineer for review.
4. Lining: Standard thickness cement mortar lining for pipe and fittings,
AWWA C104.
5. Protection: Polyethylene encasement, AWWA C 105, black. Single wrap pipe.
Double wrap flanged fittings, mechanical joints, or other appurtenances with
significantly different outside diameters from the pipe. Tape to seal seams and
overlaps shall be plastic adhesive tape at least 4 mils thick and at least 2 inches wide.
6. Bonding: Bond all ductile iron pipe to provide electrical continuity, except that
insulating flanges shall be provided where shown on the Drawings.
7. Field Closure Connections for Restrained Joints: Pipe cut in the field where
necessary and when favorably reviewed by the Engineer shall be connected by one of
the following methods:
a. TR Flex Gripper Ring System by United States Pipe & Foundry Company; or
equal.
b. Series 800 Coverall retainer by EBAA Iron, Inc.; or equal.
8. Flanged Pipe: Where flanges are necessary for connections to equipment or for
insulated joints, pipe shall be thickness Class 53, AWWA C115.
D. Gas Lines and Mains:
1. Conform to Southern California Gas Company standards for materials and
installation.
E. Sewer Pipe:
1. VCP sewer pipe shall conform to Section 207-8 of the Greenbook standards for
public works construction.
3. PVC sewer pipe shall conform to Section 207-17 of the Greenbook standards for
public works construction.
F. Copper Pipe:
1. Pipe: Copper (Cu), ASTM B88, Type K.
2. Joints: Soldered using ASTM B32, alloy Sn96 or Sb5 solder, or flared.
3. Fittings:
a. Soldered: Wrought copper, ASTM B73 for materials and ANSI B16.22 for
dimensions; or cast bronze, ASTM B62 for materials and ANSI B 16.18 for
dimensions.
b. Flared: AWWA C800 and ANSI B16.26.
G. Galvanized Steel Pipe:
1. Pipe: Galvanized steel, ASTM A1 20, Schedule 40.
2. Fittings: Galvanized malleable iron, screwed, ASTM A1 97 for materials,
ANSI B16.3 150 psi for dimensions.
3. Threads: ANSI B2.1.
PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
02660-5
4. Unions: Galvanized malleable iron, ASTM A197 for materials and ANSI B16.39
for dimensions, with brass seats.
5. Thread Compound: Permatex No. 2, Crane equivalent, or equal, or teflon tape.
H. Welded Steel (WS) Pipe
1. Pipe: Cement mortar lined steel cylinder pipe, AWWA C200 except as modified
herein. Pipe shall be cement mortar coated where buried, or if required elsewhere by
the Drawings or Specifications.
a. Dimensions: Nominal inside diameter shall be the minimum net inside clear
lined diameter.
b. Minimum Steel Cylinder Thickness: The pipe manufacturer shall design steel
cylinder for pipe and fittings for the cover shown on the Drawings, in accordance
with AWWA M1 1 . The minimum cylinder thickness for pipe with welded joints
shall be 12 gage. Design criteria areas follow:
1) Superimposed External Load: AASHTO H20
2) Internal Pressure Including Surge Allowance: 250 psi.
3) Internal Negative Pressure: 15 psi.
4) Maximum Allowable Stress: 50 percent of minimum yield point , or 16,500
5) Maximum Deflection Permitted: 2 percent
6) For tapered sections, minimum cylinder thicknesses shall conform to the
requirements for the larger pipe diameter.
psi, whichever is less
2. Joints:
a. Unrestrained: Gasketed bell and spigot Gaskets shall be oil and grease resistant
chloroprene with a minimum tensile strength of 2,000 psi. Coat exposed steel
with factory applied protective coating.
1) Welded joints shall be butt strap, split butt strap, or lap joint. Butt straps and
b. Restrained: Welded, except flanged where shown on the Drawings.
swaged joint details shall be submitted to the Engineer for favorable review.
Rolled lap joints will not be acceptable. The joint shall be designed to
withstand all loads associated with installation and operating conditions. Joint
configuration and welding shall conform to the requirements of AWWA
C206, except Section 6-2 testing, which is modified herein.
2) Provide special closure lap joints at approximately 500-foot intervals in
accordance with AWWA C106.
3) For pipe less than 24-inch diameter, each joint shall be provided with a
handhole, located on the top of the pipe, large enough to permit patching the
lining. Handholes shall include a blind flange or threaded plug and shall be
painted with 10 to 12 mils of Ameron 400 or equal.
applied. Conform to AWWA C205, Appendix A.
4) Cement mortar lining shall be patched after joint testing and may be hand
c. Bonding: Bond all joints except where insulated joints are called for on the
Drawings.
PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
02660-6
3. Fittings: Fittings shall be made of hydrostatically tested cylinders of the same
material and minimum thickness as the pipe, except that short radius elbows shall
have greater thickness if necessary to compensate for stress concentrations. They
shall be as detailed on the Drawings or, if not detailed on the Drawings, shall be
designed by the pipe manufacturer by the method stated in the AWWA Pipe Manual
M11 as modified herein, subject to the favorable review of the Engineer. Unless
otherwise noted or detailed on the Drawings, fitting dimensions shall conform to
AWWA C208. Adding pipe to the fittings does not change the requirement that
fittings conform to AWWA C208 dimensionally, nor does it reclassify the pipe
portion as part of the fitting.
a. Provide reinforcement for fittings (outlets, tees and wyes, etc.) in the form of
collars, wrappers or crotch plates, in accordance with the current revision of
AWWA M11 Table 13-2. Use 250 psi for the design pressure P.
b. Crotch plates shall be designed in accordance with AWWA M1 1 , using a
minimum plate thickness of 1-inch.
c. Mitered 90 Degree Elbows: Four pieces minimum.
d. Mitered 45 Degree Elbows: Three pieces minimum.
e. Nozzles three inches and less shall be Schedule 40 weld fittings. Wheeling Pipe-
0-Lets, Allied Branchlets, or equal. They may be unreinforced.
f. Flares: Flare diameter shall be equal to the flange O.D. for the same size pipe.
Fabricate flares from two sections of truncated cones, one angled 22-1/2 degrees
fiom pipe axis, the other 45 degrees. Grind all interior welds and edges perfectly
smooth before lining.
4. Lining: Cement mortar, 3/4-inch thick AWWA C205, except as modified herein.
Cement shall be Type II.
5. Coating: Cement mortar, 3/4-inch thick over the reinforcement, AWWA C205,
except as noted herein. Cement shall be Type 11. Reinforcement shall be 7/32-inch
diameter minimum rod, applied directly to the cylinder at no more than 2-inch
center-to-center spacing, except that welded wire mesh will be permitted on fittings
only over the dimensions defined by AWWA C208 for fittings.
6. Flanges: Steel ring flanges conforming to AWWA C207, Class E. Drilling shall be
Class E unless different drilling is required to match adjacent equipment or valves.
Welding shall conform to AWWA C207. The inside diameter of all flanges shall be
no more than 3/16-inch greater than the outside diameter of the steel cylinder.
Flanges shall be welded to the cylinder without warping and with flange face
perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the cylinder. Where required, provide
special flanges to match and mate valves.
7. Interior Bracing: Each section of pipe 24-inch and larger shall have adequate interior
bracing to prevent the pipe fiom being deformed during handling, transportation,
storage, and installation. Bracing shall not be removed until construction operations
are complete.
8. Factory Testing: Hydrostatic pressure tests performed in accordance with
Section 3.4 of AWWA C200 will be witnessed by the Engineer. Specials shall be
tested in accordance with Section 4.3 of AWWA C200. The test method shall be
PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
02660-7
subject to the favorable review of the Engineer and the tests will be witnessed by the
Engineer.
9. Marking: Cylinders and completed pipe and fittings shall be marked in accordance
with AWWA C200, Section 1.9. The manufacturer shall maintain records that
identify the cylinder used for all completed pipe and fittings. All invoices, test
results and other documentation required to be furnished to the Engineer shall
identify the cylinders and completed pipe and fittings by use of this marking system.
10. Protective Coating: Exposed steel at joints, handholes, flanges and other locations
shall be painted with 10 mils dry film thickness of high build epoxy, Tnemec
Series 104, or equal.
during storage and transportation.
1 1. Interior Moisture Control: Maintain interior moisture and provide plastic end caps
I. Polyvinyl Chloride (Water) Pipe:
1. Pipe: Polyvinyl chloride pressure pipe, cast iron pipe outside dimensions. Pipe shall
be UL listed or Factory Mutual Approved.
a. 4-inch through 12-inch: AWWA C900, Pressure Class 150 minimum.
a. Unrestrained Joints: Bell and spigot, gasketed; or twin gasket coupling.
b. Restrained Joints: Bell and spigot (push-on) gasketed, or mechanical joints; both
3. Joints:
using ductile iron clamp-on restraining devices.
1) Restraining Devices: Ductile iron with ductile iron or cor-ten rods and bolts.
Pressure rating of at least 150 psi. Series 1500 by EBBA Iron; equivalent by
Uni-Flange; or equal for bell and spigot joints. Series 500 by EBBA Iron;
equivalent by Uni-Flange; or equal for mechanical joints.
4. Gaskets: Isoprene. Submit two sample gaskets of each gasket type with an
explanation of the markings.
5. Fittings: Fusion epoxy lined and coated push-on cast iron or mechanical joint,
AWWA C 1 10, with hubs cast and/or ground as required for pipe furnished and
fusion epoxy coating.
2.03 PIPE COUPLINGS
A. General: For typical pipe joints refer to pipe material specifications. Other joint devices
shall be fwnished where called for as specified below.
B. Flexible Couplings and Flange Coupling Adaptors:
1. Sleeve: Cast iron or fabricated steel.
2. Followers: Cast iron, ductile iron, or steel.
3. Sleeve Bolts: ASTM A325, Type 3; malleable iron; or equivalent.
4. Coating: Fusion epoxy line and coat sleeve and followers.
5. Pressure Rating: 250 psi.
6. Buried Flexible Coupling Sleeve: Long barrel
7. Manufacturers:
PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
02660-8
.-
a. Flexible Couplings:
1) Connecting Pipe with Identical Outside Diameters: Smith-Blair 41 1 or 43 1,
2) Connecting Pipe with Slightly Different Outside Diameters: Smith-Blair 413
Dresser Style 38 or 53, or equal.
or R 441, Dresser Style 162, or equal.
b. Flange Coupling Adaptors:
1) Connecting New Pipe or New Pipe to Existing Non-Ferrous Pipe: Smith-Blair
2) Connecting New Pipe to Existing Ferrous Pipe: Insulating flange coupling
912 or 913, Dresser Style 127 or 128, or equal.
adaptor with insulating boot: Smith-Blair 932 or 933, or equal.
7. Gaskets: Oil and grease resistant; Smith-Blair Grade 60; or equal.
9. Protection for Buried Connectors and Adaptors:
Double wrap with polyethylene encasement, AWWA C105 and tape the edges of
the encasement with PVC tape.
10. Bonding: Bond all flexible couplings and flange coupling adaptors unless insulated
couplings are required.
C. Flexible Expansion Joints:
1.
2.
3.
4. Lining: Fusion epoxy.
5. Connections: Flanges.
6.
Type: double ball joints with integral expansion sleeves. Minimum 30 degrees
deflection and 8-inches expansion.
Materials: Ductile iron conforming to AWWA C153.
Pressure Rating: 350 psi minimum.
Manufacturer: EBBA Iron Flex-Tend; or equal.
D. House sewer service lateral connections between existing pipe and cast iron soil pipe
replacement pipe shall be made with rubber couplings and elastomeric bushings
sealed with stainless steel bands; Calder couplings as manufactured by Joints, Inc.;
Fernco; or equal.
PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
02660-9
2.04 WATER VALVES AND ACCESSORIES
A. General Requirements for Valves:
1.
2.
All valves of each type shall be the product of one manufacturer.
All valves shall be furnished with control assembly, operators, handwheels,
levers, or other suitable type wrench including handles as specified herein or as
shown on the Drawings.
All threaded stem valves shall open by turning the valve stem counter-clockwise.
The exterior of all valves and valve operators shall be painted with two coats of
Tape Coat Mastic; Protect0 Wrap CA1180 Mastic; or equal, except where
otherwise indicated.
3.
4.
B. Valves and Accessories:
1. Butterfly Valves:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Rating: 150 psi water. Leaktight in both directions.
Type: Flanged body, or as shown on the Drawings, AWWA C504, geared
operator, resilient seated, 90 degree seating.
Connections: Flange, as shown on the Drawings.
Materials: Cast iron body; cast iron or ductile iron disc with Ni-Chrome or
Type 3 16 stainless steel edge; Type 304 stainless steel shaft; disc to be
secured to shaft with Type 304 stainless steel taper pins.
Operator: Traveling-nut type, 2-inch standard AWWA nut, designed for
buried service, watertight to 10 psi with extension stem as detailed on the
Drawings. Provide three valve operator tee handles to the City.
Valve Seat: Buna-N seat shall be applied to the valve body.
Bearings: Self-lubricating and corrosion resistant.
Finish: Internal, asphalt varnish in accordance with AWWA (2504;
external, factory applied coal tar epoxy, 16 mils minimum thickness.
Manufacturers: Pratt Groundhog, equivalent by DeZurik, or equal.
e.
f.
g. h.
i.
a. Rating: 200 psi water
b.
c.
d. Stem Seal: O-ring
e. Finish: Fusion epoxy
f.
2. Gate Valves:
Type: Resilient seated, non-rising stem, AWWA C509, as modified herein
Connection: Flanged, or as shown on the Drawings
Manufacturers: American Darling CRS-80; equivalent by Kennedy; or
equal.
3. Not Used
4. NotUsed
5. Pressure Reducing Valves:
a.
b. Rating: Class 125.
c.
Type: Globe style, flanged ends, pilot controlled, diaphragm actuated.
Size: 6-inch through 12-inch as shown on the Drawings.
PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
02660- 10
d.
e.
f.
g.
Materials: Cast iron body, bronze trim, and nylon reinforced synthetic
rubber diaphragm.
Control: Maintain constant downstream pressure regardless of flow rate or
inlet pressure.
Adjustment Range: 15 to 75 psi
Manufacturer: Clayton Model 90G-01 BC with Model X46A Strainer,
equivalent by Bailey, or equal.
Type: Propeller meter with sealed magnetic drive and sealed totalizer(s).
Provide totalizer+) as shown on the Drawings.
6. Water Meters:
a.
b. Rating: 150 psi
c. Materials:
1) 2) Magnets: Ceramic
3)
Transmitters: Provide a 4-20mA transmitter for well flow meter (FQIT-
W7) and station discharge flow meter (FQIT- 1 OOF). Transmitter to provide
4mA to zero flow and 20mA at maximum scale range. Transmitters shall be
of solid state construction. Transmitters shall be Water Specialties TR-16,
equivalent by Rockwell, or equal.
f. Manufacturer: Water Specialties ML-04, equivalent by Rockwell, or equal.
Valve Boxes, Adjustable Screw Type:
a. Materials: Cast iron, top and center sections and base and cover.
Meter Tube: Fabricated steel with fusion epoxy lining and coating
Bearings: Stainless steel or ceramic
d. Units of Measurement: gallons
e.
7.
2.05 WATER SERVICE CONNECTIONS
A. General: All corporation stops, service clamps or saddles, and service connection
accessories shall be the product of one (1) manufacture.
B. Service Clamps:
1.
2.
Type: Bronze, double strap, retained O-ring gasket, rolled strap threads, and
tapping boss with full length threads.
Manufacturer: Mueller Co., H-16130; equivalent by Clow; or equal.
C. Corporation Stops:
1. Rating: 100 psi water
2.
3.
Type: Thread inlet; compression connection outlet
Manufacturer: Mueller Co. Model 110; equivalent by Ford; or equal.
D. Curb Stops:
1. Rating: 100 psi water
2.
3.
Type: copper service thread both ends
Manufacturer: Mueller Co., H-1502-2; equivalent by Ford; or equal.
PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
02660-1 1
E. Meter Boxes
1.
2.
Type: Plastic structural foam box with plastic locking cover having a hinged
plastic reader lid and a metal base plate.
Manufacturer: Mueller Co., H-1310 and H-1312; equivalent by Clow; or equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. General Handling and Placing:
1. Exercise great care to prevent injury to or scoring of the pipe lining and coating,
as applicable, during handling, transportation or storage. Handle fusion epoxy
coated pipe in accordance with AWWA C213. Pipe shall not be stored on rough
ground and rolling of the pipe on the coating will not be permitted. Repair any
damaged pipe sections, specials, or fittings or replace at the direction of the
Engineer.
Inspect each pipe fitting, valve and accessory carefully before installation.
Inspect the interior and exterior protective coatings and patch all damaged areas
in the field or replaced at the direction of the Engineer.
Place or erect all piping to accurate line and grade and backfill, support, hang, or
brace against movement as specified or shown on the Drawings, or as required
for proper installation. Remove all dirt and foreign matter from the pipe interior
prior to installation and thoroughly clean all joints before joining.
Use reducing fittings where any change in pipe size occurs. Bushings shall not
be used, unless specifically noted on the Drawings. Use eccentric reducing
fittings wherever necessary to provide free drainage of lines.
Connections between ferrous and non-ferrous piping and accessories shall be
made using a dielectric coupling, union, or flange.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B. General Buried Piping Installation:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Trenching, bedding, and backfill for buried piping shall be as shown on the
Drawings and as specified in Section 02200, EARTHWORK (SITEWORK)
Where no grade elevations are shown on the Drawings, buried piping shall have
at least three feet of cover.
Provide each pipe with a firm, uniform bearing for its full length in the trench
except at field joints. Do not lay pipe in water or when trench conditions or
weather are unsuitable for such work.
Protect buried piping against thrust by use of restrained pipe joints, or thrust
blocks if shown on the Drawings. Securely brace all exposed free pipe ends.
Do not pull bell and spigot, gasketed joints more than 75 percent of the
maximum deflection permitted by the pipe manufacturer.
PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
02660- 12
C. Water Main Installation:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
The Contractor is advised that precautions taken to keep the pipeline clean
during construction will facilitate achieving the disinfection requirements of this
project with a minimum of effort and expense. Compliance with these suggested
minimum procedures will not relieve the Contractor of the disinfection
requirements.
Prior to installation, thoroughly clean the interior of each length of pipe and each
fitting or valve and inspect to ensure that no foreign material remains. Cover
both ends with plastic and do not uncover them until just prior to completing the
joint.
Whenever pipe laying is discontinued for short periods, or whenever work is
stopped at the end of the day, close the open ends of the pipe with watertight
plugs or bulkheads.
Provide adequate trench pumping to ensure against groundwater contacting the
inside of the pipeline at any time. Do not lower any pipe or fitting into a trench
where groundwater is present and may enter the pipe. When necessary, pump
the water from trenches and keep the trench dry until the joints have been
completed and the open ends of the pipe have been closed with a watertight
plug. Do not remove the plug until the trench has again been pumped dry.
Keep new pipe sections clean and dry.
When making the connection between a new pipeline and an existing pipeline, or
when repairing a damaged pipe, take the following extra precautions:
a. Clean the exterior of the existing pipeline of all dirt and debris, and spray or
swab with a standard 5.25% or stronger chlorine solution (as specified) in
the immediate vicinity of the work. Clean equipment and materials,
including new pipe and fittings, to be used in making these connections of
all dirt and debris and disinfect them. Allow at least 30 minutes contact
time for disinfection before the chlorine solution is diluted or rinsed off.
Provide sufficient trench pumps to prevent flooding of the trench.
When an old line is opened, either by accident or by design, the excavation
may be wet or badly contaminated from groundwater. Apply liberal
quantities of standard chlorine solution or tablets to the open trench areas to
lessen the danger from such pollution. Tablets are recommended because
they dissolve slowly and continue to release hypochlorite as water is
pumped from the excavation. Scatter liberally around and locate the tablets
so that flow entering the work site will contact the disinfecting agent.
Trench application should be done very carefully to avoid contact by skin
and clothing with chlorine solution. Minimally, safety dictates wearing
safety goggles and rain gear.
When excavating a leaking or broken pipeline, "valve-off I the system
gradually to less than water tightness. This is to prevent causing areas of
zero pressure which would allow entry of foreign material. A flow should
be maintained which is slightly less than trench pump capability. Once the
b.
c.
PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
02660- 13
break is exposed and cleaned to disallow site contamination, the valving
can then be made water tight.
E. Installation Specifics:
1. Ductile Iron Pipe:
a.
b.
Buried pipe shall be installed in accordance with AWWA C600.
Where required, wrap buried pipe with 8 mil polyethylene film in
accordance with AWWA C105. Continuously seal seams and overlaps with
tape. Seal circumferential overlaps with two turns of tape, half lapped.
Gather excess polyethylene on top of pipe so as not to block backfill
material from getting under bottom of pipe. Use caution so as not to rip or
cut the polyethylene film. Seal any rips or cuts in the film with tape.
Wherever the pipeline crosses over or under a sewer main or house service
lateral, center a standard length pipe, 18-foot minimum, on said sewer main
or lateral so as to have the pipeline joints as far as possible away from the
sewer. This may require field cutting of some pipe pieces.
Flanged Joints: Flanged joints shall be made up tight with care being taken
to avoid undue strain in the flanges, fittings, and other accessories. Bolt
holes shall be aligned for each flanged joint. Bolts shall be full size for bolt
holes; use of undersize bolts to make up for misalignment of bolt holes or
for any other purpose will not be permitted. Adjoining flange faces shall
not be out of parallel to such a degree that the flanged joint cannot be made
watertight without over-straining the flange. Replace any flanged pipe or
fitting whose dimensions do not allow the making of a proper flanged joint
as specified herein by one of proper dimensions. Clean flanges prior to
making joints.
Restrained Joints: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Pull slack out of joint after makeup.
Installation of pipe shall be similar to requirements of AWWA C600.
Field welding of joints shall be in accordance with AWWA C206, except
that the weld testing shall be in accordance with these Specifications.
Following satisfactory testing of the weld, the interior of all welded joints
shall be cement mortar lined and the exterior of the joints shall be cement
mortar coated in accordance with Appendix A of AWWA C205, except that
pipe 24-inch and less shall be finished using the handhole. Prior to coating
the exterior, tack weld one layer of wire mesh to the pipe.
Steel edges not encased in concrete shall receive a protective coating.
Bell and Spigot: Apply lubricant to gasket and to spigot. Lubricant shall be
a type recommended by the pipe and gasket manufacturers. Push or draw
spigot into gasketed bell with a pulling tool devised especially for this
purpose. Install rubber couplings with stainless steel bands for connections
between sewer service lateral and Sewer Pipe.
c.
d.
e.
2. Welded Steel Pipe:
a.
b.
c.
d.
a.
3. Sewer Pipe:
PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES
hoject No. 3688 03 Jan 03
02660- 14
4. Copper Pipe:
a.
b.
c.
Bends shall be made in a manner that does not crimp or flatten pipe.
Dielectric unions shall be installed at connections with ferrous piping.
Pipe shall have joints squarely cut clean, properly fluxed and heated before
solder is placed in the joint. Joints must be driven up tight before solder is
added. Compression and flared joints shall be made up in accordance with
the manufacturer's instructions.
5. Galvanized Steel Pipe: Threaded joints shall have connections made metal to
metal tight. All burrs shall be removed from ends of pipe, and threads shall be
cleaned of all oil and chips. Male threads shall be coated with joint lubricant.
Polyvinyl Chloride Water Pipe: Installation shall conform to AWWA M23,
Chapters 6 and 7, as modified herein.
6.
3.02 COUPLING INSTALLATION
A. Flexible Couplings and Flange Coupling Adaptors: Prior to installation, thoroughly
clean oil, scale, rust, and dirt from the pipe to provide a clean seat for the gasket.
Care shall be taken that the gaskets are wiped clean before they are installed. If
necessary, flexible couplings and flanged coupling adapter gaskets may be lubricated
with soapy water or manufacturer's standard lubricant before installation on the pipe
ends. Install in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Bolts shall be
tightened progressively, drawing up bolt on opposite sides a little at a time until all
bolts have a uniform tightness. Workers tightening bolts shall be equipped with
torque-limiting wrenches or other favorably reviewed type. Anchor studs on
restrained flanged coupling adapters shall be installed so as to lock into holes drilled
through pipe wall in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation.
B. Flexible Expansion Joints: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
unless otherwise shown, install flat, with 1/2 the maximum expansion
3.03 INSTALLATION OF VALVES AND ACCESSORIES
A. Wrap buried valve bodies as specified for flexible couplings and flanged coupling
adapters.
B. Use reducing fittings where any change in pipe size occurs between valves or
accessories and the attached pipeline. Bushings shall not be used, unless specifically
noted on the Drawings. Use eccentric reducing fittings wherever necessary to provide
free drainage of lines. Inspect each piece of pipe and each fitting carefully to see that
there is no defective workmanship on pipe, or obstructions in pipes and fittings.
PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
02660-1 5
3.04 CLEANING
Prior to testing, the inside of each completed pipeline shall be thoroughly cleaned of
all dirt, loose scale, sand and other foreign material. Cleaning shall be by sweeping,
flushing with water internal cleaning device or "pig" or blowing with compressed air,
as appropriate for the size and type of pipe. Flushing shall achieve a velocity of at
least 3 feet per second. The Contractor shall install temporary strainers, temporarily
disconnect equipment or take other appropriate measures to protect equipment while
cleaning piping. Cleaning shall be completed after any repairs.
3.05 FIELD TESTING
A. General: Perform leakage tests on all pipe installed in this project. Furnish all
equipment, material, personnel, test media and supplies to perform the tests and make
all taps and other necessary temporary connections. The test pressure, allowable
leakage and test medium shall be as specified. Perform leakage tests on all piping at a
time agreed upon and in the presence of the Engineer. The Contractor may purchase
water for construction, cleaning, testing and disinfection of the pipelines from the
City at a fire hydrants designated by the City. At any connection to the City water
system, the Contractor shall provide an air-gap or reduced pressure backflow valve
system to prevent backflow into the water source.
B. Buried Piping: Perform the leakage test for buried piping after all pipe is installed
and bacldilled. However, preliminary tests may be conducted prior to backfill. If
preliminary tests are conducted, provide any necessary temporary thrust restraint.
C. Accessories: It is the responsibility of the Contractor to block off or remove
equipment, valves, gauges, etc., which are not designed to withstand the full test
pressure.
D. Testing Apparatus: Provide pipe taps, nozzles and connections as necessary in piping
to permit testing, addition of test media, and draining lines and disposal of water, as is
necessary. Plug these openings in a manner favorably reviewed by the Engineer after
use. Provide all required temporary bulkheads.
E. Correction of Defects: If leakage exceeds the allowable, repair or replace the
installation and repeat leakage tests as necessary until conformance to the leakage test
requirements specified herein have been fulfilled. All visible leaks shall be repaired
even if the pipeline passes the allowable leakage test.
F. Reports: Keep records of each piping test, including:
1.
2. Test pressure.
3. Date of test.
Description and identification of piping tested.
PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
02660- 16
4.
5. Test evaluation.
6.
Witnessing by Contractor and Engineer.
Remarks, to include such items as:
a. Leaks (type, location).
b. Repairs made on leaks.
Submit test reports to the Engineer.
G. Venting: Where not shown on the Drawings, the Contractor may install valved
"TEES" or corporation stops and saddles at high points on piping to permit venting of
air. Valves shall be capped after testing is completed.
H. Testing Specifics:
1. Water Transmission Mains:
a.
b. Duration: Four hours.
c.
d. Medium: Potable water.
e.
Method: AWWA C600, as modified herein.
Pressure: 250 psi measured at lowest point of section of pipeline being
tested.
Allowable Leakage: Leakage shall be defined as the quantity of test
medium that must be added to the section of pipeline being tested to
maintain the specified test pressure for the specified test duration.
Maximum allowable leakage shall be as specified in AWWA C600.
2. Sewer Pipe:
a. Sewage Service:
1) Duration: One hour.
2) Pressure: 6psi.
3) Medium: Water.
4) Allowable Leakage: None.
3. Copper and Galvanized Steel Pipe:
a. Duration: Four hours.
b. Pressure: 150 psi.
c. Medium: Water.
d. Allowable Leakage: None.
3.06 DISINFECTION OF POTABLE WATER SYSTEMS
A. Disinfect all water mains and interconnected piping after testing and before being
placed into service to ensure their bacteriological safety. Disinfection shall be
accomplished under the supervision of the Contractor by a person skilled and
experienced in the operation of water systems. Following disinfection and flushing,
the City will take water samples for bacteriological analysis of the water. If the
specified bacteriological requirements are not satisfied, the disinfection procedure
must be repeated until the requirements are met.
PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
02660- 17
B. Mains:
1.
2.
3. Method: Continuous-Feed.
Standard: AWWA C65 1 as amended herein.
Forms of Chlorine: Sodium hypochlorite or calcium hypochlorite.
C. Small Pipelines (less than 3-inch):
1. Preparation: Provide the system with a one-inch minimum service cock or valve
or other means to inject chlorine solution at a point within two or three feet of its
junction with the supply source. When system is complete thoroughly flush it by
fully opening every outlet until clear water flows from all of them.
Disinfecting Agent: Sodium hypochlorite or calcium hypochlorite in sufficient
quantities to produce chlorine concentration of at least 50 parts per million in the
system.
a.
2.
3. Disinfecting Procedure:
Connect a hand-operated pump, or other means of injecting the disinfecting
agent, to one-inch minimum service cock or valve or other injection device.
Pump must provide a pressure greater than that of supply of system.
With system completely full of water and supply valve open, proceed to
adjust every outlet of system so that a trickle of water flows from each.
Inject disinfectant slowly and continuously at an even rate, not in slugs,
until a test at each outlet shows a free chlorine residual concentration of at
least 50 parts per million.
Close all outlets and valves, including valve connecting to supply line and
one-inch minimum service cock on solution injection connection. Maintain
condition for 24 hours. After 24 hours test for residual chlorine at each
outlet. The free residual chlorine concentration indicated should be not less
than 10 ppm. If the indicated free chlorine concentration is less than
10 ppm, the disinfection procedure must be repeated until an approved
result is obtained.
b.
c.
d.
4. When the above procedure has been completed to the satisfaction of the
Engineer, flush out entire system with fresh water until tests at all outlets show a
residual of not more than 0.5 ppm.
D. Chlorine Residual Testing: AWWA C651, Appendix A, DPD Drop Dilution Method,
except where otherwise specified.
E. Bacteriological Analyses of Water: After the completion of disinfecting procedure,
including the final flushing as described heretofore, the Engineer will obtain water
samples from this system for bacteriological analyses. Requirements for satisfactory
disinfection of water supply are that bacteriological analyses (Heterotrophic plate
count) indicate that water samples are negative for coliformnerogenes organisms, and
that total plate count is less than 100 bacteria per cubic centimeter. If bacteriological
analyses do not satisfy the above requirements, then disinfection procedure must be
repeated until these requirements are met.
PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
02660- 1 8
.-
F. Disposal of Disinfection Solution: Dechlorinate and dispose of disinfection solution
in accordance with applicable regulations. Take care to assure that chlorinated water
is not spilled in drains.
END OF SECTION
PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
02660- 19
SECTION 02720
DRAINAGE
.-
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Work Included: Construct water runoff drainage system and perform all fine grading
as shown on the Drawings, described in these specifications, and as required to
construct a complete and operable storm water runoff drainage system.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following:
Shop Drawings: Submit detailed drawings and specifications for on-site storm water
drainage plan, including location of stockpiled excavate material.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 STORM DRAIN PIPE
A. Storm Drain Pipe shall be PVC Plastic Pipe conforming to the Greenbook Standard
Specifications for Public Works Construction, Section 207- 17.
2.2 CATCH BASINS
A. Catch Basins and inlets shall conform to Section 03401.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS METALS
A. Metal products shall conform to Section 05500.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 CONSTRUCTION OF DRAINAGE FACILITIES
A.
B.
Construct drainage facilities as indicated on the drawings to direct site drainage away
fiom the buildings and towards the collection facilities.
Provide trash pump, standby power system, and means of legally disposing of site
drainage during construction.
END OF SECTION
DRAINAGE
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
02720-1
SECTION 02829
FENCING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. The requirements of Division 1 form a part of this section.
B. This section covers all materials and work required €or the furnishing and installation
of chain link fence, gates, gate operators, and appurtenances, including temporary
fence.
1.02 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
All work and materials shall conform to the requirements of Section 80 of the
Caltrans Standard Specifications, except as modified herein. Paragraphs 80-3.03,
80-3.04, 80-4.03 and 80-4.04 do not apply. In case of any conflict between the
Caltrans Standard Specifications and the Contract Plans and Specifications, the latter
shall control.
1.03 TEMPORARY FENCING
Where it is necessary to temporarily remove or alter portions of the existing fence,
the Contractor shall install adequate bracing to maintain original tension in the
remaining fence. Temporary fencing shall be installed to maintain security as
required. The fencing shall be of adequate design to prevent inadvertent access by
either people or livestock. Upon completion of the work, remove the temporary
fencing and rebuild and restore all fences to their original position, or revised
position as shown on the Drawings, using all new material. Salvaged existing
materials may be used if undamaged and if approved by the Engineer.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
Submit in the Product Information category complete descriptive information and
technical specifications on the chain link fence, gates, gate and appurtenances.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 TEMPORARY FENCING
A. Temporary fencing shall consist of hot-dip galvanized or painted steel, or pretreated
or untreated wood posts and braces of suit able length and strength to provide for
FENCING
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
02829-1
cantilever support of 5 strands of barbed wire with top strand placed 4-feet above the
ground surface. Bottom wire shall be not more than 9-112-inches above ground
surface and the remaining strands between top and bottom strands shall be equally
spaced.
B. Materials:
1. Steel fence posts and assemblies shall conform to ASTM A702. Posts and
assemblies shall be T-shape Class B steel with anchor plates, painted or hot-dip
galvanized and not less than 7-1/2 feet long. The anchor plate may be omitted if
the posts and assemblies are fdy embedded to a minimum depth of 3 feet in a
concrete footing with a minimum diameter of 6 inches.
END OF SECTION
FENCING
02829-2
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
SECTION 02900
LANDSCAPE PLANTING
PART1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK:
A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, transportation, and services necessary to
provide and install landscape planting as shown on the drawings and described
herein.
6. Related Work Specified In Other Sections:
1. Landscape Maintenance
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND REQUIREMENTS:
A. Source Quality Control:
1. Arrange procedure for inspection of plant material with Landscape
Architect prior to work. Should the contractor desire the Landscape
Architect to inspect the plant material at the nursery prior to delivery, the
Contractor shall notifl the Landscape Architect one week prior to this
requested inspection. The Landscape Architect shall invoice the
Contractor for the inspection on an hourly basis, portal to portal, including
any other expenses incurred. All such invoices shall be paid to the
Landscape Archtect prior to any other inspections by the Landscape
Architect to the project site.
Submittal of pictures shall not be considered as a final inspection of plant
material. Final acceptance or rejection of plant material shall only be
considered on-site with the actual plant material being considered.
2.
1.03 SUBMITTALS:
A. Certificate of Inspection of plant material by State or Federal Authority shall be
presented if requested by the City.
LANDSCAPE PLANTING
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
02900- 1
1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Delivery:
1. Deliver fertilizer to site in original unopened containers bearing
manufacturer’s guaranteed chemical analysis, name, trademark, and
conformance to state law.
Deliver plants with legible identification labels.
a.
b.
Protect plant material during delivery to prevent damage to root ball or
desiccation of leaves.
The Contractor shall notify the Landscape Architect forty eight (48) hours
in advance of delivery of all plant materials and shall submit an itemized
list of the plants.
Store plant material in the shade and protect from the weather.
Maintain and protect plant material not to be planted within four (4) hours.
2.
Label trees, evergreens, bundles of containers of like shrubs, or
groundcover plants.
Use durable waterproof labels with water-resistant ink which will
remain legible for at least 60 days.
3.
4.
B. Storage:
1.
2.
C. Handling:
1.
2.
Do not drop plant materials.
Do not pick up container plant material by stems or trunks.
1.05 JOB CONDITIONS:
A. Perform actual planting only when weather and soil conditions are suitable in
accordance with locally accepted industry practice.
1.06 SAMPLES AND TESTS:
A. The City reserves the right to take and analyze samples of materials for
conformity to specifications at any time. Rejected materials shall be immediately
removed from the site at the Contractor’s own expense. The cost of testing of
materials not meeting specifications shall be paid by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall have soil samples tested after finish grades have been
established. Take samples to best represent the site soil conditions. Surface
samples shall be taken with a trowel at 0” to 12” deep into finish grade. Should
sub-surface samples be requested, these shall be taken at a depth of 30’’ to 36”
into finish grade. All samples shall be tested by an established soils laboratory for
soil fertility and agricultural suitability. Each sample shall contain approximately
6.
LANDSCAPE PLANTING
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
02900-2
one quart, but no less, and be labeled per plan location number or site location.
Copies of the laboratory’s recommendations shall be sent to the City and the
Landscape Architect upon receipt by the Contractor with a statement denoting and
additional or deductive costs. The Contractor shall then install soil amendments
and backfill to conform to the soil laboratory’s recommendations by first
requesting and receiving a written change order from the City. This report shall
also contain recommendations for import soil for over native soil, and/or any
other special conditions particular to the project site and design. The City may
request additional testing of finish grades to determine actual amendment rates per
1.06 A above.
1.07 GUARANTEE AND REPLACEMENT:
A. All plant material installed under the contract shall be guaranteed against any and
all poor, inadequate or inferior materials andor workmanship for a period of one
(1) year for trees, and ninety (90) days for shrubs and groundcovers from the
effective date of completion of the Maintenance Phase of the project as
established by the City. Any plant found to be dead or in poor condition due to
faulty materials or workmanship, as determined by the Landscape Architect, shall
be replaced by the Contractor at his expense. Material to be replaced within this
guarantee period shall be replaced by the Contractor within seven (7) days of
written notification by the City.
Any materials found to be dead, missing or in poor condition during the
Maintenance Period shall be replaced immediately. The Landscape Architect
shall be the sole judge as to the condition of the material.
B.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS:
A. The following organic and soil amendments and fertilizer are to be used for
bidding purposes only. Specific amendments and fertilizer specification will be
made after grading operations are complete and soil samples are tested by the
Contractor.
All materials shall be of standard, approved and first grade quality and shall be in
prime condition when installed and accepted. Any commercially processed or
packaged material shall be delivered to the site in the original unopened container
bearing the manufacturer’s guaranteed analysis. Contractor shall supply the
Landscape Architect with a sample of all supplied materials accompanied by
analytical data from an approved laboratory source illustrating compliance or
bearing the manufacturer’s guaranteed analysis upon request.
B.
LANDSCAPE PLANTING
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
02900-3
C. Organic Material:
1.
2.
3.
Nitrogen Stabilized: 0.56 to 0.84% N based on dry weight for redwood
sawdust.
Particle Size: 95%-100% passing 6.35mm standard sieve; 80%-100%
passing 2.33mm standard sieve.
Salinity: The saturation extract conductivity shall not exceed 3.5
millimhos/centimeter at 25 degrees centigrade as determined by saturation
extract method.
Iron Content: Minimum 0.08% dilute acid soluble Fe on dry weight basis. 4.
5. Ash: 0-6.0% (dry weight).
1.
E. Fertilizer:
1.
D. Soil Amendments:
Gypsum: Agricultural grade produce containing 98% minimum calcium
sulfate.
Commercial planting fertilizer for annual color and/or groundcover areas
characterized by rooted cuttings.. Fertilizer shall consist of the following
percentages by weight and shall be mixed by a commercial fertilizer
supplier:
12% nitrogen
12% phosphoric acid
12% potash
Slow-release type, containing the following percentages of
nutrients by weight:
20% nitrogen
10% phosphoric acid
5% potash
2 1 gram tablets as manufactured by Agriform or approved
equivalent, applied per manufacturer’s recommendations.
2. Planting tablets:
a.
b.
F. Top Soil:
1.
2.
Top soil, as required, shall be obtained from on-site planting excavations if
at all possible.
Topsoil shall consist of a natural, fertile, friable, sandy loam soil
possessing the characteristics of representative soils in the vicinity which
produce heavy growth of crops, grasses, or other vegetation and shall be
obtained from natural well drained areas. Before removal of the topsoil,
the surface at the source of supply is to be stripped to a depth of six inches
in order to remove weed seeds, roots, etc. Imported topsoil shall consist of
either fine sand or loamy sand textured soil meeting the following
specifications:
Silt plus clay content of the soil shall not exceed 30% by weight with a
LANDSCAPE PLANTING
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
02900-4 -.
minimum 95% passing the 2.0 millimeter sieve. The sodium absorption
ratio (SAR) shall not exceed 6 and the electrical conductivity (ECe) of the
saturation extract of the soil shall not exceed 3.0 millimhos/centimeter at
25 degrees Centigrade. The boron content of this soil shall be no greater
that 1 ppm as measured on the saturation extract. The pH shall not exceed
7.0 and be not less than 6.0. In order to insure conformance, samples of
the import soil shall be submitted to a qualified soil laboratory for analysis
prior to shipping.
This specification applies to import soil to be used for backfill purposes in
problem soil areas. In landscape areas where no soil problems exist, the
textural characteristics shall be similar to native soil.
The source of soil shall be free from Bermuda grass and other noxious
weeds or grasses. Topsoil shall be free from refuse, heavy roots, clay
lumps, stones larger than one inch in size, noxious weeds, sticks, brush,
litter and other deleterious substances. In no case shall there be more than
five percent by volume of the following: stones larger than one inch,
coarse sand, and small clay lumps.
The Contractor shall furnish the City with the proposed source or sources
of topsoil to be used at least fifteen (15) working days prior to delivery.
The Contractor at his own expense, shall obtain soil samples from his
intended top soil source and have a soil analysis performed by a soil
testing laboratory to ensure conformity with the preceding specifications.
Topsoil shall not be delivered to the work site prior to approval by the
City. Any delay caused by the failure of soil tests to meet these
specifications shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.
G. Plant Material:
1. Plants shall be in conformance with the California State Department of
Agriculture’s regulation for nursery inspections, rules and rating. All
plants shall have a normal habit of growth and shall be sound, healthy,
vigorous and free of insect infestations, plant diseases, sunscalds, fresh
abrasions of the bark, excessive abrasions, or other objectionable
disfigurements. Tree trunks shall be sturdy and well “hardened” off. All
plants shall have normally well developed branch systems, not sparse,
irregularly spaced, thin branched or having off-balanced head. All shall
have vigorous and fibrous root systems that are not root or pot-bound. The
root conditions of the plants furnished by the Contractor in containers will
be determined by removal of earth from the roots of not less than two
plants of each species or variety. Where container-grown plants are from
several sources, the roots of not less than two plants of each species or
variety from each source will be inspected. In case the sample plants
LANDSCAPE PLANTING
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
02900-5
inspected are found to be defective, the Landscape Architect reserves the
right to reject the entire lot or lots of plants represented by the defective
samples. The City is the final judge of acceptability. Any plants rendered
unsuitable for planting because of this inspection will be considered as
samples and will be provided at the expense of the Contractor.
The size of the plants will correspond with that normally expected for
species and variety of commercially available nursery stock or as specified
in the drawings. The minimum acceptable size of all plants, measured
before pruning with the branches in normal position, shall conform to the
measurements, specified on the drawings. Plants larger in container size
than specified may be used with the approval of the Landscape Architect.
But the use of larger plants will make no change in contract price. If the
use of larger plants is approved, the ball of earth or spread of roots for
each plant will be increased proportionately.
a.
2.
3. Rejection or substitutions:
All plants not conforming to the requirements herein specified,
shall be considered defective and such plants, whether in place or
not, shall be marked as rejected and immediately removed from the
site of the work and replaced with new plants at the Contractor’s
expense. The plants shall be of the species, variety, size and
condition specified herein or as shown on the drawings. Under no
conditions will there be my substitution of plants or sizes listed on
the accompanying plans, except with the expressed written consent
of the Landscape Architect.
At no time shall trees or plant materials be pruned, trimmed or
topped prior to delivery. Any alteration of their shape shall be
conducted only with the approval and when in the presence of the
Landscape Architect.
Plant material shall be true to botanical and common name and variety as
specified in, “A Checklist of Woody Ornamental Plants in California,”
Manual 32, published by the University of California School of
Agriculture (1 963).
Nursery Grown and Collected Stock:
a.
b.
c.
4. Pruning:
a.
5.
6.
Grown under climatic conditions similar to those in locality of the
project.
Container-grown stock in vigorous, healthy condition not root-
bound or with root system hardened off.
Use only liner stock plant material that is well-established in
removable containers or formed homogeneous soil sections.
LANDSCAPE PLANTING
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
02900-6
.-
7.
8. Sod:
Substitute plant material will not be permitted without specific written
approval by the Landscape Architect.
a. General Definition:
1. Sod shall be defined as a living grass, (or groundcover such
as dichondra), consisting of blades, crowns, roots, and
attached soil. In the case of plants which produce rhizomes
or stolons, the same shall be included as part of the sod.
Living grass shall be interpreted to include grass that is
seasonable dormant and capable of renewing growth after
the dormant period.
Materials and Composition of Sod:
1. This sod shall be composed of Southland Sod Farms
material or approved equivalent grown from high quality
seed or vegetative material, (stolons or plugs), upon soil
treated with appropriate State and Federal regulatory
agency approved pesticides for control of diseases, insects,
and weeds. It shall be produced in fields periodically
inspected by the California Department of Food and
Agriculture, Nursery Section to insure high quality and
freedom from diseases, insects, and weeds according to the
standards in effect in the current published “State of
California Regulations for Nursery inspection”.
Sod strength shall be such that the sod rolls or slabs may be
handled, lifted, and moved without substantial breaking or
tearing. Sod shall be cut by machine to a soil thickness of
between W’ and 5/8”, not including top growth of thatch.
Size of rolls or slabs shall be consistent to the supplier’s
standard width and length and is not to vary by more than
2% in each dimension.
Moisture content of sod at harvest or during transport shall
be such as to not adversely affect transplantability, (neither
too wet nor too dry). Top growth shall be of good color
and be uniformly mowed according to acceptable mowing
heights for the given turf. Excess clippings and other
surface debris shall have been removed. Harvested sod
shall be delivered and installed within 24 hours in warm
weather or 36 hours in cool weather. Sod not installed
with these time periods shall be inspected and approved
b.
c. Sod Strength, Thickness of Cut, and Roller Slab Size:
1.
d. Moisture Content and Condition of Top Growth:
1.
LANDSCAPE PLANTING
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
02900-7
or rejected by the Landscape Architect.
Substitutions shall not be permitted without the express
written approval by the Landscape Architect.
e. Substitutions:
1.
H. Tree Staking Material:
1. Stakes for Tree Support:
1.
a. Wood Stakes
Stakes shall be straight grained lodgepole pine. Stakes
shall be free from knots, checks, splits, bends, or
disfigurements. Minimum nominal size shall be 2” in
diameter x 10’ long and pointed at one end. Adjust to fit
tree size. Treat with copper naphthanate.
Tree supports shall be rubber “Gro-Straight” tree ties, allowing limited
trunk movement.
a.
2.
3. Guying Materials:
Wire shall be zinc-coated iron, 10 gauge minimum, and solid core.
Wire covering at tree shall be !h” diameter minimum, new, two-
ply reinforced green rubber garden hose.
Flagging shall be white ?4” tube covering. All wires shall be
flagged along 90% of the wire length.
Guy anchors shall be Maxwell tree anchors, or approved
equivalent. Locate anchor below grade with a minimum 6”
clearance to finish grade.
b.
c.
I. Jute Matting:
1. Jute matting shall be of hemp material which is heavy jute mesh of a
uniform plain open weave of unbleached single jute yarn averaging 130
pounds per spindle. The yarn shall be of loosely twisted construction
having an average twist of not less than 1.6 turns per inch and shall not
vary in thickness of more than ?4 it’s normal diameter. The jute mesh shall
be furnished in approximately 90-pound roll strips.
Mulch cover shall consist of a uniform, ground redwood or fir material,
clear of debris or deleterious material. Size shall be 1” to 3” similar to Far
West Forests “Walk-on-Bark”. Provide depth of 2” minimum over finish
grade, and 1” depth within watering berm around plant base. No bare
earth shall be showing through mulch cover. Curbs, walks, or other
paving shall be located 1” over the top of the mulch cover.
J. Mulch Cover:
1.
K. Miscellaneous Materials:
a.
1. Sand:
2. Herbicides:
Washed plaster sand or equivalent.
LANDSCAPE PLANTING
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
02900-8
.-
a.
b.
Pre-emergent herbicide: Ronstar or equivalent
Post-emergent herbicide: Round-up or equivalent
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION:
A.
B.
C.
Verify that final grades have been established prior to beginning planting
operations.
Inspect trees, shrubs, and liner stock plant material for injury, insect infestation
and trees and shrubs for improper pruning.
Do not begin planting until irrigation mainline pressure test and irrigation
coverage tests are accepted.
3.02 PREPARATION:
A.
B.
Stake out locations for plants and outline of planting beds on the ground with non-
toxic substance as gypsum.
Do not begin excavation until plant locations and plant beds are acceptable to the
Landscape Architect.
3.03 INSTALLATION:
A. Excavation for Planting:
1. Pits and Trenches:
a. Shape:
1.
2.
Dig vertical sides and flat bottom on all pits and trenches.
Plant pits to be square for box material, and circular for
canned material.
All plant pits for shrugs shall be dug twice the diameter and
twice the depth of the root ball.
Refer to the plans for the size of tree plant pits.
b. Size:
1.
2.
B. Preparation of Planting Areas, (turf and annual color beds):
1. The area to be planted shall be deep-ripped to a depth of twelve (12)
inches. The deep ripping shall be done in a cross pattern, after the site has
been rough graded, and prior to spreading soil amendments and
conditioners. All rocks which are greater than two inches in diameter,
measured at their largest diameter, shall be removed from the top two (2)
inches of the ripped area. At the completion of the deep-ripping
operations, the areas to receive top soil and/or soil conditioners shall be
LANDSCAPE PLANTING
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
02900-9
brought to a smooth, uniform surface free of ruts, furrows and other
irregularities. Accidental swales and mounds shall be limited to one-inch
vertical deviation from a regular surface. Do not condtion soil on slopes
over 3: 1
After approximate finished grades have been established, soil shall be
conditioned and fertilized. Actual materials and rates shall be determined
by the soil laboratory recommendations. The following materials and rates
are included for bidding purposes only. Once the soils report has been
reviewed and bid costs adjusted accordingly, the City shall issue a field
notification for the actual amendments, rates, and manner of installation.
For bidding purposes, Nitrogen stabilized organic amendment, ammonium
phosphate and gypsum shall, at the following rates, be uniformly spread
and cultivated thoroughly by means of mechanical tiller into the top 6” of
soil.
a. Planting Beds:
2.
1. Nitrogen stabilized organic amendment:
2. Commercial fertilizer 12- 12- 12:
3. Agricultural gypsum:
4 cu. yds. per 1,000 sq. Et.
15 lbs. per 1,000 sq. ft.
200 lbs. per 1,000 sq. ft.
b. Tree and Shrub Backfill:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
?4 CY of screened site top soil
?4 CY of nitrolized shavings
1 lb. of 6-20-20 commercial fertilizer
2 lbs. of iron sulfate
10 lbs. of organic gypsum
3. All soil areas shall be compacted and settled by application of heavy
irrigation to a minimum depth of twelve (1 2) inches.
After the foregoing specified deep watering, minor modification to grade
may be required to establish the final grade. These areas shall not be
worked until the moisture content has been reduced to a point where
working it will not destroy soil structure.
a. Finish grading shall insure proper drainage of the site.
b. All areas shall be graded so that the final grades will be 1” below
adjacent paved areas, sidewalks, and valve boxes in turf areas, and
2” in groundcover areas.
Surface drainage shall be away from all building foundations.
At time of planting, the top two (2) inches of all areas to be planted
C. Final Grades:
1.
c.
d. Eliminate all erosion scars.
e.
LANDSCAPE PLANTING
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
02900-1 0
r? or seeded shall be free of stones, stumps, or other deleterious
matter one (1) inch in diameter or larger, and shall be free from all
wire, plaster, or similar objects that would be a hindrance to
planting or maintenance.
Finish grading shall be consistent and free from undulations,
irregularities or depressions. Areas filled by floating loose soil into
depressions shall be thoroughly watered to ensure compaction.
f.
D. Dispose of Excess Soil:
1. Dispose of unacceptable or unused excess soil off-site in a manner
consistent with local codes.
Install jute mesh on all slopes in excess of 2: 1, and all 2: 1 slopes over five
(5) feet in height. Only install jute mesh material on slopes to receive
groundcover material from flats or containers. Do not place jute mesh on
areas to receive turf or hydroseeded materials unless otherwise directed by
the City. Verify jute mesh locations with the Landscape Architect prior to
installation. Jute mesh shall be placed during the maintenance phase when
and as directed by the City where soil erosion is evident. Jute mesh shall
be installed loosely, up and down the slope in a vertical manner. The
installed mesh netting shall fit the soil surface contour and shall be held in
place by nine (9) inch long, 11 gauge minimum steel wire staples driven
vertically into the soil at approximately twenty-four (24) inch spacing.
Jute mesh netting strips shall overlap along the sides at least six (6) inches.
Lap all ends of rolls a minimum of twenty-four (24) inches.
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to maintain the final grades
throughout the Construction Phase. All erosion shall be properly repaired
at the Contractor’s own cost to the City’s satisfaction. Any slope soil run-
off onto adjacent paving areas shall be cleaned regularly by the Contractor.
E. Erosion Control:
1.
F. Maintenance of Final Grades:
1.
3.04 PLANTING INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Actual planting shall be performed during those periods when weather and
soil conditions are suitable and in accordance with locally accepted
practice, as approved by the Landscape Architect.
Only as many plants as can be planted and watered on that same day shall
be distributed in a planting area.
Containers shall be opened and plants shall be removed in such a manner
that the ball of earth surrounding the roots is not broken. The plants shall
be planted and watered as herein specified immediately after removal from
2.
3.
LANDSCAPE PLANTING
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
02900- 1 1
I
the containers. Containers shall not be opened prior to placing the plants
in the planting area.
ARer soil preparation and establishment of final grades prior to any
planting, the Contractor shall irrigate thoroughly for a period of time, two
to three weeks, until the weed seeds have germinated. When there is
sufficient weed seed germination, the Contractor shall apply a post-
emergent contact herbicide according to the directions of the
manufacturer, conforming to any and all codes affecting herbicide
handling and use.
The contractor shall then wait an additional two (2) weeks to allow the
herbicide to dissipate, then plant as indicated in the plans and
specifications.
The Contractor shall remove any residual foliage. Roots shall be removed
except on slopes 2:l or greater where they shall remain to add to the
slope's stability.
Locations of plants and outlines of areas to be planted shall be marked on
the ground with gypsum by the Contractor before any plant pits are dug.
All such locations shall be approved by the Landscape Architect. If an
underground construction or utility line is encountered in the excavation of
planting areas, notify the City immediately to clarify if the utility line is
dangerous. Other locations for planting may be selected by the Landscape
Architect.
Excavation for planting shall include the stripping and stacking of all
acceptable topsoil encountered within the areas to be excavated for
trenches, tree holes, plant pits and planting beds.
Excess soil generated from the planting holes and not used as backfill or in
establishing the final grades shall be removed from the site in a manner
consistent with all local codes.
Protect all areas from excessive compaction when trucking plants or other
materials to the planting site
All excavated holes shall have vertical sides with roughened surfaces.
Center plant in pit or trench.
Face plants with fullest growth into prevailing wind, unless other wise
directed by the Landscape Architect.
Set plants plumb and hold rigidly in position until soil has been tamped
firmly around root ball.
All plants which settle deeper than specified above shall be raised to the
correct level. After the plant has been placed, additional backfill shall be
B. Weed Control:
1.
2.
3.
C. Lay-out of Major Plantings:
1,
D. Planting of Trees and Shrubs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
LANDSCAPE PLANTING
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
02900-1 2
added to the hole to cover approximately one-half of the height of the root
ball. At this stage, water shall be added to the top of the partly filled hole
to thoroughly saturate the root ball and adjacent soil.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
9. Can Removal:
Cut cans on two sides with an acceptable can cutter.
Do not injure root ball.
Do not cut cans with a spade or ax.
Carefully remove plants without injury or damage to the root ball.
ARer removing the plant, superficially cut edge-roots with a knife
on three sides.
Remove bottoms of plant boxes before planting
Remove sides of box without damage to root ball after positioning
plant and partially backfilling.
10. Box Removal:
a.
b.
Hand backfill and hand tamp leaving a slight depression around bases of
After the water has completely drained, planting tablets shall be placed as
indicated on the manufacturer’s label.
Backfill the remainder of the hole.
Planting tablets shall be set with each plant on the top of the root ball
whole the plants are still in their containers so the required number of
tablets to be used in each hole can be easily verified.
After backfilling, an earthen basin shall be constructed around plants as
follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
1 1.
12.
13.
14.
plants.
15.
Each basin shall be of a depth sufficient to hold at least two (2)
inches of water
One-gallon plants shall have a basin not less than twenty-four (24)
inches in diameter.
Five-gallon plants shall have a basin not less than thirty-six (36)
inches in diameter.
Fifteen-gallon and 24” box trees shall have a basin not less than
forty-eight (48) inches in diameter.
All trees 36” box and larger shall have a basin not less than twelve
(12) inches larger than the greatest dimension of the plant pit in
any direction.
Groundcovers and one-gallon plants used as groundcovers need not
have basins built up from amended soil if their spacing is 24””
O.C. or less.
Pruning shall be limited to the minimum necessary to remove
injured twigs and branches and to compensate for loss of roots
f.
16. Pruning:
a.
LANDSCAPE PLANTING
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
02900-1 3
during transplanting, but never to exceed one-third of the
branching structure.
Staking of all trees shall conform to tree staking and tree guying
details.
One tree of each size shall be staked and approved by the
Landscape Architect prior to continued staking.
17. Staking and Guying:
a.
b.
E. Planting of Groundcovers:
1. Groundcover plants shall be grown in flats, peat pots, sodded or taken as
cuttings, as indicated on the plans. Flat-grown plants, (rooted cuttings),
shall remain in those flats until transplanting. The flat’s soil shall contain
sufficient moisture so that it will not fall apart when lifting the plants. If
plants from peat pots are used, the pots shall be protected at all times prior
to planting to prevent unnecessary drymg of the root ball.
Unrooted cuttings shall be 10” or more in length. They shall be insect and
disease free tip cuttings from healthy, vigorous and strong-growing plants.
Mature or brown-colored stem growths or cuttings which have been
trimmed or rooted before planting will not be accepted. Cuttings shall be
planted not more than two days after cutting and shall not be allowed to
dry or wither.
Groundcover shall be planted in straight rows and evenly spaced, unless
otherwise noted, and at intervals called out on the drawings. Triangular
spacing shall be used unless otherwise noted on the drawings. Plants shall
be located a minimum distance of ?4 the spacing distance from adjacent
paving, curbs, or other edges.
Where quantities of plants are indicated in a designated area the following
shall hold true:
a.
2.
3.
4.
If moving plants away from sidewalks andor paving causes the
plants to be closer together in the middle of the area, do not reduce
the number to meet the spacing required, but keep the same
number of plants and reduce the spacing between plants.
Under no circumstances shall prostrate, spreading groundcover
plants be located within 30” of pedestrian walks.
b.
Each rooted plant shall be planted with it’s appropriate amount of flat soil
in a manner that will insure minimum disturbance of the root system. .To
avoid drylng out, plantings shall be immediately sprinkled after planting
until the entire area is soaked to the full depth of each hole, unless
otherwise noted on the drawings.
Care shall be exercised at all times to protect the plants after planting.
Any damage to plants by trampling or other operations of this contract
shall be repaired immediately by the Contractor.
5.
6.
LANDSCAPE PLANTING
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
02900-14
4
7. Sodding of Turf:
a.
b.
Turf shall be sodded in all areas as denoted on plan.
Remove all rocks, weeds, and debris from the area to be sodded.
Work up soil to a depth of six (6) inches, and break up all clods.
Add ten (1 0) pounds of 16-20-0 fertilizer per 1,000 square feet of
turf area and mix thoroughly with soil amendments.
Carefully smooth all surfaces to be sodded. Soil surface should be
1” below walks, patios, and driveways to accommodate sod
thickness. Rolling area will expose soil depressions or surface
irregularities and minimize excessive settling.
Spread 16-20-0 fertilizer onto the soil evenly at the rate of then
pounds per 1,000 sq. fi. and rake in lightly. Be sure the surface is
level and smooth before laying sod. Avoid laying sod on dry soil.
Lay first strip of sod slabs along a straight line, (use a string in
irregular areas). Butt joints tightly; do not overlap edges. On
second strip, stagger joints. Use a sharp knife to cut sod to fit
curves, edges and sprinkler heads.
Do not lay entire lawn before watering. When a conveniently large
area has been sodded, water lightly to prevent dxyng. The warmer
and dryer the weather, the greater the need for this fast initial
watering. Continue to lay sod and to water until installation is
complete.
After laying all sod, roll lightly to eliminate irregularities and to
form a good contact between sod and soil. A heavy roller or
excessive initial watering may cause roller marks and should be
avoided, or re-sodding shall be necessary at the Contractor’s own
expense.
Water thoroughly the completed turf surface. Soil should be
moistened at least eight (8) inches deep. Repeat sprinkling at
regular intervals to keep sod moist at all times until rooted. The
first ten (10) days after installation are critical. After sod is
established, decrease frequency and amount of water per
application to an acceptable level.
1.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i. Re- Sodding:
All bare spots shall be re-sodded by the Contractor within
ten (10) days of sodding. The Contractor shall be .
responsible for all re-sodded areas for as long as necessary
until an acceptable stand of grass is attained and approved.
All turf-located tree basins shall be removed and re-sodded
30 days prior to the end of the Maintenance Phase.
2.
3.
LANDSCAPE PLANTING
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
02900- 15
3.05 CLEAN-UP
A. After all planting operations have been completed, remove all trash, excess soil,
empty plant containers and rubbish from the property. All scars, ruts or other
marks in the ground caused by this work shall be repaired and the ground left in a
neat and orderly condition throughout the site. The Contractor shall pick up all
trash resulting from this work no less frequently than each Friday before leaving
the site, once a week, and/or the last working day each week throughout the
Construction Phase. All trash shall be removed completely from the site.
The Contractor shall leave the site area broom-clean and shall wash down all
paved areas within the contract area, leaving the premises in a clean condition
throughout the Construction Phase.
B.
END OF SECTION
LANDSCAPE PLANTING
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
02900-1 6
SECTION 02970
LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK:
A. Furnish all labor, materials, transportation, and services necessary to provide
landscape maintenance to the project as described herein.
B. Related Work Specified In Other Sections:
1. Landscape Planting
1.02 GENERAL MAINTENANCE:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
The length of the maintenance period shall be One hundred twenty (1 20) days.
Maintenance of plant materials shall include, but not be limited to. Trimming,
pruning, watering, fertilization, weed control, cultivation, pest control and clean
up. The Contractor shall keep the site in a state of perpetual growth and repair.
Irrigation maintenance shall include periodic operation of the system, adjustments,
and minor repairs as necessary.
All hardscape shall be kept clear of debris from the maintenance operations,
erosion, run-off, irrigation, or wind blown debris. Clean up of walks shall be the
Contractor’s responsibility. Street gutters shall be included within the
debrishiltation removal program.
The Contractor shall provide a general clean-up operation at least once a week for
the purpose of removing trash or debris which may accumulate from the use of the
area, wind blown debris, or other refuse.
All personnel on the project shall be well trained, clean, neat at all times, and be
conversant with these specifications. .
All work shall be performed in accordance with the best landscape maintenance
practices and in keeping with the high aesthetic level of the facilities being
maintained.
Contractor shall be responsible for removing all weeds in joints of sidewalks,
curbs, and hardscape throughout the project.
All landscape areas shall be patrolled weekly to check for vandalism damage,
broken tree branches, rodents, insects, pests, and diseases.
Water management:
LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
02970- 1
1. Water only as required to allow penetration into the soil and avoid excess
run-off. Once plant material is established, water only as needed to
maintain healthy plant material.
Avoid water waste by setting controllers appropriately for the current
season and weather.
2.
Avoid blocking the clear view of signs, illumination of light fixtures, the airflow
out of vents and conflict with pedestrians and vehicles or their views.
Safety of users shall be a prime goal of maintenance especially in regard to
pruning of trees and trimming of ground covers away from walkways andor
structures.
The Contractor, at his own expense, shall replace all plant material that has failed
during the maintenance phase.
J.
K.
L.
I .03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Work Force:
1. The Contractor’s representative shall be experienced in landscape
maintenance and shall have received an education in ornamental
horticulture. The Contractor shall give his personal supervision to the
work or shall have a competent foreman on the job site at all times during
progress of the work.
The Contractor shall provide and maintain a current list of emergency
telephone numbers for 24-hour emergency response. The Contractor shall
initiate remedial action within two (2) hours from the time of notification.
2.
1.04 MAINTENANCE PHASE:
A. The Contractor shall continuously maintain all areas involved in this contract
during the progress of the work and during the Maintenance Phase until final
acceptance of the work by the City.
Improper maintenance or poor condition of any plantings as determined by the
Landscape Architect, during or at the end of the scheduled maintenance period
may cause postponement of the final completion date of the contract. Project
maintenance shall be continued by the Contractor until all work is acceptable to
the City.
Projects will not be segmented into separate Maintenance Phases unless specific
work phases are indicated with the contract documents and approved by the City.
Any period of time the Contractor fails to adequately maintain plantings, replace
unsuitable plants, perform weed control or other work, as determined by the City,
that time will not be credited to the plant maintenance period, and shall be added
on the end of the Maintenance Phase.
The Contractor’s maintenance period shall be extended to the City’s satisfaction
B.
C.
D.
E.
LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
02970-2
- should the provisions within these plans and specifications not be fblfilled to the
City’s satisfaction.
I .05 START OF MAINTENANCE PHASE:
A.
B.
The Maintenance Phase shall not start until all elements of construction, planting,
and irrigation for the entire project are complete.
The Contractor shall request an inspection to begin the Maintenance Phase after
all planting and related work have been completed in accordance with the contract
documents. A prime requirement of the Construction Phase is that all turf areas
shall show an even, healthy stand of grass from seed or sod that shall have a
minimum of one mowing. If such criteria are met to the satisfaction of the City, a
field notification shall be issued to the Contractor from the City, to establish the
effective beginning date of the Maintenance Phase. The City has the ultimate
authority in setting the beginning date for the Maintenance Phase.
1.06 GUARANTEE AND REPLACEMENT:
A. All plant material installed under the contract shall be guaranteed against any and
all poor, inadequate or inferior materials and/or workmanship for a period of one
year. This guarantee shall begin from the date of final acceptance at the end of the
Maintenance Phase as established by the City. Any plant material found to be
dead, missing or in poor condition as determined by the Landscape Architect,
shall be replaced by the Contractor at his expense.
Any materials found to be dead, missing, or in poor condition as determined by
the Landscape Architect, during the Maintenance Phase shall be replaced
immediately, not at the end of the Maintenance Phase prior to inspection. The
Landscape Architect shall be the sole judge as to the condition of material.
Material to be replaced within the guarantee period shall be replaced by the
Contractor within seven (7) days.
B.
1.07 FINAL PROJECT SUBMITTALS:
A. Prior to the date of the final inspection at the end of the Maintenance Phase, the
Contractor shall acquire from the Landscape Architect mylar prints at the
Contractor’s expense, and record from the job record set all changes made during
construction, label as “Record Drawings”, and deliver to the City. Prior to the
date of final inspection at the end of the Maintenance Phase, the Contractor shall
deliver to the City the “Landscape and Irrigation Guarantee” as required. All
other submittals as incorporated in the Irrigation and Planting Specifications shall
also be completed prior to the final acceptance by the City.
LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
02970-3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 MAINTENANCE:
A. Maintenance shall conform to the following standards:
1. All areas shall be kept free of debris and all planted areas shall be weeded
and cultivated at intervals of not more than seven (7) days. Watering,
mowing, rolling, edging, trimming, fertilization, spraying and pest control,
as may be required, shall be included in the maintenance period.
The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining adequate protection of
the entire project area. Damaged areas caused by erosion, tire damage,
grafitti, pests or other damage as deemed by the City shall be repaired at
the Contractor’s expense.
All sidewalks, paved areas and other areas adjacent to the planting areas
shall be cleaned of all debris, soil, or other materials at intervals of not
more than seven (7) days.
2.
3.
3.02 TREECARE:
A. Watering:
1. Maintain a large enough water basin around plants in groundcover areas so
that enough water can be applied to establish moisture through the major
root zone. When hand-watering, use a water wand to break the water
force. Use mulches to reduce evaporation and frequency of watering.
B. Pruning:
a.
1. Trees:
Prune trees to select and develop permanent scaffold branches that
are smaller in diameter than the trunk or branch to which they are
attached that have vertical spacing of from 18” to 48” and radial
orientation. Other pruning shall be performed to correct the
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Under no circumstances shall stripping of lower branches, (raising
up), of young trees be permitted. Lower branches shall be retained
following:
so permanent scaffold branches do not overlay one another
to eliminate diseased or damaged growth
to eliminate narrow V-shaped branch forks that lack
strength
to reduce toppling and wind damage by thinning out
crowns
to maintain growth within space limitations
to maintain a natural appearance
to balance crown with roots
b.
LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
02970-4
in a pinched back condition with as much foliage as possible to
promote caliper trunk growth, (tapered trunk). ‘Lower branches can
be cut flush with the trunk only after the tree is able to stand erect
without staking or other support. No stubbing of major branches
will be accepted. ’
Evergreen trees shall be thinned out and shaped when necessary to
prevent wind and storm damage. The primary pruning of
deciduous trees shall be done during the dormant season.
Damaged trees or those that constitute health or safety problems
shall be pruned at any time of the year as required.
All tree pruning shall be done with hand equipment operated from
the ground. If trees are larger than able to be pruned in such a
manner, the condition will be brought to the attention of the City.
e. Remove no more than 50% of a plant’s foliage during pruning
operations.
f. Lower branches on established street trees shall be pruned 8’ up for
pedestrian clearance and 12’ up for vehicular -clearance.
g. Topping of trees will not be tolerated unless approved by the City.
Remove stakes and guys as soon as they are no longer needed. Stakes and
guys are to be inspected to prevent girdling of trunks or branches and to
prevent rubbing that causes bark abrasions. Trees found damaged shall be
replaced at the Contractor’s expense.
Keep basins and areas between plants free of weeds. Use recommended
legally approved pre-emergent herbicides and removal by hand methods.
Avoid frequent soil cultivation that destroys shall roots. Use mulches to
help prevent wee seed germination. Avoid post-emergent herbicides in
groundcover areas where overspray may kill young rooted cuttings.
Use of chemical spraying may be necessary to rid turf areas of noxious
weeds.
E. Insect Control:
Maintain a reasonable control with approved materials and methods that
are legally accepted in the area.
The Contractor shall be responsible to control all diseases and pests during
the Maintenance Phase. All disease and pest control materials and
methods shall be at the direction of a licensed pest control operator. The
City shall be made aware of all methods and materials to be used for
disease and pest control. The Contractor shall implement the control
measures exercising extreme caution in using pesticides and taking all
necessary steps to ensure the safety of the public.
c.
d.
C. Staking and Guying:
1.
D. Weed Control:
1.
2.
1.
F. Disease and Pest Control:
1.
LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
02970-5
G . Fertilization:
1. Fertilize all planting areas with the following materials. These materials
and schedules are intended for bidding purposes only. Actual materials
and rates shall be specified in the project soil fertility and agricultural
suitability report. Any changes in cost from these specifications shall be
approved in writing from the City prior to any work.
a. Beginning of Maintenance Phase:
b.
c.
Avoid applying fertilizer to the root ball and base of main stem; rather
spread evenly under plant to the drip line. Rates will vary from about a
cup of nitrate fertilizer, (depending on nitrogen percentage) around a
newly planted small plant, to about one-half (1 /2) lb. of actual nitrogen per
inch of trunk diameter measured four feet from the ground for mature
trees.
Ammonium sulfate 5 lbs./l,OOO sq.ft.
End of first 30 days:
Ammonium sulfate 5 lbs./1,000 sq.ft.
At additional 60 day periods:
Granular Fertilizer 16-6-8 6 lbs./1,000 sq.ft.
2.
3.03 FINAL ACCEPTANCE
A. The Contractor shall be aware that the landscape shall be in a vigorous and
thriving condition prior to final acceptance. All plant material which may still be
under stress from the Construction Phase shall at this time be rejected and
replaced by healthy and vigorous plant material prior to final acceptance.
All plant material shall have new growth trimmed neatly, turf shall be mowed, and
all hardscape shall be cleaned prior to final acceptance.
B.
END OF SECTION
LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
02970-6
SECTION 03300
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE AND REINF’ORCING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
B.
1.02
A.
B.
1.03
A.
B.
C.
D.
SUMMARY
Provide cast-in-place concrete, including formwork and reinforcement, where shown on
the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation.
Related work:
1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to,
Contract Documents, Special Provisions and Sections in Division 1 of these
Specifications.
SUBMITTALS
Secure concrete mix designs from the testing laboratory in accordance with provisions of
the Contract Documents and Supplemental Provisions, and submit to the Owner’s
Designated Representative for review and approval.
Distribute approved mix designs to testing laboratory, batch plant, job site, and
governmental agencies having jurisdiction.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods
needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
Comply with “Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings,” ACI 301, except as
may be modified herein.
Provide access for, and cooperate with, the inspector and testing laboratory described in
the Contract Documents and Supplemental Provisions.
Do not commence placement of concrete until mix designs have been reviewed and
approved by the Owner’s Designated Representative and all governmental agencies
having jurisdiction, and until copies of the approved mix designs are at the job site and
the batch plant.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE AND REINFORCING
03300-1
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of the Contract Documents and Supplemental
Provisions .
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
B.
2.02
A.
2.03
A.
B.
C.
D.
FORMS
Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork so it will safely support vertical
and lateral loads which might be applied until such loads can be supported safely by the
concrete structure.
Construct forms to the exact sizes, shapes, lines, and dimensions shown, and as required
to obtain accurate alignment, location, grades, and level and plumb work in the finished
structure.
MOISTURE BARRIER
Where so indicated on the Drawings, provide a moisture barrier consisting of:
1.
2.
3.
Four inches of clean dry sand, evenly spread as a cushion;
"Visqueen" or equal 6 mil thick plastic sheeting, with all joints taped and sealed;
Two inches of clean dry sand, evenly spread on top of the installed plastic sheeting.
REINFORCEMENT (REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR SPECIFIC BAR
REQUIREMENTS)
Comply with the following as minimums:
1.
2.
3.
Bars: ASTM A6 15, grade 60 unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, using
deformed bars for number 3 and larger;
Welded wire fabric: ASTM A1 85;
Bending: ACI 3 1 8.
Fabricate reinforcement to the required shapes and dimensions, within fabrication
tolerances stated in the CRSI "Manual of Standard Practices."
Do not use reinforcement having any of the following defects:
1.
2.
3.
Bar lengths, depths, or bends exceeding the specified fabricating tolerances;
Bends or kinks not indicated on the Drawings or required for this Work;
Bars with cross-section reduced due to excessive rust or other causes.
Provide and incorporate glass fiber reinforcement in all slabs in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE AND REINFORCING
03300-2
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
c
2.04 CONCRETE
A. Comply with the following as minimums:
1.
2. Aggregate, general:
Portland cement: ASTM C150, type I or II, low alkali.
a. ASTM C30, uniformly graded and clean;
b. Do not use aggregate known to cause excessive shrinkage.
Aggregate, coarse: Crushed rock or washed gravel with minimum size between 20
mm (3/4") and 38 m (1-1/2"), and with a maximum size number 4.
Aggregate, fine: Natural washed sand of hard and durable particles varying from
fine to particles passing a 9.5 mm (3/8") screen, of which at least 12% shall pass a
50-mesh screen.
3.
4.
5. Water: Clean and potable.
B. Provide concrete with the compressive strengths shown on the Drawings.
C. Surface treatment:
1. Where "sealer" or "hardener" is called for on the Drawings, provide "Ashford
Formula" manufactured by Curecrete Chemical Company of Orem, Utah and
distributed by Martech Associates, 19836 Vintage Street, Chatsworth, California
9 13 1 1 (2 13) 993- 1 1 63, and provide the manufacturer's standard written 20 yeadl 0
year warranty.
Except as otherwise directed by the Owner's Designated Representative or shown on
the Drawings, on all other concrete slab, driveway, and walkway surfaces provide
"Hunt TLF" curing agent manufactured by Hunt Process Co., Inc.
2.
'
2.05 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Owner's
Designated Representative.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
3.02
A.
SURFACE CONDITIONS
Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
REINFORCING
Comply with the following, as well as the specified standards, for details and methods of
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE AND REINFORCING
03300-3
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
reinforcing placement and supports.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Clean reinforcement and remove loose dust and mill scale, earth, and other materials
which reduce bond or destroy bond with concrete.
Position, support, and secure reidorcement against displacement by forms,
construction, and the concrete placement operations.
Place reinforcement to obtain the required coverages for concrete protection.
Install welded wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable, lapping adjoining pieces
one full mesh minimum.
Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, or required by governmental agencies
having jurisdiction, lap bars 24 diameters minimum.
3.03 EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Do not embed piping, other than electrical conduit, in structural concrete.
1. Locate conduit to maintain maximum strength of the structure.
2. Increase the thickness of the concrete if the outside diameter of the conduit exceeds
30% of the thickness of the concrete.
B. Set bolts, inserts, and other required items in the concrete, accurately secured so they will
not be displaced, and in the precise locations needed.
3.04 MIXING CONCRETE
A. Transit mix the concrete in accordance with provisions of ASTM C94.
B. Mixing water:
1.
2.
3.
4.
At the batch plant, withhold 10 liters of water per cu m of concrete (2- 1 /2 gal per cu
Yd). Upon arrival at the job site, add all or part of the withheld water (as required for
proper slump) before the concrete is discharged from the mixer.
Mix not less than five minutes after the withheld water has been added, and not less
than one minute of that time immediately prior to discharge of the batch.
Unless otherwise directed, provide 15 minutes total mixing time per batch after first
addition of water.
C. Do not use concrete that has stood for over 30 minutes after leaving the mixer, or
concrete that is not placed within 90 minutes after batch.
D. There will be no inspection sign off on the day of the pour.
3.05 PLACING CONCRETE
A. Preparation:
1.
2.
Remove foreign matter accumulated in the forms.
Rigidly close openings left in the formwork.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE AND REINFORCING
03 3 00-4
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
3.
4. Use only clean tools.
5.
Wet wood forms sufficiently to tighten up cracks; wet other material sufficiently to
maintain workability of the concrete.
There will be no forms or form supports within the matrix of the placed concrete.
B. Conveying:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Perform concrete placing at such a rate that concrete which is being integrated with
fresh concrete is still plastic.
Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable in its final location so as to avoid
separation due to rehandling and flowing.
Do not use concrete which becomes non-plastic and unworkable, or does not meet
required quality control limits, or has been contaminated by foreign materials.
Remove rejected concrete from the job site.
C. Placing concrete informs:
1.
2.
Deposit concrete in horizontal layers not deeper than 600 mm (24"), and avoid
inclined construction joints.
Remove temporary spreaders in forms when concrete has reached the elevation of
the spreaders.
D. Placing concrete slabs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of
construction joints, until the placing of a panel or section is completed.
Bring slab surfaces to the correct level with a straightedge, and then strike off.
Use bullfloats or darbies to smooth the surface, leaving the surface fi-ee from bumps
and hollows.
Do not sprinkle water on the plastic surface. Do not disturb the slab surface prior to
start of finishing operations.
3.06 CONSOLIDATION
A. General:
1.
2.
3.
Consolidate each layer of concrete immediately after placing, by use of internal
concrete vibrators supplemented by hand spading, rodding, or tamping.
Do not vibrate forms or reinforcement.
Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside the forms.
3.07 JOINTS
A. Construction joints:
1.
2.
Do not use horizontal construction joints except as may be shown on the Drawings.
If additional construction joints are found to be required, secure the Owner's
Designated Representative's approval of joint design and location prior to start of
concrete placement.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE AND REINFORCING
03 3 00-5
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
B. Expansion joints:
1. Do not permit reinforcement or other embedded metal items that are being bonded
with concrete (except dowels in floors bonded on only one side of the joints) to
extend continuously through any expansion joint.
Fill expansion joints full depth with expansion joint material approved by the
Owner’s Designated Representative.
2.
3.08 CONCRETE FINISHING
A. Except as may be shown otherwise on the Drawings, provide the following finishes at the
indicated locations:
1. Scratch finish:
a. Apply to monolithic slab surfaces that are to receive concrete floor topping or
mortar setting bed.
Apply to monolithic slab surfaces that are to receive trowel finish and other
finishes specified hereinafter, and to slab surfaces which are to be covered with
insulation.
3. Trowel finish:
Apply to monolithic slab surfaces that are to be exposed to view, unless
otherwise shown, and to slab surfaces that are to be covered with resilient floor-
ing, carpeting, paint, or other thin-film finish coating system.
Apply to walks, stairs, drives, ramps, and similar pedestrian and vehicular areas.
2. Float finish:
a.
a.
4. Non-slip broom finish:
a.
3.09 REMEDIALWORK
A. Repair or replace deficient work as directed by the Owner’s Designated Representative
and at no additional cost to the Owner.
END OF SECTION
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE AND REINFORCING
03300-6
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
SECTION 04200
UNIT MASONRY
YAK1
1.01
A.
B.
1.02
A.
B.
1.3
A.
B.
1 - CiNNNW
SUMMARY
Provide unit masonry where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed
for a complete and proper installation. Paint all surfaces as specified in Section 09900 -
Painting.
Related work:
1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, Contract Documents, Special
Provisions and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications
SUBMITTALS
Comply with pertinent provisions of the General and Supplementary Conditions.
Product data: Within 35 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's
Notice to Proceed, submit:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section;
Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements;
Shop Drawings of reinforcement for the work of this Section, in sufficient detail to
show fabrication, installation, and anchorage;
Pertinent other submittals if required by the referenced Standard.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods
needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
Comply with pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and
comply with:
1. ACI 530.UASCE 6, "Specifications for Masonry Structures," except revise ACI
530.1/ASCE 6 to:
a. Exclude Section 1.7;
b. Exclude Article 1.5.1.2;
c. Modify Article 2.1.1.4 by deleting requirements for installing vent pipes and
conduits built into masonry.
Retain a copy of the referenced Standard at the job site throughout progress of the 2.
UNIT MASONRY
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
04200- 1
Work.
C. Mock-ups:
1. At an area on the site where approved by the Owner’s Designated Representative,
provide mock-up masonry panels.
a. Provide one mock-up panel for each combination of face brick, bond pattern,
mortar color, and joint type used in the Work.
b. The mock-up panels may be part of the Work, and may be incorporated into the
finished Work when so approved in advance by the Owner’s Designated
Representative.
c. Revise as necessary to secure the Owner’s Designated Representative’s ap-
proval.
If the mock-up panels are not permitted to be part of the finished Work, completely
demolish and remove them from the job site upon completion and acceptance of the
other work of this Section.
2.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of the Contract Documents and Supplemental
Provisions and with pertinent provisions of the referenced Standard.
B. Store masonry units above ground on level platforms which allow air circulation under
the stacked units,
C. Cover and protect against wetting prior to use.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
B.
C.
2.02
2.03
A.
MATERIALS, GENERAL
For all materials used in the work of this Section, comply with pertinent provisions of the
referenced Standard.
Should a material or method specified herein fail to comply with the referenced Standard,
promptly so notie the Owner’s Designated Representative in writing with advice as to
substitute materials which are at least equal in quality to those specified and which will
comply with the referenced Standard.
In the event of conflict between or among pertinent requirements, the more restrictive
shall govern unless otherwise determined by the Owner’s Designated Representative.
BRICK MASONRY UNITS (NOT USED)
CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
Provide lightweight hollow load-bearing concrete masonry units complying with ASTM
C90, grade N, type I, in color and type as noted on the drawings. Match masonry color
UNIT MASONRY
04200-2
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
and texture on adjacent Carlsbad Fire Station 5 building.
- B. Dimensions:
1.
2.
Provide units of the dimensions shown on the Drawings.
Where unit dimensions are not shown on the Drawings, provide units having
nominal face dimensions of 400 mm (16") long by 200 mm (8") high by the depth
shown or otherwise required.
2.04 MORTAR
A. Ingredients:
1. Portland cement: Comply with ASTM C 150, type I.
2. Lime:
a.
b.
Provide hydrated lime complying with ASTM C207, or quicklime complying
with ASTM C5.
When quicklime is used, slake and then screen through a 16 mesh sieve; after
slaking and screening, but before using, store and protect for not less than ten
days.
3. Aggregate: Provide clean, sharp, well graded aggregate free from injurious amounts
of dust, lumps, shale, alkali, surface coatings, and organic matter, and complying
with ASTM C 144.
Water: Provide water free from deleterious amounts of acids, alkalis, and organic
materials.
Coloring pigment: Provide pure ground mineral oxides, non-fading and alkali-
proof, approved by the Owner's Designated Representative.
4.
5.
2.05 GROUT
A. Ingredients:
1.
2.
3.
Portland cement: Comply with ASTM C150, type I.
Aggregate: Provide clean, sharp, well graded aggregate free from injurious amounts
of dust, lumps, shale, alkali, surface coatings, and organic matter.
Water: Provide water free from deleterious amounts of acids, alkalis, and organic
materials.
2.06 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. Admixtures:
1. Do not use admixtures, including coloring pigments, air-entraining agents,
accelerators, retarders, water repellent agents, anti-freeze compounds, or other
admixtures except as specified or otherwise approved in advance by the Owner's
Designated Representative.
Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2.
B. Mortar for unit masonry:
1. For masonry below-grade and in contact with earth, for reinforced masonry, and
where otherwise indicated, provide "Type S" consisting of:
UNIT MASONRY
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
04200-3
a.
b. One-half part lime; to
c.
For exterior above-grade load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet walls,
for interior load-bearing walls, for interior non-load-bearing partitions and for other
applications where another type is not indicated, provide "Type N" consisting of:
a.
b. One part lime; to
c.
Mix in a mechanically operated mortar mixer for at least three minutes after all
ingredients are in the drum, and at least long enough to make a thorough complete
intimate mix of the materials.
Retemper mortar with water as required to maintain high plasticity.
a.
b.
One part portland cement; to
Not more than four and one-half parts sand measured damp and loose.
2.
One part portland cement; to
Not more than six parts sand measured damp and loose.
3. Measure the ingredients accurately.
4.
5.
On mortar boards, retemper only by adding water within a basin formed with
mortar, and by working the mortar into the water.
Discard and do not use mortar which is unused after 1-1/2 hours following the
initial mixing.
C. Grout for unit masonry:
1. Comply with ASTM C476.
2.
3.
Provide 3000 psi grout with laboratory mix design prepared as required for design
mixes of concrete under Section 03300 of these Specifications.
Provide "coarse" grout consisting of:
a. Portland cement; with
b. Sand, damp and loose; with
c. 9.5 mm (3/8") maximum pea gravel, not more than 5% of which shall pass a
number 8 sieve; with
d. Sufficient water to produce a consistency for pouring or pumping without
separation of materials.
4. Mixing:
a.
b.
Mix in a mechanically operated batch mixer for not less than five minutes after
all ingredients for the batch are in the drum.
Completely empty the dnun before placing materials for the succeeding batch
therein.
2.07 REINFORCING STEEL
A. General:
1.
2.
3.
Bars: Comply with ASTM A61 5, grade 60, unless otherwise shown on the
Drawings, using deformed bars for number 3 and larger.
Bending: Comply with ACI 3 18.
Do not use reinforcement having any of the following defects:
a.
b.
c.
Bar lengths, depths, or bends exceeding the specified tolerances;
Bends or kinks not indicated on the Drawings or required for the Work;
Bars with cross-section reduced due to excessive rust or other causes.
UNIT MASONRY
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
04200-4
2.08 JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A. Provide joint reinforcement of types indicated on the Drawings or otherwise required for
complete and proper installation, manufactured by Dur-0-Wal, Inc., or provide equal
products approved in advance by the Owner's Designated Representative and having the
following attributes:
1. Fabricate from galvanized carbon steel wire in accordance with the referenced
Standard;
2. Provide truss-design welded-wire units prefabricated with 9 gage deformed
continuous side rods and 9 gage plain diagonal rods spaced not more than 400 mm
(1 6") O.C. into straight lengths of not less than three meters (ten feet), with pre-
fabricated corner and tee units;
For multi-wythe concrete masonry, provide one side rod for each face shell of
hollow masonry units more than 100 mm (4") in nominal width, plus one side rod
for each wythe of masonry 100 mm (4") or less in nominal width.
3.
2.09 TIES AND ANCHORS
A. Provide ties and anchors of types indicated on the Drawings, described herein, or
otherwise required for complete and proper installation, manufactured by Dur-0-Wal,
Inc., or provide equal products approved in advance by the Owner's Designated
Representative and having the following attributes:
1.
2. Sheet steel:
Wire: Fabricate from .1875" diameter galvanized carbon steel wire complying with
ASTM A82, and in accordance with the referenced Standard;
a. For sheet metal ties and anchors completely embedded in mortar, fabricate fiom
material complying with ASTM A526 (commercial quality) with G90 zinc
coating;
For sheet metal ties and anchors exposed to weather and not completely
embedded in mortar or grout, fabricate from material complying with ASTM
A366 (commercial quality) with zinc coating complying with:
(1) For unit lengths under 375 mm (15"): ASTM A153, Class B3;
(2) For unit lengths over 375 mm (15"): ASTM A153, Class B2.
b.
3. Steel plates and bars: Fabricate from material complying with ASTM A36, hot-dip
galvanized to comply with ASTM A123 or ASTM A153, Class B3, as applicable to
size and form indicated.
B. Adjustable anchors for connecting masonry to structural fiamework:
1. Provide two-piece assemblies allowing vertical or horizontal differential movement
between wall and fiamework parallel to plane of wall but resisting tension and
compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall.
For anchorage to concrete framework, provide manufacturer's standard with dovetail
anchor section formed from sheet metal and triangular-shaped 6 mm (1/4") diameter
wire tie section, sized to extend within 25 mm (1") of masonry face.
For anchorage to steel framework, provide manufacturer's standard anchors with
crimped 6 mm (1/4") diameter wire anchor section for welding to steel and
2.
3.
UNIT MASONRY
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
04200-5
triangular-shaped wire tie section, sized to extend within 25 mm (1 'I) of masonry
face.
C. Rigid anchors: Provide strips of form and length indicated or otherwise required,
fabricated from metal strips 3 8 mm (1 - 1 /27 wide by 6 mm (1/4") thick.
D. Adjustable masonry veneer anchors:
1 .NOT USED
E. Miscellaneous anchors:
1.
2.
3. Anchor bolts:
Unit type masonry inserts in concrete: Provide cast iron or malleable iron inserts of
type and size indicated.
Dovetail slots: Provide units fabricated from 22 gage sheet metal, with filler strips
and with slot size indicated.
a. Provide steel bolts of type and length shown on the Drawings or otherwise
required, complying with ASTM A307, Grade A, with ASTM A563 hex nuts
and, where indicated or otherwise required, with flat washers;
Galvanize in accordance with ASTM A1 53, Class C. b.
2.10 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS
A. Where indicated on the Drawings or otherwise required for a complete and proper
installation, provide "Nervastral Seal-Pruf HD," or provide other flexible vinyl sheet
flashings approved in advance by the Owner's Designated Representative and specially
formulated from virgin polyvinyl chloride with plasticizers and other modifiers to remain
flexible and waterproof in concealed masonry applications, black in color, 30 mils thick.
B. Provide cold-application mastic adhesive complying with pertinent recommendations of
the manufacturer of the approved embedded flashing material.
2.11 CONTROL JOINT GASKETS
A. Where indicated on the Drawings or otherwise required, provide preformed control joint
gaskets designed to fit their adjacent masonry units and to maintain lateral stability in
masonry walls, constructed of styrene-butadiene rubber com-pound complying with
ASTM D2000, Designation 2AA-805, in size and configuration shown or otherwise
required.
2.12 INSULATION
A. Where indicated on the Drawings or otherwise required, provide loose granular perlite
insulation complying with ASTM C549, Type II.(surface-treated for water repellency and
limited moisture absorption) or Type IV (surface-treated for water repellency and to limit
dust generation).
2.13 MASONRY CLEANERS
UNIT MASONRY
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
04200-6
- A. Provide one of the following:
1.
2. Job-mixed solution consisting of:
"Sure Klean No. 600 Detergent" manufactured by ProSoCo, Inc.;
a. One-half cup (dry measure) of trisodium phosphate; to
b. One-half cup (dry measure) of laundry detergent; to
c. 3.785 liters (1 gal) of water.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
B. Foundations:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Do not commence installation until foundations are clean, rough, and level.
Sandblast the foundation tops, if necessary, and remove all laitance and foreign
material.
Verify that the foundation elevations comply with the referenced Standard.
Clean projecting dowels free from loose scale, dirt, concrete, and other material that
will inhibit bond.
.- C. Do not lay Unit masonry when air temperatures do not comply with pertinent provisions
of the referenced Standard.
D. Protect masonry construction fiom direct exposure to wind and sun when erected in
ambient air temperature of 37.2 degrees C (99 degrees F) in the shade, with relative
humidity less than 50%.
3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Wetting masonry Units:
1. Brick made fiom clay or shale and which have ASTM C67 initial rates of absorption
greater than 30 grams per 30 sq in per minute: Use wetting methods which assure
each such Unit being nearly saturated but surface dry when laid.
Concrete masonry units: Do not wet. 2.
B. Openings:
1.
2.
Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completion of masonry.
When equipment has been installed, complete the masonry to match construction
immediately adjacent to the opening.
I
C. Cutting:
1.
2.
Where possible, use full-size units without cutting.
Where cutting is required, cut masonry units to achieve continuous pattern and to fit
UNIT MASONRY
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
04200-7
adjacent construction.
Cut with motor-driven saws and achieve clean, sharp, unchipped edges. 3.
D. Matching: Except as otherwise approved by the Owner’s Designated Representative,
precisely match the workmanship of the approved mock-up.
E. Joining:
1.
2.
3.
Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, provide running bond with vertical joints
located at center of masonry units in the alternate course below.
Tool joints to a dense, smooth flush surface to receive plaster.
Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, provide joints flush with the masonry unit
surface.
F. Do not use chipped or broken units. If such units are discovered in the finished wall, the
Owner’s Designated Representative may require their immediate removal and
replacement with new units at no additional cost to the Owner.
G. Layingup:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Place units in mortar with full shoved bed and head joints.
Align vertical cells of hollow units to maintain a clear and unobstructed system of
flues.
Hold racking to an absolute minimum.
Provide cleanouts at the bottom of each cell of hollow units for removing mortar
droppings. Do not close the cleanouts until they have been inspected and approved
by the Owner’s Designated Representative.
.
H. Reinforcement:
1.
2.
Provide reinforcement as shown on the Drawings, fully embedded in grout and not
in mortar or mortar joints.
Provide required metal accessories to ensure adequate alignment of steel during
grout filling operations.
3.03 GROUTING
A. Perform grouting in strict accordance with the provisions of the governing building code.
1. Solidly fill vertical cells containing reinforcement.
2. Consolidate grout at time of pour by puddling with a mechanical vibrator, filling all
cells of the masonry, and then reconsolidating later by puddling before the plasticity
is lost.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Inspection and adjustment:
1. Upon completion of the work of this Section, make a thorough inspection of
installed masonry and verify that units have been installed in accordance with the
provisions of this Section.
2. Make necessary adjustments.
UNITMASONRY
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
04200-8
B. Clean surfaces of masonry as required for proper application of the specified finishes.
END OF SECTION
UNIT MASONRY
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
0 4 2 0 0 - 9
SECTION 05500
METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Provide miscellaneous metal work shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as
needed for a complete and proper installation.
B. Related work:
1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to
Contract Documents, Special Provisions and Sections in Division 1 of these
Specifications
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of the Contract Documents and Supplemental
Provisions .
B. Product data: Within 35 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's
Notice to Proceed, submit:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section;
Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements;
Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorage, and
interface of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent trades;
Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the
Owner's Designated Representative, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting
actual installation procedures used on the Work.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods
needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. Perform shop and/or field welding required in connection with the work of this Section
in strict accordance with pertinent recommendations of the American Welding Society.
h4ETAL FABRICATIONS
05500- 1
Project No. 3688 03 JAN 03
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply With pertinent provisions of the Contract Documents and Supplemental
Provisions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A, In fabricating items which will be exposed to view, limit materials to those which are
free from surface blemishes, pitting, rolled trade names, and roughness.
B. Comply with following standards, as pertinent.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10. Malleable iron castings: ASTM A47;
11. Steel pipe: ASTM A53, grade A, schedule 40, black finish unless otherwise noted;
12. Concrete inserts:
Threaded or wedge type galvanized ferrous castings of malleable iron
complying with ASTM A27;
Provide required bolts, shims, and washers, hot-dip galvanized in accordance
with ASTM A1 53.
Steel plates, shapes, and bars: ASTM A36;
Steel plates to be bent or cold-formed: ASTM A283, grade C;
Steel tubing (hot-formed, welded, or seamless): ASTM A50 1 ;
Steel bars and bar-size shapes: ASTM A306, grade 65, or ASTM A36;
Cold-finished steel bars: ASTM A108;
Cold-rolled carbon steel sheets: ASTM A336;
Galvanized carbon steel sheets: ASTM A526, with G90 zinc coating in accordance
with ASTM A525;
Stainless steel sheets: AIS1 type 302 or 304,24 gage, with number 4 finish;
Gray iron castings: ASTM A48, class 10;
a.
b.
2.02 FASTENERS
A. General:
1.
2.
For exterior use and where built into exterior walls, provide zinc-coated fasteners.
Provide fasteners of type, grade, and class required for the particular use.
B. Comply with following standards as pertinent.
1.
2.
3.
Bolts and nuts: Provide hexagon-head regular type complying with ASTM A307,
grade A;
Lag bolts: Provide square-head type complying with Fed Spec FF-B-561;
Machine screws: Provide cadmium plated steel type complying with Fed Spec
METAL FABRICATIONS
Project No. 3688 03 JAN 03
0 5 500-2
.-
e
2.03
A.
2.04
A.
B.
2.05
A.
B.
C.
D.
FF-S- 1 1 1 ;
4. Washers:
a. Plain washers: Comply with Fed Spec FF-W-92, round, carbon steel;
b. Lock washers: Comply with Fed Spec FF-W-84, helical spring type carbon
steel;
Toggle bolts: Provide type, class, and style needed but complying with Fed Spec
Anchorage devices: Provide expansion shield complying with Fed Spec FF-S-325.
5.
6.
FF-B-588 ;
OTHERMATERIALS
Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Owner's
Designated Representative.
SHOP PAINT
Primer: Use "10-99 Tnemec Primer" or "Rustoleum Number 5769 Primer."
For repair of galvanizing, use a high zinc-dust content paint complying with
MIL-P-2 1 03 5.
FABRICATION
Except as otherwise shown on the Drawings or the approved Shop Drawings, use
materials of size, thickness, and type required to produce reasonable strength and
durability in the work of this Section.
Fabricate with accurate angles and surfaces which are true to the required lines and
levels, grinding exposed welds smooth and flush, forming exposed connections with
hairline joints, and using concealed fasteners wherever possible.
Prior to shop painting or priming, properly clean metal surfaces as required for the
applied finish and for the proposed use of the item.
On surfaces inaccessible after assembly or erection, apply two coats of the specified
primer. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from the first.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500-3
Project No. 3688 03 JAN 03
to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory
conditions are corrected.
3.02 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in the
work of those trades for interface with the work of this Section.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1.
2. Anchor firmly into position.
3.
Set work accurately into position, plumb, level, true, and free from rack.
Where field welding is required, comply with AWS recommended procedures of
manual-shielded metal-arc welding for appearance and quality of weld and for
methods to be used in correcting welding work.
Grind exposed welds smooth, and touchup shop prime coats.
Do not cut, weld, or abrade surfaces which have been hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication and which are intended for bolted or screwed field connections.
4.
5.
B. Immediately after erection, clean the field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas
of shop priming. Paint the exposed areas with same material used for shop priming.
END OF SECTION
METAL FABRICATIONS
Project No. 3688 03 JAN 03
05500-4
SECTION 05720
METAL HANDRAILS
1.01
A.
B.
1.02
A.
B.
1.03
1 - CiJLNJLKAL
SUMMARY
Painted Metal Handrails, ballusters and accessories as shown on the Drawings, as
specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation.
Provide handrails and railings and ballusters at all enclosed stairways - refer to 055 10.
Related work:
1.
Contract Documents, Special Provisions and Sections in Division 1 of these
Specifications.
Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to,
SUBMITTALS
Comply with pertinent provisions of the Contract Documents and Supplemental
Provisions.
Product data: Within 35 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's
Notice to Proceed, submit:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section;
Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements;
Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorage, and
interface of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent trades;
Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures, which will become the basis
for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods needed
for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. Perform welding required in connection with the work of this Section in strict accordance
with pertinent recommendations of the American Welding Society.
C. .Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable
manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use
experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
METAL HANDRAILS
05720-1
Project No. 3512J3688 03 Jan 03
D. Design Engineering: Registered engineer.
E. Handrail and Railing Struclwal Performance: ASTM E 985.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of the Contract Documents and Supplemental
Provisions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
2.04
A.
2.05
A.
B.
ENCLOSED STAIRWAY HANDRAIL SYSTEMS (DESIGN BUILD)
A. Standard 1 -1/4" diameter galvanized pipe for all enclosed stairways.
B. Galvanized ballusters complying with ADA requirements, and all CBC requirements.
OTHER MATERIALS
Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Owner's
designated representative
FABRICATION
Except as otherwise shown on the Drawings or the approved Shop Drawings, use
materials of size, thickness, and type required to produce reasonable strength and
durability in the work of this Section.
Fabricate with accurate angles and surfaces which are true to the required lines and
levels, grinding welds smooth and flush, forming exposed connections with hairline
joints, and using concealed fasteners wherever possible.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not pro-
ceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.02 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate as required with bther trades to assure proper and adequate provision in the
work of those trades for interface with the work of this Section.
METAL HANDRAILS
Project No. 3572/3688 03 Jan 03
05720-2
3.03 INSTALLATION
A
A. Set work accurately into position, plumb, level, true, and free from rack, and in strict
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations as approved by the Owner's
designated representative, anchoring fdy into position for long life under hard use.
END OF SECTION
F
METAL HANDRAILS
Project No. 357213688 03 Jan 03
05720-3
SECTION 06100
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Provide wood, nails, bolts, screws, framing anchors and other rough hardware, and other
items needed, and perform rough carpentry for the construction shown on the Drawings,
as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation.
B. Related work:
1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to
Contract Documents, Special Provisions and Sections in Division 1 of these
Specifications.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods
needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. Codes and standards:
1. In addition to complying the pertinent codes and regulations of governmental
agencies having jurisdiction, unless otherwise specifically directed or permitted by
the Owner's Designated Representative comply with:
a. "Product Use Manual" of the Western Wood Products Association for selection
and use of products included in that manual;
b. "Plywood Specification and Grade Guide" of the American Plywood
Association;
c. "Standard Specifications for Grades of California Redwood Lumber" of the
Redwood Inspection Bureau for Redwood, when used.
1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of the Contract Documents and Supplemental
Provisions
B. Protection:
1.
2.
3.
Deliver the materials to the job site and store, in a safe area, out of the way of traffic,
and shored up off the ground surface.
Identify framing lumber as to grades, and store each grade separately from other
grades.
Protect metals with adequate waterproof outer wrapping.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
06 100- 1
4.
of materials.
Use extreme care in off loading of lumber to prevent damage, splitting, and breaking -
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
B.
C.
2.02
A.
2.03
GRADE STAMPS
Identify framing lumber by the grade stamp of the West Coast Lumber Inspection
Bureau, or such other grade stamp as is approved in advance by the Owner's Designated
Representative.
Identify plywood as to species, grade, and glue type by the stamp of the American
Plywood Association.
Identify other materials of this Section by the appropriate stamp of the agency approved
in advance by the Owner's Designated Representative.
MATERIALS (AS NEEDED)
Provide materials in the quantities needed for the Work shown on the Drawings, and
meeting or exceeding the following standards of quality:
1.
2.
3. Plywood:
Horizontal framing members: Douglas Fir-Hemlock, Table 1, Construction grade. Vertical fiaming members: Douglas Fir-Hemlock, Table 1, Standard grade. -
a.
b.
c.
Building paper: Kraft paper complying with Fed Spec UU-B-790a.
Wood preservative: Ammoniacal copper arsenite, or 5% solution of
pentachlorophenol.
Sheathing: Structural 11, C-C, exterior; or standard sheathing with exterior glue.
Siding: 303 siding grade, exterior rough-sawn, 9.5 mm (3/8") thick, Douglas
Fir.
Telephone backboard: 20 mm (3/4") thick, A-D, group 1, interior.
4.
5.
6. Rough hardware:
a.
b.
d.
C.
e.
Steel items:
(1) Comply with ASTM A7 or ASTM A36.
(2) Use galvanized at exterior locations.
Machine bolts: Comply with ASTM A307.
Lag bolts: Comply with Fed Spec FF-B-561.
Nails:
(1) Use common except as otherwise noted.
(2) Comply with Fed Spec FF-N-1.
(3) Use galvanized at exterior locations.
Joist hangers: Simpson, Teco, or equal as approved by the Owner's Designated
Representative.
OTHER MATERIALS
ROUGH CARPENTRY
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
06 100-2
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Owner’s
Designated Representative.
B. Note that OSB will not be approved as a substitute for plywood roof sheathing due to its
unsuitability as a substrate for the bituminous roofing.
C. Metal framing straps will not be placed on the top of the plywood roof sheathing due to
its abrasion of the underside of the bituminous roofing
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
3.02
A.
B.
3.03
A.
B.
3.04
A.
B.
SURFACE CONDITIONS
Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
DELIVERIES
Stockpile materials sufficiently in advance of need to assure their availability in a timely
manner for this Work.
Make as many trips to the job site as are needed to deliver materials of this Section in a
timely manner to ensure orderly progress of the Work.
COMPLIANCE
Do not permit materials not complying with the provisions of this Section to be brought
onto or to be stored at the job site.
Promptly remove non-complying materials from the job site and replace with materials
meeting the requirements of this Section.
WORKMANSHIP
Produce joints which are tight, true, and well nailed, with members assembled in
accordance with the Drawings and with pertinent codes and regulations.
Selection of lumber pieces:
1. Carefully select the members.
2.
3.
4.
Select individual pieces so that knots and obvious defects will not interfere with
placing bolts or proper nailing, and will allow making of proper connections.
Cut out and discard defects which render a piece unable to serve its intended
function.
Lumber may be rejected by the Owner’s Designated Representative, whether or not
it has been installed, for excessive warp, twist, bow, crook, mildew, fungus, or mold,
as well as for improper cutting and fitting.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
06 100-3
C. Do not shim any framing component.
3.05 GENERAL FRAMING
A. General:
1. In addition to framing operations normal to the fabrication and erection indicated on
the Drawings, install wood blocking and backing required for the work of otha
trades.
Set horizontal and sloped members with crown up.
Do not notch, cut, or bore members for pipes, ducts, or conduits, or for other reasons
except as shown on the Drawings or as specifically approved in advance by the
Owner's Designated Representative.
2.
3.
B. Bearings:
1.
2.
3.
Make bearings full unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
Finish bearing surfaces on which structural members are to rest so as to give sure
and even support.
Where framing members slope, cut or notch the ends as required to give uniform
bearing surface.
3.06 BLOCKING AND BRIDGING
A. Install blocking as required to support items of finish and to cut off concealed draft
openings, both vertical and horizontal, between ceiling and floor areas.
B. Bridging:
1. Install wood cross bridging (not less than 50 mm x 75 mm [2" x 3"] nominal), metal
cross bridging of equal strength, or solid blocking between joists where the span
exceeds 2.4 m (8'-0").
Provide maximum distance of 2.4 m (8'-0") between a line of bridging and a bearing.
Cross bridging may be omitted for roof and ceiling joists where the omission is
permitted by code, except where otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
Install solid blocking between joists at points of support and wherever sheathing is
discontinuous. Blocking may be omitted where joists are supported on metal
hangers.
2.
3.
4.
3.07 ALIGNMENT
A. On framing members to receive a finished surface, align the finish subsurface to vary not
more than 3 mm (1/8") from the plane of surfaces of adjacent furring and framing
members.
3.08 INSTALLATION OF PLYWOOD SHEATHING
A. Placement:
1. Place plywood with face grain perpendicular to supports and continuously over at
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 100-4
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
least two supports, except where otherwise shown on the Drawings.
Center joints accurately over supports, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. 2.
B. Protect plywood fiom moisture by use of waterproof coverings until the plywood in turn
has been covered with the next succeeding component or finish.
3.09 FASTENING
A. Nailing:
1.
2.
Use only common wire nails or spikes of the dimension shown on the Nailing
Schedule, except where otherwise specifically noted on the Drawings.
For conditions not covered in the Nailing Schedule provide penetration into the
piece receiving the point of not less than 1/2 the length of the nail or spike, provided,
however, that 16d nails may be used to connect two pieces of 50 mm (2") (nominal)
thickness.
3. Nail without splitting wood.
4. Prebore as required.
5. Remove split members and replace with members complying with the specified
requirements.
B. Bolting:
1.
2.
3.
Drill holes 1.6 mm (1/16") larger in diameter than the bolts being used.
Drill straight and true from one side only.
Do not bear bolt heads on wood, but use washers under head and nut where both
bear on wood, and use washers under all nuts.
C. Screws:
1. For lag screws and wood screws, prebore holes same diameter as root of threads,
enlarging holes to shank diameter for length of shank.
END OF SECTION
ROUGH CARPENTRY
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
06 100-5
SECTION 06181
GLUE-LAMINATED STRUCTURAL UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Provide glue-laminated beams as indicated on the Drawings, specified herein, and
needed for a complete and proper installation.
B. Related work:
1. Documents aEecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to,
Contract Documents, Special Provisions and Sections in Division 1 of these
Specifications.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of the Contract Documents and Supplemental
Provisions
B. Product data: Within 35 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's
Notice to Proceed, submit:
1.
2.
3.
Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
Shop Drawings showing pertinent details of the units and their interface with other
components of the structure.
Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the
Owner's Designated Representative, will become the basis for acceptance or
rejection of actual installation procedures used on the Work.
C. Upon completion of this portion of the Work, and as a condition of its acceptance,
deliver to the Owner's Designated Representative an AITC "Certificate of Conformance"
covering all glue-laminated structural members.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods
needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. In addition to complying with pertinent codes and regulations of governmental agencies
having jurisdiction, comply with:
1. Voluntary Product Standard PA 56-73, "Structural Glue-Laminated Timber";
2. "Inspection Manual 200" of the American Institute of Timber Construction.
GLUE-LAMINATED STRUCTURAL UNITS
061 8 1-1
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
C.
1.04
A.
B.
For all glue-laminated structural members, mark each member with the "Quality Mark"
of the American Institute of Timber Construction, and provide the specified AITC
"Certificate of Conformance."
DELNERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Comply with pertinent provisions of the Contract Documents and Supplemental
Provisions
Delivery and storage:
1.
2.
Deliver the units to the job site with adequate wrapping to prevent staining and other
damage from moisture.
Maintain wrapping in proper condition until erection has started.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
2.02
A.
2.03
A.
GLUE-LAMINATED BEAMS
Provide glue-laminated beams of the types and dimensions shown on the Drawings,
"Industrial" appearance grade using exterior glue, meeting the requirements of
combination 24-F-V 1 for dry condition of service, and complying with ANSYAITC
A1 90.1 and AITC 200, with each unit bearing the AITC stamp of quality inspection.
Seal surfaces with penetrating sealer.
HARDWARE
Provide connection steel and hardware for joining timber members to each other and to
their supports; exclusive of anchorage embedded in masonry, setting plates, and items
field-welded to structural steel. Provide one coat of rust-inhibitive shop-applied primer
on connection steel and hardware.
OTHER MATERIALS
Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Owner's
Designated Representative.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SWACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
GLUE-LAMINATED STRUCTURAL UNITS
06181-2
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the Shop Drawings and
manufacturer's recommendations as approved by the Owner's Designated
Representative, and with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction.
B. Procedures:
Do not impose temporary construction loads which cause stress beyond design
limits.
Erect bracing as required to maintain the system level, straight, and plumb.
Assure adequate lateral support until the other structural members have been
completely installed.
1.
2.
3.
END OF SECTION
_-
GLUE-LAMINATED STRUCTURAL UNITS
06181-3
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
SECTION 06195
PREFABRICATED WOOD BEAMS AND JOISTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Work included Provide prefabricated wood beams and joists where shown on the
Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation.
B. Related work:
1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to,
Contract Documents, Special Provisions and Sections in Division 1 of these
Specifications
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of the Contract Documents and Supplemental
Provisions
B. Product data: Within 35 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's
Notice to Proceed, submit:
1.
2.
3.
Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
Shop Drawings showing pertinent details of the Units and their interface with other
components of the structure.
Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the
Owner's Designated Representative, will become the basis for acceptance or
rejection of actual installation procedures used on the Work.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods
needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of the Contract Documents and Supplemental
Provisions
B. Deliver materials of this Section to the job site in bundles banded together for handling
and shipping.
PREFABRICATED WOOD BEAMS AND JOISTS
061 95- 1
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
B.
C.
2.02
A.
PREFABRICATED WOOD CHORD JOISTS
Design is based on products of Trus-Joist Corporation, P. 0. Box 60, Boise, Idaho 83707
(208) 375-4450, and nomenclature of that manufacturer is used herein. Equal products
of other manufacturers will be acceptable when approved by the Owner's Designated
Representative.
General:
1.
2.
Size and detail the work of this Section to fit the dimensions and loads indicated on
the Drawings.
Design in accordance with allowable values and section properties assigned and
approved by the governmental agencies having jurisdiction.
Plywood web joists:
1. Provide "TJI" units, factory made with structural grade plywood, "Micro=Lam" or
machine stress rated lumber flanges, and utilizing waterproof type glues.
OTHER MATERIALS
Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Owner's
Designated Representative.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the Shop Drawings and
manufacturer's recommendations as approved by the Owner's Designated
Representative.
1.
2.
3.
B . Procedures:
Do not impose temporary construction loads which cause stresses beyond design
limits.
Erect bracing and bridging as required to maintain the units straight and plumb.
Assure adequate lateral support until the sheathing material has been applied.
END OF SECTION
PREFABRICATED WOOD BEAMS AND JOISTS
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
06 195-2
,-
_-
SECTION 07410
PREFORMED METAL ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide preformed standing seam metal roofing system where shown on the Drawings,
as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation.
B. Related work:
1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to,
the Contract Documents and Supplemental Provisions and Sections under Division 1
of these Specifications.
Section 07600: Flashing and sheet metal. 2.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of the Contract Documents and Supplemental
Provisions of these Specifications.
B. Product data: Within 30 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's
Notice to Proceed, submit:
1.
2.
3.
Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section;
Sufficient technical data to demonstrate compliance with the specified requirements;
Samples, each approximately 600 mm (24") square, in as many panels as necessary
to demonstrate all conditions to be encountered, and utilizing each design, type of
solder, fastener, base sheet, finish sheet, and other material required under this
Section.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods
needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. In addition to complying with requirements of governmental agencies having
jurisdiction, comply with:
1.
2.
3.
Fastener system requirements described in Section 07220 of these Specifications;
Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.: Class A fire rating;
SMACNA: Pertinent recommendations contained in the "Architectural Sheet Metal
Manual."
PREFORMED METAL ROOFING
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
074 10- 1
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of the Contract Documents and Supplemental
Provisions of these Specifications.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Metal roofing system:
1. Where indicated on the Drawings, provide a complete metal roofing system where
shown on the drawings. Metal Standing Seam Roofing shall be as manufhctured by
- Material shall be IMSA Building Products - http.// iy
0.040” x 12” painted 3004-H274 - color shall be selected by the Owner’s designated
representative from the manufacturers standard colors.
Coordinate with the manufacturer of the roof insulation described in Section 07220
of these Specifications and approved for installation on this Work, and devise a
fastener system to the approval of the Owner’s Designated Representative and
governmental agencies having jurisdiction.
..
2.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Shop fabricate to the maximum extent practicable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
B. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, properly sloped for drainage, and completely secured
in position.
C. Verifl that provision has been made for roof drains, scuppers, flashings, and all other
interface items attaching to or penetrating through the work of this Section.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Do not allow the installed work of this Section to be used as a storage space for other
materials.
PREFORMED METAL ROOFING
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
0741 0-2
B. Do not permit unnecessary walking on the finished roof. Require all personnel to wear
rubber-soled shoes when installing or walking on the finished roof
3.3 INSTALLATION OF STANDING SEAM ROOFING
A. Coordinate with the installers of the approved roof insulation to ensure that installed
. insulation is not permitted to become wet or damaged prior to installation of the work of this Section.
B. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations as approved by the Owner's Designated Representative, anchoring all
components firmly into position as a completely watertight and weathertight installation.
END OF SECTION
PREFORMED METAL ROOFING
Project No. 3688 03 Jan 03
074 10-3
SECTION 07510
BUILT-UP ROOFING SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The attached are components of this section:
1.
2.
3.
Contract Documents and Supplemental Provisions
Statement of Roofing Material Manufacturers Qualifications.
Pre-final inspection checklist for Contractor.
B. Warranty
1. Manufacturer's and Contractors warranty as outlined in Warranty section
below
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
A Furnish and install specified roofing and related components. The Owner desires that
this specified system be specified proprietarily so that maintenance and stores repair
materials be consistent with other City properties.
-
B. Work includes:
1. Installation of the following:
a. Mechanically fastened base sheet and rosin sheet.
b. Hot applied built-up roofing system.
c. Gravel surfaced.
d. Specified flashings and accessories.
1.03 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Contractor shall:
1. Submit an affidavit attesting the Contractor has in place and fully
implemented a written Health, Safety, and Environmental Plan and the plan
is compliant with all applicable Federal, State, and Local regulations.
Be experienced in hot multi-ply roofing.
Provide local Field Representative to make periodic site visits, report work
quality and job progress.
Understand that the presence and activity of the manufacturer's/ specifier's
representative and/or Owner's representative shall in no way relieve the
contractor of contract responsibilities or duties.
All materials, warranties and maintenance programs must be supplied by the
2.
3.
4.
5.
BUILT-UP ROOFING SYSTEMS
075 10-1
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
same manufacturer of the existing Windows/web - based roof information
management program in current use by the City of Carlsbad
B. Project meetings:
Final inspection:
a. Will be scheduled by roofing material manufacturer upon job
completion.
b. Attendance:
(1) Contractor.
(2) Roofing material manufactwedspecifier.
(3)
(1) Walkover inspection.
(2) Identification of problems which may impede issuance of
Random sampling is not required.
Roofing material manufactured technical service representative.
c. Minimum agenda:
Warranty.
d.
C. Plans and specifications:
I. Contractor must notify Owner and specifier of any omissions, contradictions
or conflicts seven (7) days before bid date. Owner and specifier will provide
necessary corrections or additions to plans and specifications by addendum.
If Contractor does not so notify Owner and specifier of any such condition, it
will be assumed that the Contractor has included the necessary items in the
bid to complete this specification.
It is the intent that this be a completed project as far as the contract
documents set forth. It is not the intent that different phases of work on this
project be delegated to various trades and subcontractors by the contract
documents. Contractor must make own contracts with various
subcontractors, setting forth the work these subcontractors will be held
responsible for. Contractor alone will be held responsible by the owner for
the completed project.
If the Contractor feels a conflict exists between what is considered good
roofing practice and these specifications contractor shall state in writing all
objections prior to submitting quotations.
It is the Contractor's responsibility during the course of the work, to b~g to
the attention of and notify the Owner's representative first verbally, then in
writing, of any defective membrane, insulation or deck discovered where not
previously identified.
2.
3.
4.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials, West Conshohocken, PA.
B. FM - Factory Mutual System, Norwood, MA.
BUILT-UP ROOFING SYSTEMS
075 10-2
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
C. NRCA - National Roofing Contractors Association, Chicago, E.
D.
E.
SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association,
Chantilly, VA.
UL - Underwriters Laboratories, Northbrook, E.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of the Contract Documents and Supplemental
Provisions.
Product data:
a. Product data sheets.
b. Material safety data sheets.
c.
d.
Samples of coatings, adhesives, and roofing ply sheets.
List of 5 local projects where the specified roof system has been
installed. Provide location, contact name, and telephone number.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Delivery of materials:
1.
2.
3. Coordinate delivery with Owner.
Deliver materials to job-site in new, dry, unopened, and well-marked
containers showing product and manufacturer's name.
Deliver materials in sufficient quantity to allow continuity of work.
B. Do not order project materials or start work before receiving Ownerls written
approval.
C. Storage of materials:
Store roll goods on ends only. Discard rolls which have been flattened,
creased, or otherwise damaged. Place materials on pallets. Store roll goods
on level pallets. Do not stack pallets.
Store materials marked ''KEEP FROM FREEZING" in areas where
temperatures will remain above 40 degrees F (5 degrees C).
For insulation, remove plastic packaging shrouds. For felt rolls, slit the top of
the plastic shrink wrap only. Cover top and sides of all stored materials with
tarpaulin (not polyethylene). Secure tarpaulin.
Do not store materials in open or in contact with ground or roof surface.
Store all materials on a raised platform covered with secured canvas tarpaulin
(not polyethylene), top to bottom. Cover all materials when project is not in
progress and maintain the ability at all times to cover the materials when
required, such as during an unanticipated rain shower.
BUILT-UP ROOFING SYSTEMS
075 10-3
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
Contractor shall assume 111 responsibility for the protection and safekeeping
of products stored on premises.
D. Material handling:
1. Handle materials to avoid bending, tearing, or other damage during
transportation and installation.
2. Material handling equipment shall be selected and operated so as not to
damage existing construction or applied roofing. Do not operate or situate
material handling equipment in locations that will hinder smooth flow of
vehicular or pedestrian traffic.
1.07 SITE CONDITIONS.
A Field measurements and material quantities:
1.
estimates of material quantities and sizes, and site conditions that will affect work.
Contractor shall have SOLE responsibility for accuracy of all measurements,
B. Waste Disposal:
1. Do not re-use, re-cycle or dispose of material manufacturers product
containers except in accordance with all applicable regulations. The user of
manufactured products is responsible for proper use and disposal of product
containers.
C. Safety requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
All application, material handling, and associated equipment shall conform to
and be operated in conformance with OSHA safely requirements.
Comply with federal, state, local and Owner fire and safety requirements.
Advise Owner whenever work is expected to be hazardous to Owner,
employees, and/or operators.
Maintain a crewman as a floor area guard whenever roof decking is being
repaired or replaced.
Maintain fire extinguisher within easy access whenever power tools, roofing
kettles, fuels, solvents, torches, and open flames are being used.
D. Environmental requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Do not work in rain, snow, or in presence of water.
Do not install materials marked "KEEP FROM FREEZING" when daily
temperatures are scheduled to fall below 400F (5 OC).
Do not perform masonry work below 40 0 F (5 0 C).
Remove any work exposed to freezing.
Advise Owner when volatile materials are to be used near air ventilation
intakes so Owner can use some or all of the following methods to minimize
disruptions to building occupants and operations:
a. Divert air intake fiom work area by attaching scoops or temporary duct
work.
b. Temporarily shut down or block air intakes.
BUILT-UP ROOFING SYSTEMS
075 10-4
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
c. Provide make-up air or intake air fiom sources away fiom work area.
E. Security requirements:
1. Comply with Owner security requirements.
1.08 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. When a particular make or trade name is specified, it shall be indicative of standard
required. Bidders proposing substitutes shall submit the following 7 days prior to
bid date to Owner:
1.
2. Accredited testing laboratory certificate comparing substitute's
Written application with explanation of why it should be considered.
physical/performance attributes to those specified.
B. Only substitutes approved in writing by Owner prior to scheduled bid date will be
considered.
C. Notification of approvals will be mailed at least 3 days before bid opening.
D. Owner reserves right to be final authority on acceptance or rejection of any
substitute.
1.09 PAYMENT SECURITY
A Any of the following:
1. Payment & Performance Bonds: Contractor purchases Payment and
Performance Bonds for benefit of Owner and material supplier. Bonding
company/surety shall be rated B+ or better in current Key Rating Guide as
issued by A. M. Best Co., Oldwick, NJ.
B. Progress payments:
1.
2.
Contractor shall establish with Owner, Owner's procedure for payment and
retainages prior to commencement of work on this project.
Partial or progress payments shall not relieve Contractor of performance
obligations under this contract, nor shall such payments be viewed as
approval or acceptance of work performed.
Final payment shall be withheld until all provisions of the specifications are
met.
3.
1.10 WARRANTYIGUARANTEE
A. Guarantee:
1. Upon project completion and Owner acceptance, effective upon complete
payment, Contractor shall issue Owner a guarantee against defective
workmanship and materials for a period of two (2) years.
B. Warranty:
BUILT-UP ROOFING SYSTEMS
075 10-5
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
C.
1. Upon project completion, Manufacturer acceptance, and once complete
payment has been received by both Contractor and Manufacturer,
Manufacturer shall deliver to Owner a fifteen (1 5) year manufacturer Roofing
System Quality Assurance Warranty and Owner's Manual. Manufacturer will,
during the second, fifth and tenth year of this warranty, inspect and provide a
written Executive Summary.
TremCare Maintenance and Warranty Service Agreement, which includes a TWO
COVERAGE:
(2)- YEAR CONTRACTOR'S AND TEN (10)-YEAR MANUFACTURER
New Roof Component Coverage: A single manufacturer shall provide
specified materials, warranties and performance of the maintenance
agreement. The Maintenance Program and Warranty must be supplied by the
same provider as the existing roof-related preventive maintenance program
currently in place at the City of Carlsbad. The manufacturer's warranty must
include labor and material coverage against leakage on all components
including those manufactured by others. Included in the warranty coverage
are the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
Insulation materials, fasteners, and adhesives.
All new and temporary roof membrane components and adhesives.
All metal edge components including cleat strips.
All tapered edge and cant strips.
All surface mastics, coatings, stripping, plies, etc.
All drain and scupper flashings.
Any roof leaks or other problems caused by substrate movement of any
component other than the deck shall not be excluded.
Any movement associated with metal edge joints or flanges causing
leaks.
Damages caused by wind speed up to 74 miles per hour.
Permanent tie-ins and/or control joints separating new and old roofing.
The contractor shall certify compliance with the above warranty
requirements by submitting a copy of the guarantee as a submittal item
upon request of the Owner. The manufacturer will advise the customer
in writing how to maintain the warranty in the form of an Owner's
manual. The customer shall have the option to renew this warranty at
the end of fifteen (1 5) years per the renewal agreement.
Service responsibilities of the manufacturer to Owner:
Bi-Annual Housekeeping to include the following:
(1) Removal of debris fiom the roof membrane.
(2) Removal of debris fiom the roof drains, gutters, and scuppers.
(3) Disposal of debris in customer supplied waste containers. Storm Reports, Monitoring and Follow-Up:
(1) Roof inspection at customer request of roof areas after major
storm activity.
Will provide a roof report based upon regular inspections.
k.
1.
m. Roof Inspection Report:
n. Bi-Annual Preventive Maintenance to include the following:
BUILT-UP ROOFING SYSTEMS
075 10-6
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
(1) Metal Edge Flashing Components:
(a) Tears, splits, and breaks in membrane flashings will be repaired with appropriate repair mastics and membranes.
(b) Open, split flashing strip-ins will be repaired with
appropriate repair mastics and membranes.
(c) Loose metal edge cleats and clips will be resecured.
(d) Exposed fasteners will be sealed.
Parapet Wall and Counterflashing Systems:
(a) Tears, splits, kick holes, and breaks in flashing membrane will be repaired with appropriate repair mastics and
membranes.
(b) Breaks, tears, and splits in flashing strip-ins with
appropriate repair mastics and membranes.
(c) Exposed fasteners will be sealed.
(d) Voids in termination bars, counter-flashings and parapet cap will be cleaned and sealed.
Equipment / Projection Flashing Components:
(a) Tears, splits, and breaks in flashing membrane will be repaired with appropriate repair mastics and membranes.
(b) Open, split flashing strip-ins will be repaired with
appropriate repair mastics and membranes.
(c) Unsecured roof top equipment will be secured.
(d) Exposed fasteners will be tightened.
(e) Termination bar and counter flashings will be sealed.
Roof Membrane Maintenance and Repairs:
(a) Tears, splits, and breaks in membrane flashings will be repaired with appropriate repair mastics and membranes.
(b) Open, split flashing strip-ins will be repaired with
appropriate repair mastics and membranes.
(c) Splits and blisters which threaten the integrity of the roof
system will be cleaned, primed, and repaired with
appropriate repair mastics and membranes.
Pitch pans will be refilled and topped off.
Metal projections (hoods and clamps) will be sealed.
Dress up wind scoured corners with appropriate repair
mastics and coatings.
Dress up reflective coatings on flashings.
(2)
(3)
(4)
(d)
(e)
(a)
(b) (c) Re-caulking as needed.
(5) Miscellaneous Maintenance Repairs:
2. Leak response responsibilities of the manufacturer to Owner:
a. In the event that a leak should occur:
(1) Provide toll free 800 number for Owner to call in leak report.
Number will be monitored twenty-four (24) hours a day, 365 days
a year.
Provide a response to Owner on all leak cdls within twenty-four
(24) hours of when the call is made.
Provide a repair crew, at the building site, within two (2) business
(2)
(3)
BUILT-UP ROOFING SYSTEMS
075 10-7
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
days of the call.
properly.
Monitor all leak events and response and provide a written
quarterly summary if leaks have occurred. Deliver to Owner at
the end of each quarter when leaks have occurred.
Provide follow-up inspection to ensure that repairs were made -
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A Comply with quality control, references, specifications, and manufacturer's data.
Products containing asbestos are prohibited on this project. Use only asbestos-fiee
products.
B. Use products with personal protection. User must read container label and material
safety data sheets prior to use.
2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER
A. Tremco Inc., Cleveland, OH 216/292-5000.
B. The City is contracted with Tremco Inc. to maintain, repair and install Tremco
roofing products on the City of Carlsbad's buildings. For continuity, the City desires
that this manufacturer be bid propritarily. -
2.03 ROOF DECKING
2.04 INSULATION (NOT USED)
2.05 WOOD NAILERS AND CURBS
A.
B.
Provide 2 x or 4x shaped wood members as detailed on drawings necessary for curbs,
nailers and other raised fiuring members forming crickets.
For fire-rated buildings, provide fire-treated wood meeting the requirements per
code.
2.07 ROOFING MATERIALS
A Adhesives:
1. Base ply adhesive:
2. Interply adhesive:
3. Surfacing adhesive:
4. Cricket/Cant Adhesive
a.
a.
a.
a.
POWERply Modified Hot Melt Adhesive by Tremco.
POWERply Modified Hot Melt Adhesive by Tremco.
POWERply Modified Hot Melt Adhesive by Tremco.
POWERply Modified Hot Melt Adhesive by Tremco.
BUILT-UP ROOFING SYSTEMS
075 10-8
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
B. Baseply:
1. POWERPly Composite Ply Premium grade asphalt coated trilaminate
reinforced ply sheet.
C. Ply sheet:
1. Thre plies POWERply Type VI by Tremco.
b.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16
Exceeds ASTM D 2178, Type VI.
Related materials:Asphalt mastic: ELS by Tremco.
Reinforcing mesh:BURmesh by Tremco.
Cant strip: ASTM C 728-97, perlite roof insulation, cut on bias.
Flashing bitumen: Hot melt modified asphalt adhesive.
Flashing membrane: POWERply Standard FR by Tremco.
Flashing ply: BURmastic Composite Ply Premium by Tremco.
Pitch pan cement: ASTM C 928-92a, rapid hardening non shrink grout,
Pitch pan mastic: ELS by Tremco.
Roofing aggregate: White gravel color; Hard, durable, opaque; double
washed free of clay, loam, sand or other foreign substances.
Do not use: Crushed gravel, white dolomite (marble chips), Joplin
chats, scoria, limestone, volcanic rock, crushed oyster and clam shells,
crushed brick tile, or cinders.
ASTM D 1863-93, size six (6) (3/4" to 3/8" range) (19 to 9.5 mm).
Sealants: Drawband sealant:
TremSEAL GP by Tremco. Termination bar sealant:
TremSEAL GP by Tremco. Stripping ply adhesive:
ELS by Tremco. Stripping ply:
BURmastic Composite Ply by Tremco.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A
B.
C.
D.
Verify conditions as satisfactory to receive work.
Do not begin roofing until all unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning
work constitutes acceptance of conditions.
Verify that work of other trades penetrating roof deck or requiring men and
equipment to traverse roof deck has been approved by Owner, manufacturer, and
roofing contractor.
Check projections, curbs, and deck for inadequate anchorage, foreign material,
moisture, or unevenness that would prevent quality and execution of new roofing
system.
3.02 GENERAL WORKMANSHIP -
A. All work performed by Contractor shall conform to this specification.
BUILT-UP ROOFING SYSTEMS
075 10-9
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
The presence and activity of the manufacturer's representative, architect's
representative, andor Owner's representative shall in no way relieve Contractor of
contract responsibilities or duties.
Substrate: Free of foreign particles prior to laying roof membrane.
Provide additional fastening of mechanically attached base sheets in roof
perimeter and comer areas.
Phased application: Not permitted. All plies shall be completed each day.
Traffic and equipment: Kept off completed plies until adhesive has set.
Wrapper and packaging materials: Not to be included in roofing system.
Entrapped aggregate: Not permitted within new membrane. Its discovery is
sufficient cause for rejection.
Ply shall never touch ply, even at roof edges, laps, tapered edge strips, and cants.
Fit plies into roof drain rims; install lead flashing and finishing plies; secure
clamping collars; install domes.
Extend roofing membrane to top edge of cant at wall and projection bases.
Cut out fishmouths/side laps which are not completely sealed; patch. Replace all
sheets which are not fully and continuously bonded.
Modified bitumen heating:
1.
2.
3.
Use low burner flames during initial melt-downs, circulate modified bitumen
after initial melt-down.
Maximum bitumen temperature: 25 OF (14 0 C) below the flash point.
Avoid prolonged heating of modified bitumen at high temperatures. Reduce
the modified bitumen temperature to below 5000F (260ClC) if the modified
bitumen is not being used for periods of 4 hours or more.
4. Kettle: Free of contaminants (asphalt or coal tar pitch).
5. Use separate kettle for asphalt bitumen heating.
6. Application rates: Bitumen quantities for waterstop/tie-offs, flashings,
miscellaneous detail applications, and minimum kettle capacity are not
included in application rates. To account for these factors, add approximately
25 percent additional bitumen on a total-job average basis.
3.03 PREPARATION
A Protection:
BUILT-UP ROOFING SYSTEMS
075 10-10
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Contractor shall be responsible for protection of property during course of
work. Lawns, shrubbery, paved areas, and building shall be protected from
damage. Repair damage at no extra cost to Owner.
Provide at site prior to commencing removal of debris, a dumpster or dump
truck to be located adjacent to building where directed by Owner.
Roofing, flashings, membrane repairs, and insulation shall be installed and
sealed in a watertight manner on same day of installation or before arrival of
inclement weather.
At start of each work day drains within daily work area shall be plugged.
Plugs to be removed at end of each work day or before arrival of inclement
weather.
Preparation work shall be limited to those areas that can be covered with
installed roofing material on same day and before arrival of inclement
weather.
Arrange work sequence to avoid use of newly constructed roofing for storage,
walking surface, and equipment movement. Move equipment and ground
storage areas as work progresses.
At end of each working day, seal removal areas with water stops along edges
to prevent water entry.
Provide clean plywood walkways and take other precautions required to
prevent tracking of aggregate/debris from existing membrane into new work
area where aggregate/debris pieces can be trapped within new roofing
membrane. Contractor shall instruct and police workmen to ensure that
aggregate/debris is not tracked into new work areas on workmen's shoes or
equipment wheels. Discovery of entrapped aggregate/debris within new
membrane is sufficient cause for its rejection.
B. Surface preparation:
1.
2. Sweep clean roof deck.
Remove: Existing roofing, insulation to roof deck.
b. Area: As determined at site meeting.
3.04 CARPENTRY
A. Insulation stops for backnailing:
1. Mechanically attach wood blocking. Install fasteners in two rows stagger
nailed, with spacing of fasteners not exceeding 24 inches (600 mm).
a. Blocking thickness: Equal to final insulation thickness.
b. For roof slopes between 2: 12 and 3 : 12 (1 6:6% to 25%), install insulation
stops 20 feet (6 m) on center perpendicular to the slope. Apply the membrane parallel to the slope and backnail to the nailers.
c. For roof slopes of 3:12 (25%) and greater, install insulation stops 4 feet
(1220 mm) on center perpendicular to the slope. Apply the membrane
parallel to the slope and backnail to the nailers.
BUILT-UP ROOFING SYSTEMS
07510-1 1
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
3.05 ROOF DECK REPAIRS (NOT USED)
3.06 THERMAL INSULATION (NOT USED)
3.07 CRICKETS
A. Adhere Perlite crickets with hot melt adhesive to designated areas at rate of 25
lbs/squu-e
3.08 ROOF SYSTEM APPLICATION
B.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
Install the following prior to application of the roofing system:
1. Thermal insulation.
2. Crickets
Install base ply to roof and all wall, curb, and projection bases in a uniform and
continuous mopping of modified hot-melt adhesive, applied within its Equiviscous
Temperature (EVT) range.
Base ply laps: 4 inches (1 00 mm).
Apply adhesive no more than 10 feet (3 meter) ahead of each roll being embedded.
Broom base ply before adhesive cools from mopped side. Ensure complete and
continuous seal and contact between bitumen and ply sheets, including ends, edges,
and laps without wrinkles, fish mouths, or blisters. Broom width: 34 inches (860
mm) minimum. Avoid walking on base ply until adhesive has set.
Roofing ply shall never touch roofing ply, even at roof edges, laps, tapered edge
strips, and cants. Cut out fishmouthdside laps which are not completely sealed;
patch. Replace all sheets which are not fully and continuously bonded.
Lap base ply ends 4 inches (1 00 mm). Stagger end laps 3 feet (9 10 mm) minimum.
1. Adhesive application rate: 25 lbs. per 100 sq. ft. (1.2 kg/m2) average,
tolerance 20 percent.
Install three (3) plies of ply sheet, shingle fashion. Overlap starter strips 26 inches
(660 mm) with first ply, then overlap each succeeding ply 24-2/3 inches (630 mm).
Place ply sheets to ensure water will flow over or parallel to, but never against
exposed edges.
Use 12, 24, 36 inch (305, 610, and 910 mm) wide plies to start and finish roof
membrane along roof edges and terminations.
Lap ply sheet ends 6 inches (150 mm). Stagger end laps 12 inches (305 mm)
minimum.
BUILT-UP ROOFING SYSTEMS
075 10-12
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
K. Apply adhesive no more than 10 feet (3 meter) ahead of each roll being embedded.
L. Broom each ply before adhesive cools from unmopped side. Ensure complete and
continuous seal and contact between bitumen and ply sheets, including ends, edges,
and laps without wrinkles, fish mouths, or blisters. Broom width: 34 inches (860
mm) minimum. Avoid walking on plies until adhesive has set.
3.09 MEMBRANEREPAIRS
A.
B.
C.
D.
Unadhered felt edges or fishmouths:
1. Unadhered ply sheet within 2 inches (50 mm) or less from exposed edges:
a.
b.
Cut away unadhered felts and remove dust and debris; dry.
Apply asphalt mastic to seal.
Unadhered ply sheet more than 2 inches (50 mm) in from the ply edge:
1.
2.
Cut away unbonded ply sheets until fmly laminated sheets are reached.
Clean; dry.
Reinforce and seal prepared area with reinforcing mesh embedded between
alternate continuous applications of asphalt mastic.
All defects shall be repaired using at least one additional ply in area being repaired.
Use same membrane materials. Adhere repair materials in manner as specified for
original membrane. Install surfacing to match existing surrounding area.
3.10 FLASHINGS
A General flashing requirements:
1. MB Flashing:
a. Adhere one (1) ply flashing ply to flashing substrate in a continuous
application of flashing bitumen. Remove wrinkles and voids. Overlap
sections 4 inches (100 mm).
Extend flashing ply 4 inches (100 mm) beyond toe of cant.
Cut modified bitumen flashing membrane in lengths not to exceed 10
feet (3.1 meter). Apply flashing bitumen to flashing ply in a continuous
1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick application. Adhere flashing membrane to
bitumen. Lap flashing membrane ends 4 inches (100 mm); extend
membrane 6 inches (150 mm) beyond toe of cant; press sheet firmly in
place. Ensure complete bond and continuity without wrinkles or voids.
Adhere laps with flashing bitumen. Seal vertical laps of flashing
membrane with reinforcing membrane embedded between alternate
continuous courses of flashing bitumen.
a. Not less than 8 inches (200 mm), not higher than 12 inches (305 mm)
above finished roofing surface.
Two-ply Stripping for metal flanges:
a. Set flange in asphalt mastic. Seal flange with two (2) stripping plies
b.
c.
2. Base flashing height:
2.
BUILT-UP ROOFING SYSTEMS
075 10-1 3
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
embedded between alternate applications of stripping
adhesivehiturnen. Extend first ply 4 inches (100 mm) beyond flange;
second ply 2 inches (50 mm) beyond first ply.
Seal horizontal edge of flashing with two (2) stripping plies embedded
between alternate applications of stripping adhesivehiturnen. Extend
first ply 4 inches (100 mm) beyond flashing sheet; second ply 2 inches
(50 mm) beyond first ply.
3. Two-ply stripping for base flashings:
a.
B. At wall flashings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Adhere cant strip to flashing base in a continuous application of flashing
bitumedadhesive.
Install modified bitumen base flashing as described in general flashing
requirements section.
Secure top edge of flashing membrane to vertical substrate with termination
bar secured 8 inches (200 mm) O.C. maximum.
Provide five-course seal/reinforcement at top of flashing membrane.
a. Embed two (2) courses reinforcing mesh in alternate continuous
applications of asphalt mastic; leave no voids. Cover reinforcing mesh
with a top course of asphalt mastic.
Fabricate and install new counterflashing.
Install surface mount counterflashing with flashing tape. Mechanically fasten
8 inches (200 mm) O.C. maximum.
Wipe clean metal surfaces of flashing joint with metal cleaner. Prime metal
joint surfaces with metal primer. Allow to dry.
Caulk flashing joint. Provide watershed. Tool neatly.
Install two (2) ply stripping for modified bitumen base flashing described in
general flashing requirements section.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
C. At plumbing vents:
1.
2.
3.
Wedge plumbing vent tight against deck.
Apply 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) uniformly thick layer of asphalt mastic to surface
receiving metal flange.
Fabricate and install plumbing vent flashing from lead. Flange: 4 inches (1 00
mm) wide minimum; extend completely around periphery of vent flashing.
Set flange into mastic. Neatly dress flange with wood block. Add lead or
reinforced elastomeric membrane umbrella with drawband as per
manufacturer’s detail.
Prime metal flange with asphalt primer.
a.
4.
Pipe outside diameter greater than 2 inches (50 mm): Bend lead inside
pipe 1 inch (25 mm) minimum with pliers or rubbedplastic mallet;
replace cracked lead.
b. Pipe outside diameter 2 inches (50 mm) or less: Cut lead at vent top;
fabricate and install integral lead cap.
c. Mechanically fasten plumbing vent to substrate, 3 inch (75 mm) O.C.
staggered.
Install two (2) ply stripping for metal flanges as described in general flashing 5.
BUILT-UP ROOFING SYSTEMS
075 10- 14
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
requirements section.
D. At pitch pans:
1. Fabricate pitch pans, fitted with matching hood covers. Sides: 4 inches (1 00
mm) high, hemmed to outside at top edge. Flange: 4 inches (100 mm) wide,
completely around periphery. Clearance between projection and pitch pan: 2
inches (50 mm). Set flange in mastic.
Pack gap between roof-penetrating element and deck with compressible
insulation. Seal with reinforcing membrane embedded between alternate
courses of asphalt mastic.
Nail flange to substrate 3 inches (75 mm) o.c., staggered.
Prime metal flange, projection, and pitch pan interior with asphalt primer.
Install two (2) ply stripping described in general flashing requirements
section.
Fill pitch pan to within 1 inch (25 mm) from top with non shrink grout.
Allow to set firm.
Fill pitch pan with asphalt mastic. Double fill if necessary.
Fabricate and install umbrella with drawband over pitch pan. Tighten
drawband.
Wipe clean top of umbrella and projection with metal cleaner. Prime surface
with metal primer.
Caulk stacwsheet metal interface. Provide watershed. Tool neatly.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
9.
E. At metal sleeve and storm collar(s):
1. Apply 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) uniformly thick layer of asphalt mastic to surface
receiving metal flange.
2. Fabricate and install sleeve flashing. Height: 8 inches (200 mm). Flange
width: 4 inches (100 mm). Flange to extend completely around flashing
periphery. Solder all joints. Double solder vertical joints.
Nail flange to substrate 3 inches (75 mm) o.c., staggered.
Prime flange with asphalt primer.
Install two (2) ply stripping described in general flashing requirements
section.
Fabricate storm collar with bolted connection. Cover sleeve flashing 3 inches
(75 mm) minimum. Tighten bolts.
Wipe clean top of storm collar and projection with metal cleaner. Prime
surface with metal primer. Caulk projectiodsheet metal interface. Provide
watershed. Tool neatly.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
F. At roof drains:
1. Install tapered edge strip around drain to create approximate 48 x 48 inch
(1220 x 1220 mm) sump. Miter corners. Seal toe of tapered edge to drain
rim with reinforcing membrane embedded between alternate courses of
asphalt mastic.
Install roofing system into sump and onto drain rim.
Plug drain to prevent water entry until service connection is completed.
Prime the bottom side of the lead flashing.
2.
3.
4.
BUILT-UP ROOFING SYSTEMS
07510-15
hoject No. 3688 01 Jan 03
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
10.
11.
Apply 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) uniformly thick layer of asphalt mastic to surface
receiving soft copper flashing.
Set single piece lead flashing in mastic centered over drain; extend lead 6
inches (1 50 mm) beyond drain rim. Neatly dress lead with wood block.
Clamp flashing collar to drain in bed of mastic.
Neatly cut lead/felts within drain at rim. Lead to extend 1 inch (25 nun) into
bowl.
Prime lead with asphalt primer.
Fabricate a 1" x 4" (25 mm by 100 mm) gravel retainer in a 36" (0.914 m)
square around the drain bowl. Set gravel retainer in asphalt mastic.
Install two (2) ply stripping described in general flashing requirements
section. Stripping shall not extend under clamping ring.
For working drains, remove drain plug upon completion of work each day.
3.11 SURFACING APPLICATION
A Roof surfacing:
1.
2.
Prior to application of surface treatment system, contractor shall inspect roof
with manufacturer's representative.
Over entire roof surface apply uniform and continuous flood coat of hot-melt
modified bitumen at minimum rate of 50 lbs. per 100 sq. ft. (2.4 kg/m2) 20%.
3. Immediately broadcast minimum 400 lbs./100 sq. ft. (19.5 kg/xn2) of new,
clean roofing gravel. Cover flood coat material completely.
3.12 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Repair of deficiencies:
1. Installations of details noted as deficient during final inspection must be
repaired and corrected by applicator, and made ready for reinspection, within
five (5) working days.
B. Clean-up:
1.
2.
Immediately upon job completion, roof membrane and flashing surfaces shall
be cleaned of debris.
Clean gutters and downspouts of debris.
3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. During progress of the work of this Section, make visual inspections as necessary, and
verify that:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
All materials used comply with the specified requirements;
All materials are properly stored and handled;
The proper number and types of plies are installed, with the specified overlaps;
The proper number, type, and spacing of fasteners are used;
Associated flashings and sheet metal are installed in a timely manner in accordance
with the specified requirements;
BUILT-UP ROOFING SYSTEMS
075 10-16
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
6.
7.
All elements of the work of this Section are completed on the same day and not
installed in phases;
Insulation, when specified, is properly secured to the substrata, and nailers are
provided where and as needed.
B. The Owner reserves the right to require test cuts to be made in the installed work of this
Section.
1. Make such test cuts, when so directed by the Owner's Designated Representative, in
dimension of 100 mm x 1.05 mm (4" x 42"), at right angles to the length of the plies,
and only at locations where directed by the Owner's Designated Representative.
Provide temporary protection at the site of test cuts as needed to prevent penetration
of water until repairs are made or new roof system is installed.
Upon approval of the test cut sample, immediately repair the site of the test cut to
the same degree of protection as is provided by the roofing system.
2.
3.
END OF SECTION
BUILT-UP ROOFING SYSTEMS
07510-17
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
STATEMENT OF ROOFING MANUFACTURER'S QUALIFICATIONS
Each bidder for the work included in the specifications and drawings and the contract documents
shall submit with their bid the data requested in the following schedule of information. This data
must be included in and made part of each bid document and contained in the sealed envelope.
Failure to comply with this instruction may be regarded as justification for rejecting the
Contractor's Proposal. Submit one (1) copy of this statement.
1. Name of bidder
2. Name of Material Supplier
3. Number of years manufacturing this roof system
4. Location of wholly owned and operated manufacturing facilities.
Facility
Product
Stree-
State
% of product used
mfg at this plan-
1. Submit Material Safety Data Sheets on products to be used.
2. Submit current independent laboratory results on roofing system that is proposed, prior to
award of contract.
3. The proposed roof system to be installed shall meet all local and state safety, health, fire
and building code requirements.
BUILT-UP ROOFING SYSTEMS
075 10-1 8
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
I-
-
Rep Name:
PhoneFAX:
DATE:
PROJECT:
CONTRACTOR:
PRE-FINAL INSPECTION CHECKLIST
The following items are to be checked and initialed by Superintendenfloreman and the list the
faxed to manufacturer's representative prior to calling for any PRE-SURFACING INSPECTION.
Termination Bar: Reinforced flashing is sandwiched with gasket tape between the wall
and the top edge of reinforced flashing. Termination bar is to be mechanically fastened 8
inches on center.
Round roof penetrations, Le., pipes, supports, etc. Gasket tape, stainless steel clamps,
caulking, metal umbrellas are installed.
Fan housings, exhaust units and equipment on small curbs have been secured with correct
screw fasteners and washers. Housings, duct work, and equipment have been cleaned of
all asphalt marks/overspray, or painted.
Roof Drains: New bolts are in placed and tight. Clamping rings and rim cleaned, drains
tested, dome cover in place. Sump installed.
Three (3) coursing is completed at all reinforced elastomeric flashing terminations to the
roof membrane. Five coursing or targets are completed at all metal flanges (gravel stops,
lead flanges, pitch pans, etc.). There shall be no reinforcing fabric or membrane showing
through mastic.
All flanges properly secured to deck with appropriate fasteners nailed 3" on center and
staggered.
Caulk outside of the perimeter of thru-wall drains/scuppers.
Wood blocking and walkpads have been installed under all pipe and conduit runs on the
roof, including conduit clamps to blocking. Clamps to be loose fitting.
Mastic, asphalt, and/or adhesive is cleaned off all pipes, conduits, metal surfaces,
penetrations, perimeter metal and walls, or completely painted.
Gravel stop, coping or perimeter metal has been properly butted and with cover plates,
BUILT-UP ROOFING SYSTEMS
07510-1 9
Project No. 3688 0 1 Jan 03
interlocking laps and metal fits tightly. The face of the gravel stop metal has been cleaned
or painted to match original if specified.
Gutters have been cleaned out and coated with rust prohibitive paint or coating (if
specified). Strainers have been installed at all downspout locations. Downspouts have
been cleaned out and water flows through. Downspouts have be secured.
Gravel surface has been neatly dressed.
Sheet metal comers installed and properly secured where metal flashing has been broken.
Walk pads have been installed at all service areas of roof top equipment, roof hatch, roof
ladders, doors, etc. and in areas required per specifications.
The grounds surrounding the building or project area and the setup areas have been
cleaned and all asphalt has been cleaned fiom grounds. All debris and ROOFING
NAILS have been cleaned up and disposed of.
The specifications, scope of work, and any special notes or applications have been
reviewed and completed to ensure all items have been addressed.
Pitch pans properly filled with grout, specified mastic and sheet metal covers installed
and sealed.
Field deficiencies have been repaired, such as dry laps, fishmouths, blisters, torn felts, etc.
All A/C duct seams sealed as specified.
THANK YOU FOR YOUR COOPERATION!
FOREMAN
SUPERINTENDENT
DATE
NOTE: FINAL INSPECTION WILL BE SCHEDULED UPON COMPLETION OF FORM!!!
BUILT-UP ROOFING SYSTEMS
075 10-20
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
SECTION 07600
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Provide flashing and sheet metal not specifically described in other Sections of these
Specifications but required to prevent penetration of water through the exterior shell of
the building.
B. Related work:
1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to,
Contract Documents, Special Provisions and Sections in Division 1 of these
Specifications
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of the Contract Documents and Supplemental
Provisions.
B. Product data: Within 45 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's
Notice to Proceed, submit:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section;
Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements;
Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorage, and
interface of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent trades;
Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the
Owner's Designated Representative, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting
actual installation procedures used on the' Work.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods
needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. In addition to complying with pertinent codes and regulations, comply with pertinent
recommendations contained in current edition of "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"
published by the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association
(SMACNA) .
C. Standard commercial items may be used for flashing, trim, reglets, and similar purposes
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
07600- 1
provided such items meet or exceed the quality standards specified.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of the Contract Documents and Supplemental
Provisions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
2.02
A.
B.
2.03
A.
2.04
A.
2.05
A.
2.06
A.
MATERIALS AND GAGES
Where sheet metal is required, and no material or gage is indicated on the Drawings,
provide the highest quality and gage commensurate with the referenced standards.
GALVANIZED IRON
Provide sheet metal or sheet iron of a standard brand of open-hearth copper-bearing steel,
copper-molybdenum iron, or pure iron sheets.
Zinc coating:
1. Where galvanizing is required, provide zinc coating by hot-dip galvanize to all
surfaces.
2. Weight:
a. Provide not less than 35.4 g per sq 300 mm (1-1/4 oz per sq ft), nor more than
42.5 g per sq 300 mm (1-112 oz per sq ft), to surfaces required to be galvanized.
3. Comply with ASTM A123-84.
NAILS, RIVETS, AND FASTENERS
Use only soft iron rivets having rust-resistive coating, galvanized nails, and cadmium
plated screws and washers in connection with galvanized iron and steel.
FLUX
Where flux is required, use raw muriatic acid.
SOLDER
Where solder is required, comply with ASTM B32.
OTHER MATERIALS
Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Owner's
Designated Representative.
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
07600-2
PART 3 - EXECUTION -
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.02 WORKMANSHIP
A. General:
1. Form sheet metal accurately and to the dimensions and shapes required, finishing
molded and broken surfaces with true, sharp, and straight lines and angles and,
where intercepting other members, coping to an accurate fit and soldering securely.
Unless otherwise specifically permitted by the Owner's Designated Representative,
turn exposed edges back 13 mm (1/2").
2.
B. Form, fabricate, and install sheet metal so as to adequately provide for expansion and
contraction in the finished Work.
C. Weatherproofing:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Finish watertight and weathertight where so required.
Make lock seam work flat and true to line, sweating full of solder.
Make lock seams and lap seams, when soldered, at least 13 mm (1 /2") wide.
Where lap seams are not soldered, lap according to pitch, but in no case less than 75
Make flat and lap seams in the direction of flow.
mm (3").
D. Joints:
1.
2.
Join parts with rivets or sheet metal screws where necessary for strength and
stiffness.
Provide suitable watertight expansion joints for runs of more than 12.19 m (40'-O"),
except where closer spacing is indicated on the Drawings or required for proper
installation.
E. Nailing:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Whenever possible, secure metal by means of clips or cleats, without nailing through
the exterior metal.
In general, space nails, rivets, and screws not more than 200 mm (8") apart and,
where exposed to the weather, use lead washers.
For nailing into wood, use barbed roofing nails 31 mm (1-1/4") long by 11 gage.
For nailing into concrete, use drilled plugholes and plugs.
3.03 EMBEDMENT
A. Embed metal in connection with roofs in a solid bed of sealant, using materials and
methods described in Section 07920 of these Specifications or other materials and
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
0 7 6 0 0 - 3
methods approved in advance by the Owner’s Designated Representative.
3.04 SOLDERING
A. General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Thoroughly clean and tin the joint materials prior to soldering.
Perform soldering slowly, with a well heated copper, in order to heat the seams
thoroughly and to completely fill them with solder.
Perform soldering with a heavy soldering copper of blunt design, properly tinned for
use.
Make exposed soldering on finished surfaces neat, full flowing, and smooth.
B. After soldering, thoroughly wash acid flux with a soda solution.
3.05 TESTS
A. Upon request of the Owner’s Designated Representative, demonstrate by hose or
standing water that the flashing and sheet metal are completely watertight.
END OF SECTION
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
07600-4
SECTION 07920
SEALANTS AND CALKING
x
1.01
A.
B.
1.02
A.
B.
C.
1.03
A.
1.04
A.
1 - tii6NL;KAL
SUMMARY
Throughout the Work, seal and calk joints where shown on the Drawings and elsewhere
as required to provide a positive barrier against passage of moisture and passage of air.
Related work:
1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to,
Contract Documents, Special Provisions and Sections in Division 1 of these
Specifications.
SUBMITTALS
Comply with pertinent provisions of the Contract Documents and Supplemental
Provisions.
Product data: Within 45 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner’s
Notice to Proceed, submit:
1.
2.
3.
Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section;
Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements;
Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the
Owner’s Designated Representative, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting
actual installation procedures used on the Work.
Samples: Upon request of the Owner’s Designated Representative, submit Samples of
each sealant, each backing material, each primer, and each bond breaker proposed to be
used.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods
needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Comply with pertinent provisions of the Contract Documents and Supplemental
SEALANTS AND CALKING
07920- 1
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
Provisions.
B,. Do not retain at the job site material which has exceeded the shelf life recommended by
its mandacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 SEALANTS
A. Provide the following sealants, or equals approved in advance by the Owner's
Designated Representative, where called for on the Drawings or otherwise required
for a complete and proper installation. 1. Sealant Type A (at joints subjected to
horizontal traffic):
a.
b. Acceptable products:
Self-leveling, complying with ASTM C920-79, grade P, class 25;
(1) "Vulkem 45, one-part;"
(2) "Vulkem 245, two-part;"
Sealant Type B (at joints subject to extreme movement): a. Non-sag, complying
with ASTM C920-79, type S, grade NS, class 25, use NT, M, A, and 0;
b. Acceptable products:
(1) "Vulkem 1 16, one-part;"
(2) "Vulkem 92 1, one-part;"
2.
3. Sealant Type C (at joints requiring acoustical separation):
a. Acoustical sealant;
b. Acceptable products:
(1) "W. W. Henry's 313;"
(2) "W. W. Henry's 413;"
Sealant Type D (at joints not listed above):
a. Acrylic latex, complying with ASTM C834-76;
b. Acceptable products:
(1) "Pecora AC 20."
4.
B. For other services, except as may be called for on the Drawings, provide products
especially formulated for the proposed use and approved in advance by the Owner's
Designated Representative.
C. Colors:
1.
2.
3.
Colors for each sealant installation will be selected by the Owner's Designated
Representative from standard colors normally available from the specified
manufacturer.
Should such standard color not be available from an approved substitute
manufacturer except at additional charge, provide such colors at no additional cost
to the Owner.
In concealed installations, and in partially or fully exposed installations where so
approved by the Owner's Designated Representative, use standard gray or black
sealant.
SEALANTS AND CALKING
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
07920-2
2.02
A.
2.03
A.
2.04
A.
2.05
A.
PRIMERS
Use only those primers which have been tested for durability on the surfaces to be sealed
and are specifically recommended for this installation by the manufacturer of the sealant
used.
BACKUP MATERIALS
Use only those backup materials which are non-absorbent, non-staining, and specifically
recommended for this installation by the manufacturer of the sealant used.
MASKMG TAPE
For masking around joints, provide an appropriate masking tape which will effectively
prevent application of sealant on surfaces not scheduled to receive it, and which is re-
movable without damage to substrate.
OTHER MATERIALS
Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Owner's
Designated Representative.
3.01
A.
3.02
A.
B.
3 - J!XLCU'l'lUN
SURFACE CONDITIONS
Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
PREPARATION
Concrete and ceramic tile surfaces:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Install only on surfaces which are dry, sound, and well brushed, wiping free from
dust.
At open joints, remove dust by mechanically blown compressed air if so required.
To remove oil and grease, use sandblasting or wire brushing.
Where surfaces have been treated, remove the surface treatment by sandblasting or
wire brushing.
Remove laitance and mortar from joint cavities.
Steel surfaces:
1. Steel surfaces in contact with sealant:
a.
b.
Sandblast as required to achieve acceptable surface for bond.
If sandblasting is not practical, or would damage adjacent finish, scrape the
SEALANTS AND CALKING
07920-3
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
metal or wire brush to remove mill scale and rust.
Use solvent to remove oil and grease, wiping the surfaces with clean white rags c.
Remove protective coatings on steel by sandblasting or by using a solvent which
leaves no residue.
only.
2.
C. Aluminum surfaces:
1. Aluminum surfaces in contact with sealant:
a. Remove temporary protective coatings, dirt, oil, and grease.
b. When masking tape is used for protective cover, remove the tape just prior to
applying the sealant.
Use only such solvents to remove protective coatings as are recommended for that
purpose by the manufacturer of the aluminum work, and which are non-staining.
2.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF BACKUP MATERIAL
A. When using backup of tube or rod stock, avoid lengthwise stretching of the material. Do
not twist or braid hose or rod backup stock.
B. Installation tool:
1. For installation of backup material, provide a blunt-surfaced tool of wood or plastic,
having shoulders designed to ride on the adjacent finished surface and a protrusion
of the required dimensions to assure uniform depth of backup material below the
sealant.
Do not, under any circumstance, use a screwdriver or similar tool for this purpose.
Using the approved tool, smoothly and uniformly place the backup material to the
depth indicated on the Drawings or otherwise required, compressing the backup
material 25% to 50% and securing a positive fit.
2.
3.
3.04 PRIMING
A. Use only the primer approved by the Owner’s Designated Representative for the par-
ticular installation, applying in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations as approved by the Owner’s Designated Representative.
3.05 BOND-BREAKER INSTALLATION
A. Provide an approved bond-breaker where recommended by the manufacturer of the
sealant, and where directed by the Owner’s Designated Representative, adhering strictly
to the manufacturers’ installation recommendations.
3.06 INSTALLATION OF SEALANTS
A. Prior to start of installation in each joint, verify the joint type according to details on the
Drawings, or as otherwise directed by the Owner’s Designated Representative, and verify
that the required proportion of width of joint to depth of joint has been secured.
SEALANTS AND CALKING
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
07920-4
_-
B. Equipment:
1.
2.
Apply sealant under pressure with power-actuated hand gun or manually-operated
hand gun, or by other appropriate means.
Use guns with nozzle of proper size, and providing sufficient pressure to completely
fill the joints as designed.
C. Thoroughly and completely mask joints where the appearance of primer or sealant on
adjacent surfaces would be objectionable.
D. Install the sealant in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations,
thoroughly filling joints to the recommended depth.
E. Tool joints to the profile shown on the Drawings, or as otherwise required if such
profiles are not shown on the Drawings.
1.
2.
Provide uniformly smooth joints with slightly concave surface.
Do not use tooling agent unless specifically so recommended in writing by the
manufacturer of the sealant.
F. Cleaningup:
1.
2.
3.
Remove masking tape immediately after joints have been tooled.
Clean adjacent surfaces free from sealant as the installation progresses, using solvent
or cleaning agent recommended by the manufacturer of the sealant used.
Upon completion of the work of this Section, promptly remove fiom the job site all
debris, empty containers, and surplus material derived from this portion of the
Work.
END OF SECTION
SEALANTS AND CALKING
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
07920-5
SECTION 08110
METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
I
.-
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
B.
1.02
A.
B.
1.03
A.
B.
C.
SUMMARY
Provide metal doors, and metal door and window frames, which are not specifically
described in other Sections of these Specifications, where shown on the Drawings, as
specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation.
Related work:
1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to,
Contract Documents, Special Provisions and Sections in Division 1 of these
Specifications.
SUBMITTALS
Comply with pertinent provisions of the Contract Documents and Supplemental
Provisions.
Product data: Within 30 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's
Notice to Proceed, submit:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section;
2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements;
3. Shop Drawings showing details of each frame type, elevations of door designs, details
of openings, and de-tails of construction, installation, and anchorage;
4. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the
Owner's Designated Representative, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting
actual installation procedures used on the Work.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods
needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
Unless specifically otherwise approved by the Owner's Designated Representative,
provide all products of this Section from a single manufacturer.
Comply with pertinent recommendations of the Hollow Metal Manufacturers' Association,
Standard HMMA 861.
METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
081 10-1
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of the Contract Documents and Supplemental
Provisions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 METALDOORS
A. Provide in the dimensions and types shown on the Drawings, and with the following
attributes:
1. Face sheets:
a. Interior doors: 18 gage;
b. Exterior doors: 16 gage, hot-dip galvanized;
2. Minimum thickness: 1-3/4";
3. Stiffeners: Two @ 22 gage;
4. Vertical edges: Continuous weld;
5. Top and bottom edges: Closed with 16 gage continuous recessed steel channel, spot-
welded to face sheets;
6. Glass mouldings and stops:
a. Fixed mouldings welded to door on security side;
b. Loose stops: 20 gage;
7. Louvers: Welded blade-type construction; with replaceable metal screen at exterior
doors.
B. At the factory, pre-clean and shop prime each door for fin ish painting whch will be
performed at the job site under Section 09900 of these Specifications.
C. Acceptable products:
1. As manufactured by Krieger Steel Products Co., 4896 Gregg Road, Pic0 Rivera, CA
2. Equal products of Amweld, Ceco, or other manufacturer approved in advance by the
Owner's Designated Representative.
90660 (213) 695-0645;
2.02 METAL FRAMES
A. Acceptable products: See Paragraph 2.3-C above.
B. Provide in the dimensions and types shown on the Drawings, and with the following
attributes:
1. For interior openings:
a. For openings 4'-0" wide or less: 16 gage;
b. For openings more than 4'-0'' wide: 14 gage;
2. For exterior openings: 14 gage, hot-dip galvanized;
METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
08110-2
3. Construction: Welded units, with integral stop and trim;
4. Floor anchors: 14 gage, welded inside jambs;
5. Jamb anchors:
a. In masonry walls, provide with 0.156" thick wire-type or with adjustable 16 gage
T-strap not less than 2" x 10";
b. In stud partitions, provide 18 gage steel anchors welded inside jambs;
6. Dust covers: 26 gage, where required;
7. Loose glazing stops:
a. Exterior openings: 20 gage cold-rolled steel;
b. For interior openings: Snap-on glazing stops.
C. At the factory, pre-clean and shop prime each frame for finish painting which will be
performed at the job site under Section 09900 of these Specifications.
2.03 FINISHHARDWARE
A. Secure templates from the finish hardware supplier, and accurately install, or make
provision for, all finish hardware at the factory.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not pro-
ceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Placing fi-ames:
1. Where practicable, place fi-ames prior to construction of enclosing walls and ceilings.
2. Set frames accurately into position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until
permanent anchors are set.
3. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving
surfaces smooth and un-damaged.
4. At in-place construction, set frames and secure to adjacent construction with machine
screws and suitable anchorage devices. Provide "Z" fillers at each screw location.
5. When installed in prepared openings in concrete construction, provide sealant between
frame and concrete in accordance with provisions of Section 07920 of these
Specifications.
3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Final adjustments:
1. Check and readjust operating finish hardware items in hollow metal work just prior to
final inspection.
METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
08110-3
2. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition.
3. Remove defective work and replace with work complying with the specified
requirements.
B. Immediately after erection, sand smooth all rusted and dam-aged areas of prime coat, and
apply touchup of compatible air-dyng primer.
END OF SECTION
METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
08 1 10-4
SECTION 08520
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide aluminum windows and screens where shown on the Drawings, as specified
herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation.
B. Related work:
1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to,
Contract Documents, Special Provisions and Sections in Division 1 of these
Specifications.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 0 1340.
B. Product data: Within 30 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's
Notice to Proceed, submit:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section;
Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements;
Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorage, and
interface of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent trades;
Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the
Architect, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation
procedures used on the Work.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and the
methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. In addition to complying with pertinent regulations of governmental agencies having
jurisdiction:
1. Comply with ANSI-AAMA 101-88 for the designations specified;
2. On each unit, provide an AAMA sponsored label certifying compliance with the
specified requirements.
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
Project No. 3688 03 JAN 03
08520-1
1.4DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01620.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ALUMINUM WINDOWS (MATCH CONFIGURATION OF WINDOWS ON
EXISTING FIRE STATION ADJACENT).
A. Provide aluminum windows of the types and dimensions shown on the Drawings,
complete with anchors of the types needed for the installation, and complying with the
following standards as defined in ANSI-AAMA 101-88, except as may be called for
otherwise on the Drawings:
1. U-value class: U30;
2. CRF class: C50;
3. Performance class: 30.
B. Finish:
Provide architectural painted finish to match color (faded) of existing Fire Station
Building adjacent.
C. Factory glaze as indicated in Technical Specification Section 08800 Glazing.
D. Provide the manufacturerls standard screen at all vents.
E. Provide applied artificial muntins as shown on the drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations as approved by the Architect, anchoring all units firmly into position
square, plumb, straight, and true.
B. Dissimilar materials:
1. Where aluminum surfaces come in contact with metals other than stainless steel,
zinc, or white bronze of small area, isolate the aluminum by one of the following
methods.
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
Project No. 3688 03 JAN 03
08520-2
a.
b.
c.
d.
Paint the dissimilar metal with a prime coat of zinc-chromate primer, followed
by two coats of aluminum metal-and-masonry paint.
Paint the dissimilar metal with a coating of heavy-bodied bituminous paint.
Apply a good quality sealant material between the aluminum and the dissimilar
metal.
Isolate the dissimilar metals with non-absorptive tape or gaskets.
3.3CLEA"G
A. Labels:
1.
2.
Leave all labels in place, intact and legible, until reviewed and approved by the
Architect.
Do not at any time remove required AAMA labels.
B. Prior to completion of the Work, thoroughly clean all exposed surfaces of windows and
screens.
1. Use only the cleaning materials and techniques recommended by the manufacturer
of the material being cleaned.
2. Do not scratch or otherwise damage the glass, screen, or aluminum finish.
END OF SECTION
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
Project No. 3688 03 JAN 03
08520-3
SECTION 08710
FINISH HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Provide finish hardware throughout the Work as specified herein and as needed for a
complete and proper installation.
B. Related work:
1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited
to, Contract Documents, Special Provisions and Sections in Division 1 of these
Specifications.
Installation of finish hardware is described in other Sections of these Specifications. 2.
1 .oe SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01340.
B. Product data: Within 45 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's
Notice to Proceed, submit:
1. A "Door Schedule" listing all doors in the Work, and all other locations requiring
finish hardware (a copy of the Door Schedule included in the Drawings may be
used for this purpose), and assigning a "Hardware Group" to each such door and
other location.
A "Finish Hardware Schedule" listing each of the proposed "Hardware Groups,"
and defining in detail the proposed contents of each Hardware Group.
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Show the quantity of each type of item proposed to be supplied within each
Hardware Group;
Show the dimensions, when pertinent, and the manufacturer's catalog number;
Show the finish of each item;
Show the manufacturer's name by a suitable legend.
C. Samples:
1. Within 15 calendar days after being so requested by the Owner's Designated
Representative, deliver to the Owner's Designated Representative Samples of each
finish hardware item.
All Samples will be returned to the Contractor, provided those Samples which are
approved by the Owner's Designated Representative are positively identified and
are installed in the Work at locations agreed to by the Owner's Designated
Representative.
2.
FINISH HARDWARE
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
08710-1
D. In a timely manner to assure orderly progress of the Work, deliver templates or
physical samples of the approved finish hardware items to pertinent manufacturers of
interfacing items such as doors and frames.
1.0s QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide the services of an AHC or DAHC member of the Door Hardware Institute to:
1.
2.
Be available for consultation with the Owner’s Designated Representative at no
additional cost to the Owner during progress of construction;
Be present at completion of construction, and:
a. Inspect installation of all finish hardware items;
b. Make minor adjustments as required; and
c. Report to the Owner’s Designated Representative on completeness of the in-
stallation.
B. The hardware consultant may be an employee of the supplier.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01620.
B. Individually package each unit of finish hardware, complete with proper fastenings and
appurtenances, clearly marked on the outside to indicate contents and specific locations
in the Work.
PART 9 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Fasteners:
I.
2.
Furnish necessary screws, bolts, and other fasteners of suitable size and type to
anchor the hardware in position for long life under hard use.
Where necessary, furnish fasteners with expansion shields, toggle bolts, sex bolts,
and other anchors approved by the Owner’s Designated Representative, according
to the material to which the hardware is to be applied and according to the
recommendations of the hardware manufacturer.
B. Where butts are required to swing 180 degrees, furnish butts of sufficient throw to
clear the trim.
C. Furnish silencers for door frames at the rate of three for each single door and two for
each door of pairs of doors; except weatherstripped doors and doors with light seals or
sound seals.
9.09 KEYING
FINISH HARDWARE
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
087 10-2
_-
A
.-
A. Factory key, masterkey, and grand-masterkey locks and cylinders as directed by the
Owner's Designated Representative.
B. Furnish three keys for each lock, twelve masterkeys for each set, and three grand-
masterkeys.
C. Construction keying:
1.
2.
S.
Furnish a construction masterkey system with 15 keys for locks and cylinders.
Use only the construction keys during construction.
At the time of final acceptance of the Work, void the construction key system and,
in the presence of the Owner's Designated Representative, demonstrate that the
specified keying sys tem is operating properly.
D. Identification and delivery:
1.
2.
Factory stamp permanent keys, "DO NOT DUPLICATE."
Identify permanent keys with tags, and send direct to the Owner by registered
mail.
9.03 TOOLS AND MANUALS
A. With the delivery of permanent keys, deliver to the Owner one complete set of
adjustment tools and one set of maintenance manuals for locksets, latchsets, closers,
and panic devices.
9.04 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS
A. Single source for items:
1. Except as specifically otherwise approved by the Owner's Designated
Representative, furnish for each item (such as ''door butt type 1") only the product
of a single manufacturer (such as "Hager BB-800").
To the maximum extent practicable, furnish similar items (such as "door butts")
only as the product of a single manufacturer (such as "Hager").
2.
B. For each of the required items of finish hardware, provide from the following list of
acceptable products, or equals approved in advance by the Owner's Designated
Representative.
1. Door butts:
a. Hager;
b. Lawrence;
c. McKinney.
2. Locksets:
a. Schlage.
3. Latchsets:
a. Schlage.
4. Door closers:
a. Norton;
FINISH HARDWARE
08710-3
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
b. Yale.
5. Panic devices:
a. Von Duprin.
6. Door stops:
a. Builders Brass Works;
b. Quality.
C. Finishes: Provide finish hardware with finish selected by the Owner’s Designated
Representative from standard finishes of the approved manufacturers in the actual
items selected.
2.05 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and
proper installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Owner’s
Designated Representative.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 DELIVERIES
A. Stockpile items sufficiently in advance to assure their availability, and make necessary
deliveries to the job site in a timely manner to assure orderly progress of the total
Work.
3.02 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate as necessary with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in
the work of those trades for interface with the work of this Section.
B. Upon completion of the Work, and as a condition of its acceptance, provide the
inspection, adjustment, and report described in Article 1.3 above.
END OF SECTION
FINISH HARDWARE
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
08710-4
SECTION 08800
GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Provide glazing and glazing accessories where shown on the Drawings, as specified
herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation.
B. Related work
1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to,
Contract Documents, Special Provisions and Sections in Division 1 of these
Specifications.
2. Section 08710;
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of the Contract Documents and Supplemental
Provisions.
B. Product data: Within 60 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's
Notice to Proceed, submit:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section;
2. Manufacturers' specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements;
3. Manufacturers' recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the
Owner's Designated Representative, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting
actual installation procedures used on the Work.
C. Samples: Accompanying the above product data, submit:
1. Samples of each type of glass and glazing bead proposed to be used;
2. Samples of each type of sealant proposed to be used, tested for each substrate involved
(ADD-certified by the sealant supplier if organic coatings are involved).
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods
needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. In addition to complying with pertinent codes and regulations of governmental agencies
having jurisdiction, comply with pertinent recommendations contained in:
GLAZING
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
08800 - 1
1. Flat Glass Marketing Association:
a. “Sealant Manual”;
b. “Glazing Manual”;
2. ASTM publications pertaining to glazing.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of the Contract Documents and Supplemental
Provisions and with pertinent glass handling and storage recommendations contained in
the referenced standards.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GLASS
A. General:
1. For all glass, provide the type and thickness shown on the Drawings or specified
herein.
2. Where type or thickness, or both, are not shown on the Drawings or specified herein,
provide type and thickness approved by the Owner’s Designated Representative.
1. “Type 1” (all exterior windows) ?4” thick Visteon, Versalux Relfective Series “Blue
2000R. U-value 1.13 Max., shading coefficient 0.30 Max., visible light transmittance
25% Max.
B. Specific glass types:
2.02 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Owner’s
Designated Representative.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not pro-
ceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
B. Clean glazing channels, stops, and rabbets to receive the glazing materials, making free
from obstructions and deleterious substances which might impair the work.
1. Remove protective coatings which might fail in adhesion or interfere with bond of
sealants.
2. Comply with manufacturers’ instructions for final wiping of surfaces immediately
prior to application of primer and glazing compounds or tapes.
3. Prime surfaces to receive glazing compounds in accordance with manufacturers’
GLAZING
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
08800 - 2
recommendations.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Inspect each piece of glass immediately prior to start of installation.
1. Do not install items which are improperly sized, have damaged edges, or are
scratched, abraded, or deficient in any other manner.
2. Labels must be provided by the glass supplier, do not remove such labels until so
directed by the Owner's Designated Representative.
3. Install glass so distortion waves, if present, run in the horizontal direction.
B. Locate sill setting blocks of standard width and thickness at quarter points of all glass lites
unless otherwise recommended by the glass manufacturer or supplier.
1. Use blocks of proper Durometer, size, and thickness to support the glass in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations.
2. Provide spacers for all glass sizes larger than 50 united inches, to separate glass fiom
stops; except where continuous glazing gaskets or other resilient glazing materials are
used.
a. ' Locate spacers no more than 600 mm (24") apart, and no closer to a corner than
300 mm (12").
b. Place spacers opposite one another.
c. Provide glass lap and edge clearances as required by the governmental agencies
having jurisdiction.
C. Set glass in a manner which produces the greatest possible degree of uniformity in
appearance, locating all "bugs" in lower right hand interior corner.
1. Do not use two different glazing materials in the same joint system unless the joint use
is recommended by the manufacturer and approved in advance by the Owner's
Designated Representative.
2. If necessary, mask or otherwise protect surfaces adjacent to installation of sealants.
3. Cut and seal the joints of glazing gaskets in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations, to provide watertight and airtight seal at corners and other locations
where joints are required.
3.03 PROTECTION
A. Where so directed, protect glass from breakage after installation by promptly installing
streamers or ribbons, suitably attached to the fiaming and held fiee from glass.
B. Do not apply warning markings, streamers, ribbons, or other items directly to the glass
except as specifically directed by the Owner's Designated Representative.
END OF SECTION
GLAZING
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
08800 - 3
SECTION 09260
YAK1
1.01
A.
B.
1.02
A.
B.
C.
GYPSUM WALLBOARD SYSTEM
1 - GENERAL - 1-9
SUMMARY
Provide gypsum drywall and accessories where shown on the Drawings, as specified
herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation.
Related work:
1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to,
Contract Documents, Special Provisions and Sections in Division 1 of these
Specifications
SUBMITTALS
Comply with pertinent provisions of the Contract Documents and Supplemental
Provisions.
Product data: Within 35 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's
Notice to Proceed, submit:
1.
2.
3.
Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section;
Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements;
Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the
Owner's Designated Representative, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting
actual installation procedures used on the Work.
Mock-ups:
1. At a location on the site where approved by the Owner's Designated Representative,
provide a mock-up gypsum wallboard panel.
a. Make the panel approximately 1.2 m (4'"'') square.
b. Provide one mock-up panel for each gypsum wallboard finish used on the
Work.
c. The mock-ups may be used as part of the Work, and may be included in the
finished Work, when so approved by the Owner's Designated Representative.
d. Revise as necessary to secure the Owner's Designated Representative's
approval.
The mock-up panels, when approved by the Owner's Designated Representative,
will be used as datum points for comparison with the remainder of the work of this
Section for the purpose of acceptance or rejection.
2. If the mock-up panels are not permitted to be part of the finished Work, completely
demolish and remove them &om the job site upon completion and acceptance of the
2.
GYPSUM WALLBOARD SYSTEM
09260- 1
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
work of this Section.
1.03
A.
1.04
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods
needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Comply with pertinent provisions of the Contract Documents and Supplemental
Provisions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
B.
C.
2.02
A.
B.
C.
GYPSUM WALLBOARD
General:
1.
2.
3.
Provide gypsum wallboard complying with Fed Spec SS-L-30D, in 1.2 m (48")
widths and in such lengths as will result in a minimum of joints.
Fire-retardant wallboard: Provide type III, grade X, class 1, 16 mm (5/8") thick,
(Typical throughtout project except where noted otherwise on drawings)
Water-resistant wallboard: Provide type VII, grade W or X as required, class 2, 16
mm (5/8") thick except as may be shown otherwise on the Drawings.
Shaft walls: Where so indicated on the Drawings, provide gypsum wallboard system
specifically designed for encasing shafts of the required fire-resistivity, and complying
with Fed Spec SS-L-30D, type Iv, grade R or X, class 1, in the dimensions shown or
otherwise required.
Sheathing: Where gypsum wallboard sheathing is indicated on the Drawings, provide
gypsum wallboard complying with Fed Spec SS-L-30D, type II, grade W, class 2.
METAL TRIM
Form from zinc-coated steel not lighter than 26 gauge, complying with Fed Spec QQ-S-
775, type I, class d or e.
Casing beads:
1.
2.
Provide channel-shapes with an exposed wing, and with a concealed wing not less
than 22 mm (7/8") wide.
The exposed wing may be covered with paper cemented to the metal, but shall be
suitable for joint treatment.
Corner beads: Provide angle shapes with wings not less than 22 mm (7/8") wide and
perforated for nailing and joint treatment, or with combination metal and paper wings
GYPSUM WALLBOARD SYSTEM
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
09260-2
bonded together, not less than 3 1 mm (1-1/4") wide and suitable for joint treatment.
.- D. Edge beads for use at perimeter of ceilings:
1.
2.
3.
Provide angle shapes with wings not less than 20 mm (3/4") wide.
Provide concealed wing perforated for nailing, and exposed wing edge folded flat.
Exposed wing may be factory finished in white color.
2.03 JOINTING SYSTEM
A. Provide a jointing system, including reinforcing tape and compound, designed as a
system to be used together and as recommended for this use by the manufacturer of the
gypsum wallboard approved for use on the Work.
B. Jointing compound may be used for finishing if so recommended by its manufacturer.
2.04 FASTENING DEVICES
A. For fastening gypsum wallboard in place on metal studs and metal channels, use flat-
head screws, shouldered, specially designed for use with power-driven tools, not less
than 1 I' long, with self-tapping threads and self-drilling points.
.-
B. For fastening gypsum wallboard in place on wood, use 3 1 mm (1 - 1 /4") type W bugle-
head screws, or use annular ring type nails complying with ASTM C5 14 and of the
length required by governmental agencies having jurisdiction.
2.05 ACCESS DOORS
A. In partitions and ceilings installed under this Section, provide doors where required for
access to mechanical installations and electrical installations.
B. Types:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Unless otherwise required, provide 600 mm x 600 mm (24" x 24") metal access
doors with concealed hinges to metal fiame, and with Allen key lock.
For piercing fire-rated surfaces, provide access doors having the same fire rating as
the surface being pierced.
For tile surfaces and toilet rooms, provide stainless steel access doors and fiames,
with satin finish.
For other installations, provide prime-coated steel access doors and frames for finish
painting to be performed at the job site under Section 09900 of these Specifications.
2.06 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Owner's
Designated Representative.
GYPSUM WALLBOARD SYSTEM
09260-3
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1.
2.
3.
Install the gypsum wallboard in accordance with the Drawings and with the separate
boards in moderate contact but not forced in place.
At internal and external corners, conceal the cut edges of the boards by the
overlapping covered edges of the abutting boards.
Stagger the boards so that corners of any four boards will not meet at a common
point except in vertical comers.
B. Ceilings:
1.
2.
Install the gypsum wallboard to ceilings with the long dimension of the wallboard at
right angles to the supporting members.
Wallboard may be installed with the long dimension parallel to supporting members
that are spaced 16" on centers when attachment members are provided at end joints.
c. Walls:
1.
2.
Install the gypsum wallboard to studs at right angles to the furring or framing
members.
Make end joints, where required, over framing or furring members.
D. Attaching:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Drive the specified screws with clutch-controlled power screwdrivers, spacing the
screws 300 mm (1 2") on center at ceilings and 400 mm (1 6") on centers at walls.
Where fiwning members are spaced 600 mm (24") apart on walls, space screws 300
mm (12") on centers.
Attach double layers in accordance with the pertinent codes and the manufacturer's
recommendations as approved by the Owner's Designated Representative.
Attach to wood as required by governmental agencies having jurisdiction.
E. Access doors:
1.
2.
By careful coordination with the Drawings and with the trades involved, install the
specified access doors where required.
Anchor fmly into position, and align properly to achieve an installation flush with
the finished surface.
3.03 JOINT TREATMENT
A. General:
GYPSUM WALLBOARD SYSTEM
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
09 2 60-4
1.
2.
Inspect areas to be joint treated, verifying that the gypsum wallboard fits snugly
against supporting framework.
In areas where joint treatment and compound finishing will be performed, maintain a
temperatye of not less than 12.8 degrees C (55 degrees F) for 24 hours prior to
commencing the treatment, and until joint and finishing compounds have dried.
Apply the joint treatment and finishing compound by machine or hand tool.
Provide a minimum drying time of 24 hours between coats, with additional drying
time in poorly ventilated areas.
3.
4.
B. Embedding compounds:
1.
2.
Apply to gypsum wallboard joints and fastener heads in a thin uniform layer.
Spread the compound not less than 75 mm (3") wide at joints, center the reinforcing
tape in the joint, and embed the tape in the compound; then spread a thin layer of
compound over the tape.
After this treatment has dried, apply a second coat of embedding compound to joints
and fastener heads, spreading in a thin uniform coat to not less than 150 mm (6")
wide at joints, and feather edged.
Sandpaper between coats as required.
When thoroughly dry, sandpaper to eliminate ridges and high points.
3.
4.
5.
C. Finishing compounds:
1.
2.
3.
After embedding compound is thoroughly dry and has been completely sanded,
apply a coat of finishing compound to joints and fastener heads.
Feather the finishing compound to not less than 300 mm (12") wide.
When thoroughly dry, sandpaper to obtain a uniformly smooth surface, taking care
to not scuff the paper surface of the wallboard.
3.04 CORNER TREATMENT
A. Internal comers: Treat as specified for joints, except fold the reinforcing tape lengthwise
through the middle and fit neatly into the corner.
B. External comers:
1.
2.
3.
Install the specified corner bead, fitting neatly over the comer and securing with the
same type fasteners used for installing the wallboard.
Space the fasteners approximately 150 mm (6") on centers, and drive through the
wallboard into the fiaming or furring member.
After the comer bead has been secured into position, treat the corner with joint
compo'und and reinforcing tape as specified for joints, feathering the joint compound
out from 200 mm to 250 mm (8" to 10") on each side of the corner.
3.5 OTHER METAL TRIM
A. General:
1.
2.
The Drawings do not purport to show all locations and requirements for metal trim.
Carefully study the Drawings and the installation, and provide all metal trim
normally recommended by the manufacturer of the gypsum wallboard approved for
GYPSUM WALLBOARD SYSTEM
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
09260-5
use in this Work.
3.06 REQUIRED FINISHES
A. Provide the levels of finish described below in the area or areas where such level is
called for on the Drawings.
B. Finish for typical walls: Level 3
At all joints and interior angles, apply tape embedded in joint compound, and apply
two separate coats of joint compound over all joints, angles, fastener heads, and
accessories;
Leave surfaces smooth and free of tool marks and ridges;
Apply a thin skim coat of joint compound over the entire surface.
Leave surfaces smooth and free of tool marks and ridges;
C. Finish for all Gyp Board surfaces to be painted.
D. Finish all drywall surfaces with a medium knock-down finish.
3.07 CLEANING UP
A. In addition to other requirements for cleaning, use necessary care to prevent scattering
gypsum wallboard scraps and dust, and to prevent tracking gypsum and joint finishing
compound onto floor surfaces.
B. At completion of each segment of installation in a room or space, promptly pick up and
remove from the working area all scrap, debris, and surplus material of this Section
END OF SECTION
GYPSUM WALLBOARD SYSTEM
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
09260-6
SECTION 09310
CERAMIC TILE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Provide ceramic tile where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed
for a complete and proper installation
B. Related work:
1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to,
Contract Documents, Special Provisions and Sections in Division 1 of these
Specifications
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of the Contract Documents and Supplemental
Provisions.
B. Product data: Within 15 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's
Notice to Proceed, submit:
1.
2.
3.
Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section;
Manufacturers' specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements;
Samples of each type, class, and color of ceramic tile required.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods
needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of the Contract Documents and Supplemental
Provisions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 Manufacturers:
A. Ceramic Tile Materials - colors to be chosen from available colors and patterns from the
CERAMIC TILE
093 10- 1
Project No. 3688 0 1 Jan 03
specified manufacturer:
1. Dal Tile: Dal Tile 7834 Hawn Freeway, Dallas Texas 75217,800-933-TILE or equal
when approved in advance by the Owner's Designated Representative.
2.02 SETTING MATERIALS
A. Comply with pertinent recommendations contained in the Tile Council of America
"Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation."
B. Organic adhesive:
1.
2.
Provide a prepared organic material, ready to use with no firher addition of liquid
or powder, which cures or sets by evaporation.
Comply with ANSI A1 36.1, using type I.
2.03 GROUT
A. Comply with pertinent recommendations contained in the Tile Council of America
"Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" in colors selected by the Owner's Designated
Representative fiom standard colors available fiom the approved manufacturers.
B. Mastic grout:
1. Provide a commercially prepared grouting composition designed to be used directly
from the container, not requiring damp curing, and with high flexibility and stain
resistance.
Provide a product licensed by the Tile Council of America, and bearing that license
symbol.
2.
2.02 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Owner's
Designated Representative.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A, Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Comply with ANSI A108.1, ANSI A1 08.2, and the "Handbook for Ceramic Tile
Installation" of the Tile Council of America, except as otherwise directed by the
Owner's Designated Representative or specified herein.
CERAMIC TILE
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
093 10-2
_-
2.
3.
Maintain minimum temperature limits and installation practices recommended by
materials manufacturers.
Do not install tile floors over membrane until the membrane has been tested and
accepted.
B. Limits of tile:
1.
2.
Extend tile into recesses and under equipment and fixtures to form a complete
covering without interruptions.
Terminate tile neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners, without disruption of
pattern or joint alignment.
C. Joining pattern:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5. Provide uniform joint widths.
Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or directed by the
Owner's Designated Representative.
Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, trim, and walls are the same size.
Layout tile work, and center the tile fields both directions in each space or on each
wall area.
Adjust to minimize tile cutting.
D. Provide expansion and control joints where recommended by the "Handbook for
Ceramic Tile Installation" of the Tile Council of America, sealing in accordance with
Section 07920 of these Specifications.
E. Cleaning:
1.
2.
3.
Upon completion of placing and grouting, clean the work of this Section in
accordance with recommendations of the manufacturers of the materials used.
Protect metal surfaces, cast iron, and vitreous items from effects of acid cleaning.
Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning.
F. Provide tile surfaces clean and free from cracked, broken, chipped, unbonded, and
otherwise defective units.
G. Provide required protection of tile surfaces to prevent damage and wear prior to
acceptance of the Work by the Owner.
H. Installation Methods:
1.
2.
Ceramic Tile Floor: Thinset - TCA F 102-2K
All Wainscots: Thinset - TCA W223-2K
1. Provide standard accessory shapes as required.
END OF SECTION
CERAMIC TILE
093 10-3
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
SECTION 09900
PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Paint and finish exposed surfaces using the combination of materials listed on Painting
Schedule in Part 3 of this Section, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and
proper installation. ere to he ..
B. Related work:
1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to,
Contract Documents, Special Provisions and Sections in Division 1 of these
Specifications.
Priming or priming and finishing of certain surfaces may be specified to be factory-
performed or installer-performed under pertinent other Sections.
2.
C. Work not included:
1. Unless otherwise indicated, painting is not required on surfaces in concealed areas
and inaccessible areas such as furred spaces, foundation spaces, utility tunnels, pipe
spaces, and duct shafts.
Metal surfaces of anodized aluminum, stainless steel, chromium plate, copper,
bronze, and similar finished materials will not require painting under this Section
except as may be so specified.
Do not paint moving parts of operating units; mechanical or electrical parts such as
valve operators; linkages; sensing devices; and motor shafts, unless otherwise
indicated.
Do not paint over required labels or equipment identification, performance rating,
name, or nomenclature plates.
Do not paint concrete which has been sandblasted.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D. Definitions:
1. "Paint," as used herein, means coating systems materials including primers,
emulsions, epoxy, enamels, sealers, fillers, and other applied materials whether used
as prime, intermediate, or finish coats.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of the Contract Documents and Supplemental
Provisions.
PAINTING
09900-1
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
B. Product data: Within 35 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's
Notice to Proceed, submit:
1.
2.
Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section;
Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements.
C. Samples:
1. Following the selection of colors and glosses by the Owner's Designated
Representative, submit Samples for the Owner's Designated Representative's
review.
a.
b.
c.
Provide three Samples of each color and each gloss for each material on which
the finish is specified to be applied.
Except as otherwise directed by the Owner's Designated Representative, make
Samples approximately 200 mm x 250 mm (8'' x 10") in size.
If so directed by the Owner's Designated Representative, submit Samples
during progress of the Work in the form of actual application of the approved
materials on actual surfaces to be painted.
Revise and resubmit each Sample as requested until the required gloss, color, and
texture is achieved. Such Samples, when approved, will become standards of color
and finish for accepting or rejecting the work of this Section.
Do not commence finish painting until approved Samples are on file at the job site.
2.
3.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods
needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
1.
2.
B. Paint coordination:
Provide finish coats which are compatible with the prime coats actually used.
Review other Sections of these Specifications as required, verifying the prime coats
to be used and assuring compatibility of the total coating system for the various
substrata.
Upon request, furnish information on the characteristics of the specific finish
materials to assure that compatible prime coats are used.
Provide barrier coats over noncompatible primers, or remove the primer and reprime
as required.
Notify the Owner's Designated Representative in writing of anticipated problems in
using the specified coating systems over prime-coatings supplied under other
Sections.
3.
4.
5.
1.04 DELMRY, STOFUGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of the Contract Documents and Supplemental.
Provisions
1.05 SITE CONDITIONS
PAINTING
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
09900-2
A. Do not apply solvent-thinned paints when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and
the surrounding air temperatures are below 7.2 degrees C (45 degrees F), unless
otherwise permitted by the manufacturers’ printed instructions as approved by the
Owner’s Designated Representative.
B. Weather conditions:
1. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds
85%; or to damp or wet surfaces, unless otherwise permitted by the manufacturers’
printed instructions as approved by the Owner’s Designated Representative.
Applications may be continued during inclement weather only within the
temperature limits specified by the paint manufacturer as being suitable for use
during application and drying periods.
2.
1.06 MAINTENANCE
A. Upon completion of the work of this Section, deliver to the Owner an extra stock
equaling 10% of each color, type, and gloss of paint used in the Work, tightly sealing
each container, and clearly labeling with contents and location where used.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PAINT MATERIALS
A. Painting Materials.
B. Acceptable materials:
1. The Painting Schedule in Part 3 of this Section is based, in general, on products of
the ICI-Sinclair Paint Company except for Ferrous Metals & Galvanized Metals -
use materials in table below as manufactured by TNEMEC Company, Inc. -
Manhattan Beach CA Phone No. 3 10-643-5 191.
Equal products of other manufacturers approved in advance by the Owner’s
Designated Representative, may be substituted in accordance with provisions of the
Contract.
Where products are proposed other than those specified by name and number in the
Painting Schedule, provide under the product data submittal required by Article 1.2
of this Section a new painting schedule compiled in the same format used for the
Painting Schedule included in this Section.
2.
3.
B. Undercoats and thinners:
1.
2.
2.
Provide undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coat.
Use only the thinners recommended by the paint manufacturer, and use only to the
recommended limits.
Insofar as practicable, use undercoat, finish coat, and thinner material as parts of a
unified system of paint finish.
2.02 COLOR SCHEDULES
PAINTING
0 9 9 0 0 - 3
Project No. 3688 0 1 Jan 03
A.
B.
2.03
A.
B.
2.04
A.
The Owner’s Designated Representative will prepare a color schedule with samples for
guidance in painting.
The Owner’s Designated Representative may select, allocate, and vary colors on different
surfaces throughout the Work, subject to the following.
1. Exterior work: A maximum of five different colors will be used, with variations for
trim, doors, miscellaneous work, and metal work.
2. Interior work: A maximum of 15 different pigmented colors will be used, with
variations for trim and wall surfaces and wainscots.
3. Dark tones: A maximum of ten dark tones will be used as accent colors for interior.
APPLICATION EQUIPMENT
For application of the approved paint, use only such equipment as is recommended for
application of the particular paint by the manufacturer of the particular paint, and as
approved by the Owner’s Designated Representative.
Prior to use of application equipment, verify that the proposed equipment is actually
compatible with the material to be applied, and that integrity of the finish will not be
jeopardized by use of the proposed equipment.
OTHER MATERIALS
Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Owner’s
Designated Representative.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.02 MATERIALS PREPARATION
A. General:
1.
2.
3.
Mix and prepare paint materials in strict accordance with the manufacturers’
recommendations as approved by the Owner’s Designated Representative.
When materials are not in use, store in tightly covered containers.
Maintain containers used in storage, mixing, and application of paint in a clean
condition, free from foreign materials and residue.
B. Stirring:
1. Stir materials before application, producing a mixture of uniform density.
PAINTING
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
09900-4
2. Do not stir into the material any film which may form on the surface, but remove the
film and, if necessary, strain the material before using.
3.03 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in strict accordance with the paint
manufacturers’ recommendations as approved by the Owner’s Designated
Representative.
Remove removable items which are in place and are not scheduled to receive paint
finish; or provide surface applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting
operations.
Following completion of painting in each space or area, reinstall the removed items
by using workmen who are skilled in the necessary trades.
Clean each surface to be painted prior to applying paint or surface treatment.
Remove oil and grease with clean cloths and cleaning solvent of low toxicity and
flash point in excess of 200 degrees F, prior to start of mechanical cleaning.
Schedule the cleaning and painting so that dust and other contaminants from the
cleaning process will not fall onto wet newly painted surfaces.
B. Preparation of wood surfaces:
1.
2.
Clean wood surfaces until free from dirt, oil, and other foreign substance.
Smooth finished wood surfaces exposed to view, using the proper sandpaper.
Where so required, use varying degrees of coarseness in sandpaper to produce a
uniformly smooth and unmarred wood surface.
Unless specifically approved by the Owner’s Designated Representative, do not
proceed with painting of wood surfaces until the moisture content of the wood is
12% or less as measured by a moisture meter approved by the Owner’s Designated
Representative.
4.
C. Preparation of metal surfaces:
1.
2.
Thoroughly clean surfaces until free from dirt, oil, and grease.
On galvanized surfaces, use solvent for the initial cleaning, and then treat the surface
thoroughly with phosphoric acid etch. Remove etching solution completely before
proceeding.
Allow to dry thoroughly before application of paint. 3.
3.04 PAINT APPLICATION
A. General:
1.
2.
Touchup shop-applied prime coats which have been damaged, and touchup bare
areas prior to start of finish coats application.
Slightly vary the color of succeeding coats.
a.
b.
Do not apply additional coats until the completed coat has been inspected and
approved.
Only the inspected and approved coats of paint will be considered in
determining the number of coats applied.
PAINTING
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
09900-5
3.
4.
Sand and dust between coats to remove defects visible to the unaided eye from a
distance of five feet.
On removable panels and hinged panels, paint the back sides to match the exposed
sides.
B. Drying:
1.
2.
Allow sufficient drying time between coats, modifying the period as recommended
by the material manufacturer to suit adverse weather conditions.
Consider oil-base and oleo-resinous solvent-type paint as dry for recoating when the
paint feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate pressure of the
thumb, and when the application of another coat of paint does not cause lifting or
loss of adhesion of the undercoat.
C. Brush applications:
1.
2.
Brush out and work the brush coats onto the surface in an even film.
Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, and other
surface imperfections will not be acceptable.
D. Spray application:
1. Except as specifically otherwise approved by the Owner's Designated
Representative, confine spray application to metal fi-amework and similar surfaces
where hand brush work would be inferior.
Where spray application is used, apply each coat to provide the hiding equivalent of
brush coats.
Do not double back with spray equipment to build up film thickness of two coats in
one pass.
2.
3.
E. For completed work, match the approved Samples as to texture, color, and coverage.
Remove, refinish, or repaint work not in compliance with the specified requirements.
F. Miscellaneous surfaces and procedures:
1. Exposed mechanical items:
a. Finish electric panels, access doors, conduits, pipes, ducts, grilles, registers,
vents, and items of similar nature to match the adjacent wall and ceiling
surfaces, or as directed.
Paint visible duct surfaces behind vents, registers, and grilles flat black.
Wash metal with solvent, prime, and apply two coats of alkyd enamel.
Apply one coat of latex paint on insulation which has been sized or primed
under other Sections; apply two coats on such surfaces when unprepared.
Match color of adjacent surfaces.
Remove band before painting, and replace after painting.
3. Hardware:
, a. Paint prime coated hardware to match adjacent surfaces;
b.
c.
Exposed pipe and duct insulation:
a.
b.
c.
2.
b. Paint metal portions of head seals, jamb seals, and astragal seals to match the
color of the door frame unless otherwise directed by the Owner's Designated
Representative.
PAINTING
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
09900-6
4. Wet areas:
a.
b.
c.
Exposed vents: Apply two coats of heat-resistant paint approved by the Owner's
Designated Representative.
In toilet rooms and contiguous areas, add an approved fungicide to paints.
For oil base paints, use 1% phenol mercuric or 4% tetrachlorophenol.
For water emulsion and glue size surfaces, use 4% sodium tetrachlorophenate.
5. ' Interior: Use "stipple" finish where enamel is specified.
6.
2.05 PAINT PRODUCT OUTLINE
A. Provide the following paint finishes.
B. Exterior metal, ferrous:
1. First coat:
applied
2. Second coat:
3. Third coat:
Series 90-97 Tneme - Zinc @ 2.5-3.5 mils DFT - shop
Series 69 Epoxoline I1 @ 5-6 Mils DFT
Series 75 Endura-Shield - semi gloss @ 2.0-5.0
mils DFT
C. Exterior metal, galvanized:
1. TouchUp:
2. Second coat:
3. Third coat:
Series 90-97 Tneme - Zinc @ 2.5-3.5 mils DFT
Series 69 Epoxoline I1 @ 3-5 Mils DFT
Series 75 Endura-Shield - semi gloss @ 2.0-5.0
mils DFT
D. Exterior wood:
1. First coat: Exterior wood primer #289
2. Second coat Stuc-0-Life #1300
3. Third coat: Stuc-0-Life #1300
E. Exterior concrete unit masonry:
1. First coat:
2. Second coat:
F. Interior flat wall paint ("F"):
1. On concrete, use:
a. First coat:
b. Second coat:
c. Third coat:
a. First coat:
b. Second coat:
c. Thirdcoat:
2. On gypsum drywall, use:
Vinyl block primer #lo10
Stuc-0-Life # 13 00
Pigmented sealer #890
Sinwall vinyl latex #1700
Sinwall vinyl latex #1700
Pigmented PVA sealer #1770
Sinwall vinyl latex # 1700
Sinwall vinyl latex #1700
G. Interior eggshell enamel ("ESE"): (Bathroom and Janitor Rooms)
1. On concrete, use:
a. First coat: Pigmented sealer #890
PAINTING
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
09900-7
b. Second coat: Sinco prime undercoater #975
c. Third coat: Porcelain eggshell enamel #2200
a. First coat: Pigmented PVA sealer #1770
b. Second coat: Sinco prime undercoater #975
c. Third coat: Porcelain eggshell enamel #2200
2. On gypsum drywall, use:
END OF SECTION
PAINTING
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
09900-8
SECTION 10400
IDENTIFYING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAZ
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Provide identieing devices where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as
needed for a complete and proper installation including, but not necessarily limited to:
1. Door signs (ADA Compliance)
B. Related work:
1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to,
Contract Documents, Special Provisions and Sections in Division 1 of these
Specifications.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of the Contract Documents and Supplemental
Provisions.
B. Product data: Within 60 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's
Notice to Proceed, submit:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section;
Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements;
Details of installation and anchorage sufficient to enable proper interface of the
work of this Section with the work of other trades.
Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the
Owner's Designated Representative, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting
actual installation procedures used on the Work.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods
needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of the Contract Documents and Supplemental
Provisions.
IDENTIFYING DEVICES
104.00- 1
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Design is based on use of standard products manufactured by AS1 Sign Systems,
5849 Uplander Way, Culver City, CA 90230 California 90261.
2. Provide the products upon which design is based, or provide equal products of
another manufacturer approved in advance by the Owner’s Designated
Representative.
2.02 BUILDING IDENTIFICATION (NOT USED)
2.03 BUILDING DIRECTORY (NOT USED)
2.04 BATHROOM SIGNAGE
A. Provide Toilet Room signs complying with pertinent requirements of Title 24 of the
California Administrative code. Colors to be determined by Owner’s Designated
Representative.
1.
2.
Door plaques: 12” triangle and 12” circle, color and contrast to be distinctly
different from the color and contrast of the door.
Wall-Mounted Sign, 6” Wide with (1) 6” Graphic Panel with accessibility
pictogram, (1) 2-1/2” ADA-Ready Room ID.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the manufacturers’
recommendations as approved by the Owner’s Designated Representative, using only the
approved mounting materials, and locating all components firmly into position, level and
plumb.
END OF SECTION
IDENTIFYING DEVICES
10400-2
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
1.01
A.
B.
1.02
A.
1.03
A.
1 - tiJLNE;KAL
SECTION 10800
TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES
SUMMARY
Provide toilet room accessories where indicated on the Drawings, as specified herein,
and as needed for a complete and proper installation.
Related work:
1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to,
Contract Documents, Special Provisions and Sections in Division 1 of these
Specifications
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods
needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Comply with pertinent provisions of the Contract Documents and Supplemental
Provisions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
2.02
A.
2.03
A.
TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES
Provide the products specified on the Drawings. These components are proprietarily
specified - equals will not be considered.
MIRRORS
At each lav, provide 6 mm (1/4") polished plate glass or float glass mirrors, with clear
coated aluminum frames, as sized on the drawings.
OTHER MATERIALS
Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Owner's
Designated Representative.
TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES
10800-1
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine the areas and conditions unc,cr which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in the
work of those trades for interface with the work of this Section.
B. Install each item in its proper location, firmly anchored into position, level and plumb,
and in accordance with the manufxturer's recommendations.
END OF SECTION
TOILET ROOM ACCESSONES
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
10800-2
,-
SECTION 15405
PLUMBING (DESIGN BUILD)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide the Design and the Design Drawings (Construction Drawings), secure all
approvals fiom governing agencies, obtain Construction Permit, modi@, fabricate,
install, and secure required construction sign-off approvals for a complete Plumbing
system where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete
and proper installation in accordance with pertinent requirements of the Uniform
Plumbing Code, latest edition and all governmental agencies having jurisdiction.
B. Related work:
1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to,
Contract Documents, Special Provisions and Sections in Division 1 of these
Specifications.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 0 1340.
B. Product data: Within 35 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's
Notice to Proceed, submit:
1.
2.
3.
Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section;
Manufacturer's specifications, catalog cuts, and other data needed to prove
compliance with the specified requirements;
Shop Drawings and other data as required to indicate method of installing and
attaching equipment, except where such details are fully shown on the Drawings.
C. Sterilization certificate:
1. Upon completion of water line sterilization, deliver to the Architect two copies of an
acceptable "Certificate of Performance" for that activity.
D. Cathodic protection:
1. Upon completion of the work of this Section, deliver to the Architect sufficient data
to prove that wrapping of steel piping has been tested and meets the specified
requirements.
Show date of inspection, voltages used, and name and address of the inspector. 2.
E. Manuals:
PLUMBING
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
15405 - 1
1. Upon completion of the work of this Section, deliver to the Architect two copies of
an operation and maintenance manual compiled in accordance with the provisions of
Section 0 1730 of these Specifications.
Include within each manual a copy of the Project Record Documents showing all
work of this Section.
2.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods
needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. Codes and regulations:
1.
2.
In addition to complying with the specified requirements, comply with pertinent
regulations of governmental agencies having jurisdiction.
In the event of conflict between or among specified requirements and pertinent
regulations, the more stringent requirement will govern when so directed by the
Architect.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01620.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOTE: THE PRODUCTS & MATERIALS SPECIFIED BELOW ARE TO
ESTABLSH A LEVEL OF ACCEPTABILITY FOR ITEMS THAT WILL COMPRISE THE REVISED/NEW
HVAC SYSTEMS NECESSARY FOR THIS PROJECT - ALL ITEMS SPECIFIED BELOW MAY OR MAY
NOT BE USED IN YOUR DESIGN - IF ITEMS ARE NOT NECESSARY TO YOUR DESIGN, THEY ARE
OBVIOUSLY NOT A REQUIREMENT FOR THIS PROJECT)
2.1 PIPE SCHEDULE
A. Drain, waste, and vent system:
1. For sanitary work below the floor and outside underground:
a. Provide service weight cast iron pipe and fittings.
b. Soil lines 1.5 m (5'-0") or more away from the structures may be vitrified clay
c. pipe with first grade markings, unless otherwise restricted by governmental
agencies having jurisdiction.
Sizes 100 mm (4") and larger: Provide service weight cast iron pipe and
fittings;
Waste and vent piping 75 mm (3") and smaller installed above ground: Provide
standard weight galvanized steel pipe with Durham fittings for waste lines and
standard black cast iron fittings for vent lines, or provide service weight cast
iron pipe and fittings.
2. Above ground:
a.
b.
PLUMBING
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
15405 - 2
B. Water system (domestic piping):
1.
2.
3.
Above ground, provide Type "L" copper with sweated connections;
Below ground, provide Type "K" copper with sweated connections;
Sizes 100 mm (4") and larger below ground, and where noted on the Drawings:
a.
b.
Provide Class 200 "Transite" with step-machined ends and rubber gasket rings.
Also provide cement-lined cast iron fittings modified for use with rubber rings.
c. Provide thrust blocks.
d. Where used below grade, provide tracing wire as recommended by the pipe
manufacturer.
C. Gas piping:
1. Provide Schedule 40 black steel pipe with malleable iron screwed fittings; except
provide galvanized where pipe or fittings are exposed to the weather.
D. Indirect drains:
1.
2.
3.
Provide galvanized Schedule 40 steel pipe with galvanized malleable iron fittings; or
Provide Type "L" copper with sweated connections.
Provide lines full sizes of the equipment connections.
E. Roof drainage piping:
1.
2.
3.
Above grade, provide service weight cast iron pipe and fittings; or provide
galvanized steel pipe and fittings.
Below grade, provide service weight cast iron pipe and fittings.
Where necessary because of space limitations, leaders may be of rectangular cast
iron of equivalent area.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Cast iron soil pipe and fittings;
1. Provide service weight cast iron conforming to ASTM A72, or provide hubless type.
B. Lead:
1. Provide new pig lead complying with ASTM B29.
C. Hemp packing:
1. Provide impregnated jute, manufactured for calking soil pipe and fittings.
D. Galvanized or black steel pipe:
1. Provide standard weight complying with ASTM A12.
E. Fittings:
1.
2.
For copper lines, provide copper fittings.
For steel lines, provide service weight cast iron type fittings.
F. Unions:
PLUMBING
15405 - 3
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
1.
2.
For copper lines, provide copper fittings.
For connections in iron pipe lines 63 mm (2-1/2") and smaller, provide ground joint
brass-to-iron fittings.
-.
G. Victaulic fittings may be used where permitted by code.
2.3 VALVES
A. Gate valves: Provide solid wedge disc, rising stem, 200# WOG; non-rising stem valves
may be used only where there is insufficient clearance.
1.
2.
3.
4.
75 mm (3") and smaller, rising stem: Provide Crane #428, bronze, screwed.
75 mm (3") and smaller, non-rising stem: Provide Crane #438, bronze, screwed.
100 mm (4") and larger: Provide Crane #465-1/2, IBBM, flanged, non-rising stem.
Valves on asbestos-cement lines: Provide "Ring-Tite" hubs and Crane #462.
B. Globe valves: Provide replaceable composition disc suitable for 93 degrees C (200
degree F) water.
1.
2.
50 mm (2") and smaller: Provide Crane #7, bronze, screwed.
63 mm (2-1/2") and larger: Provide Crane #359, iron body, flanged, 200# WOG.
C. Gascocks:
1.
2.
50 mrn (2") and smaller: Provide 250#, bronze, screwed, square head, 125#.
63 mm (2-1/29 and larger: Provide Nordstrom #142 or #143.
D. Check valves:
1.
2.
75 mm (3") and smaller: Provide Crane #37, bronze, screwed, Y-pattern, 200#
WOG, swing check type.
100 mm (4") and larger: Provide Crane #373, IBBM, flanged, 200# WOG.
E. Strainers: Provide Y-pattern, 200# WOG, 20 mesh monel screen:
1.
2.
75 mm (3") and smaller: Provide Crane #988-1/2, screwed.
100 mm (4") and larger: Provide Crane #989-1/2, flanged.
F. Pressure regulators:
1.
2.
Provide Mueller H-9000, or Wilkins series 500, all bronze.
Install with brass strainer upstream of regulator.
G. Partition stop valves: Provide Chicago Faucet #1771, loose key type.
H. Balancing cocks: Provide DeZurick #400.
2.4 FLASHING
A. Where pipes of this Section pass through the roof, flash with Semco #1100-4 seamless
1.8 kg (4 lb) flashing, with steel reinforced "Vari-Pitch" boot and cast iron counter-
flashing sleeve.
PLUMBING
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
15405 - 4
- 2.5 PIPE HANGERS
A. Water piping:
1.
2. Provide Semco "trisolators."
Provide Fee and Mason #212 split ring hangers with supporting rods.
B. Soil and waste piping:
1.
2.
Provide Fee and Mason #2 12 adjustable ring hangers with supporting rods.
Use Fee and Mason #241 riser clamps at each floor and as required.
C. Gas piping:
1. Provide Fee and Mason #212 split ring hangers with supporting rods.
2.6 CLEANOUTS
A. Exterior:
1. Provide Smith #4253 or Josam #8860, with XH cast iron top in concrete areas.
B. Floors:
1.
2.
3.
Provide Smith #4023 or Josam #8330 with round nickelbronze top in finished room
floors.
Provide Smith #4223 or Josam #8090-CAL with round cast iron top in unfinished
room floors.
Provide "flush-with-floor" type cleanouts, with adjustable watertight covers and
integral anchoring flange with clamping collar where waterproofing membrane is
used.
C. Finished walls:
1. Provide Smith #4532 or Josam #8790-4 with round chrome plated or stainless steel
access plate and screw.
D. Provide cleanout plugs of extra heavy bronze.
2.7 ACCESS BOXES
A. Walls:
1.
2.
Provide Smith #4730 or Josam #8650 with polished chrome plate face in tile walls.
Provide Smith #4760-AKL, or #4765-AKL, or Josam #SLA or #SLB, with
bonderized prime-coated steel face and with Allen lock in walls of other frnished
rooms.
Provide Acorn #82 1 1 -3-AKL or Josam #SLA bonderized prime-coated steel face
with Allen lock.
B. Ceilings:
1.
.- C. Floors:
PLUMBING
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
15405 - 5
1.
2.
Provide Smith #4910 or Josam #8630-5 with XH plain aluminum or nickel-bronze
non-skid top.
Provide Smith #4920 for floors covered with vinyl reinforced or pure vinyl tile.
D. Yardboxes:
1. Provide Brooks 36 HF or Frazer #2 cast concrete boxes with cast iron rim and
hinged self-closing cast iron lid marked GAS SHUTOFF or WATER, size 300 mm
x 450 mm x 300 mm (12" x 18" x 12").
Set flush with finished grades with 100 mm (4") thick concrete pad under perimeter
(but not under interior) of box.
2.
2SPRESSURE GAGES AND THERMOMETERS
A. Provide Marsh Quality Gages with 1 13 mm (4-1/2") dial, gage cock, in type required.
For pump suction, provide compound type.
B. Provide Trerice 225 mm (9") BX series thermometers, straight, angle, or oblique as
required, equipped w$h separable sockets and well. Provide extension necks as required
on insulated line.
C. Arrange thermometers for easy reading from the floor.
2.9 TRAPS
A. For lavatories and sinks, except service sinks, provide Los Angeles pattern cast brass
traps with brass nuts.
2.10 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS
A. Provide Smith #5000 series or Josam #1585, stainless steel.
2.11 HANDICAPPED INSULATION
A. Where shown on the Drawings or required by governmental agencies having jurisdiction,
at lavatories for handicapped persons provide Johns-Manville "Aerotube" insulation,
with paint coating, on hot water supply, tailpiece, and trap.
2.12 FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT
A. Water closets (flush valve) Refer to Drawings for Specifications
B. Lavatory L-1 Refer to Drawings for Specifications.
C. Service sink SS-1:
1. Provide white, acid resisting cast iron American Standard "Florwell" #7790.020,
size 500 mm x 700 mm (20'' x 28"), complete with #7953.198 hose and faucet with
vacuum breaker, #7721.038 strainer, and #7745.011 rim guard,
PLUMBING
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
15405 - 6
F. Floordrains:
1.
2.
3.
Provide in sizes shown on the Drawings, and connect to cast iron P-traps.
In toilet rooms and other finished rooms, provide Smith #2010-AHP or Josam
#300-36Ak, with 150 mm (6") round nickel-bronze heel-proof strainer.
In unfinished areas, provide Smith #2238 with extra heavy top grate and sediment
bucket.
G. Floor sinks:
1.
2.
3.
Provide Smith #3430 or Josam #9340 receptors in sizes shown on the Drawings.
Provide complete with cast iron acid resisting enameled free flow style top grate,
aluminum dome bottom strainer, cast iron P-trap, and integral anchoring flange.
For Units located on the roof, provide Smith #3960 or Josam #4180-SW2-1/2 with
water dam and cast iron dome bottom strainer.
H. Roofdrains:
1.
2.
3.
Provide Smith #lo10 or Josam #4100 cast iron roof drains complete with roof
clamping collar and removable dome strainers, in sizes shown on the Drawings.
Provide underdeck clamp, sump receivers, and extensions where required.
For ovefflow drains, provide Smith #lo80 or Josam #4110-SW2, with 50 mm (2")
water dam and complete as described for roof drains.
I. Hose bibbs:
1.
2. Provide vacuum breaker.
3.
4.
Provide Acorn #8 12 1,30 mm (3/4") sill cocks on building walls, and Acorn #8 126
in planters, all loose key style.
In finished spaces, provide chromium plated bibbs, and provide rough cast bronze
finish elsewhere.
Provide loose key stop ahead of each bibb.
J. Water heating system:
1. Provide the complete system as shown on the Drawings including heater, pumps,
controls, and supplementary accessories recommended by the manufacturer.
L. Hot water pump:
1. Provide Bell and Gossett, all bronze construction, in-line type, of the size and
capacity indicated on the Drawings.
2.13 BACKFLOW PREVENTEM
A. General:
1.
2.
Where installed in finished spaces, provide chromium plated finish.
For flush valves, provide diaphragm type, complete with approved vacuum breaker
provided by the manufacturer of the valve.
B. Acceptable products: Provide the following or equal products manufactured by Beeco:
1. Atmospheric type: Febco #710 A or G for hot and cold water;
PLUMBING
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
15405 - 7
2. Pressure type: Febco #770;
3. Reduced pressure type: Hersey.
2.14
A.
B.
2.15
A.
B.
2.16
A.
B.
2.17
A.
2.18
A.
GAS VENT LINES
General:
1. For combustion vent flues for gas-fired equipment, provide size required by the
manufacturer of the equipment and as required by governmental agencies having
jurisdiction.
Provide "Transite," "Metal-Bestos," or equal products of "Amerivent." 2.
Do not use single-wall metal vent line.
INSULATION
Insulate hot water lines with 15 mm (1 'I) thick Owens/Corning Fiberglas "25 ASJ/SSL."
Also see requirements specified for "handicapped insulation."
PIPE WRAPPING
Steel piping in concrete or underground:
1.
2.
3.
Wrap with "Hunt's Process HP-9."
Fittings and other joints: Wrap in the field with "Polyken" tape and primer.
Provide 50% overlap on tape weld rubber coating.
Testing:
1.
2.
3.
Secure inspection and testing by an independent agency approved in advance by the
Architect.
Note test report submission requirement specified elsewhere.
Demonstrate protection by passing 6000 V holiday test after wrapping.
SLEEVES
Where pipes pass through concrete, masonry, or stud walls, or pass through ceilings,
provide "Sperzel" rust-proof "Crete-Sleeve" of the size required.
OTHER MATERLQLS
Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS
PLUMBING
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
15405 - 8
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.2 PLUMBING SYSTEM LAYOUT
A. Lay out the plumbing system in caretid coordination with the Drawings, determining
proper elevations for all components of the system and using only the minimum number
of bends to produce a satisfactorily functioning system.
B. Follow the general layout shown on the Drawings in all cases except where other work
may interfere.
C. Lay out pipes to fall within partition, wall, or roof cavities, and to not require furring
other than as shown on the Drawings.
3.3 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING
A. Perform trenching and backfilling associated with the work of this Section in strict
accordance with the provisions of Section 02220 of these Specifications.
B. Cut bottom of trenches to grade. Make trenches 300 mm (12") wider than the greatest
dimension of the pipe.
C. Bedding and backfilling:
Install piping promptly after trenching. Keep trenches open as short a time as
practicable.
Under the building, install pipes on a 150 mm (6") bed of damp sand. Backfill to
bottom of slab with damp sand.
Outside the building, install underground piping on a 150 mm (6") bed of damp
sand. Backfill to within 300 mm (12") of finish grade with damp sand. Backfill
remainder with native soil.
Do not backfill until installation has been approved and until Project Record
Documents have been properly annotated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF PIPING AND EQUIPMENT, GENERAL
A. General:
1.
2.
3.
Proceed as rapidly as the building construction will permit.
Thoroughly clean items before installation. Cap pipe openings to exclude dirt until
fixtures are installed and final connections have been made.
Cut pipe accurately, and work into place without springing or forcing, properly
clearing windows, doors, and other openings. Excessive cutting or other weakening
of the building will not be permitted.
Show no tool marks or threads on exposed plated, polished, or enameled
connections from fixtures. Tape all finished surfaces to prevent damage during
construction.
4.
PLUMBING
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
15405 - 9
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Make changes in directions with fittings; make changes in main sizes with eccentric
reducing fittings. Unless otherwise noted, install water supply and return piping
with straight side of eccentric fittings at top of the pipe.
Run horizontal sanitary and storm drainage piping at a uniform grade of 6 mm per
300 mm (1/4" per ft), unless otherwise noted. Run horizontal water piping with an
adequate pitch upwards in direction of flow to allow complete drainage.
Provide sufficient swing joint, ball joints, expansion loops, and devices necessary
for a flexible piping system, whether or not shown on the Drawings.
Support piping independently at pumps, coils, tanks, and similar locations, so that
weight of pipe will not be supported by the equipment.
Pipe the drains from pump glands, drip pans, relief valves, air vents, and similar
locations, to spill over an open sight drain, floor drain, or other acceptable discharge
point, and terminate with a plain end unthreaded pipe 150 mm (6") above the drain.
Securely bolt all equipment, isolators, hangers, and similar items in place.
Support each item independently from other pipes. Do not use wire for hanging or
strapping pipes.
Provide complete dielectric isolation between ferrous and non-ferrous metals.
Provide union and shut off valves suitably located to facilitate maintenance and
removal of equipment and apparatus.
B. Equipment access:
1. Install piping, equipment, and accessories to permit access for maintenance.
Relocate items as necessary to provide such access, and without additional cost to
the Owner.
Provide access doors where valves, motors, or equipment requiring access for
maintenance are located in walls or chases or above ceilings. Coordinate location of
access doors with other trades as required.
2.
3.5PIPE JOINTS
A. Copper tubing:
Cut square, remove burrs, and clean inside of female filling to a bright finish.
a.
b.
Provide dielectric Unions at points of connection of copper tubing to ferrous piping
and equipment.
For joining copper tubing, use:
a.
b.
c. Underground: "Sil-fos" brazing.
1.
Apply solder flux with brush to tubing.
Remove internal parts of solder-end valves prior to soldering.
2.
3.
Water piping 75 mm (3") and smaller: 95-5 solder;
Water piping larger than 75 mm (3"): "Sil-fos" brazing;
B. Screwed piping:
1. Deburr cuts.
a. Do not ream exceeding internal diameter of the pipe.
b. Thread to requirements of ANSI B2.1.
Use teflon tape on male thread prior to joining other services.
Use litharge and glycerin on joint prior to cleaning for air and oil piping.
PLUMBING
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
2.
3.
15405 - 10
.-
_-
C. Leakyjoints:
1. Remake with new material.
2.
3.
Remove leaking section andor fitting as directed.
Do not use thread cement or sealant to tighten joint.
3.6 PIPE SUPPORTS
A. Support suspended piping with clevis or trapeze hangers and rods.
B. Space hangers and support for horizontal steel pipes according to the following schedule:
Pipe size:
2.4 m (8'-0'')
38 mm to 75 mm (1-1/2" to 3"):
4" to 5":
Maximum spacing on centers: 3 1 mm (1 - 1 /47 and smaller:
3 m (lO'-O'')
4.2 m (1 4'-0'')
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
Space hangers and supports for horizontal copper tubing according to the following
schedule :
Tube size:
1.8 m (6'"'')
38 mm (1-1/2"): 2.1 m (7'"'')
50 mm (2"):
63 mm(2-1/2"): 2.7 m (9'-0")
75 mm (3") and larger: 3 m (10'-0")
Maximum spacing on centers: 25 mm (1 'I) and smaller:
2.4 m (8'"'')
Provide sway bracing on hangers longer than 450 mm (1 8"):
Support vertical piping with riser clamps secured to the piping and resting on the
building structure. Provide at each floor unless otherwise noted.
Provide insulation continuous through hangers and rollers. Protect insulation by
galvanized steel shields.
Arrange pipe supports to prevent excessive deflection, and to avoid excessive bending
stress.
Support piping from inserts or anchors in concrete slabs. Provide the inserts under this
Section and arrange for the placing under Section 03300 of these Specifications.
Hubless piping:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Provide hangers on the piping at each side of, and within 150 111111 (6") of, hubless
pipe coupling so the coupling will bear no weight.
Do not provide hangers on couplings.
Provide hangers adequate to maintain alignment and to prevent sagging of the pipe.
Make adequate provision to prevent shearing and twisting of the pipe and the joint.
PLUMBING
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
15405 - 1 1
3.7 SLEEVES AND OPENINGS
A. Provide sleeves for each pipe passing through walls, partitions, floors, roofs, and
ceilings.
1.
2.
Set pipe sleeves in place before concrete is placed.
For uninsulated pipe, provide sleeves two pipe sizes larger than the pipe passing
through, or provide a minimum of 1 3 mm (1 /2") clearance between inside and out-
side of the pipe.
For insulated pipe, provide sleeves of adequate size to accommodate the full
thickness of pipe covering, with clearance for packing and calking.
3.
B. Calk the space between sleeve and pipe or pipe covering, using a noncombustible,
permanently plastic, waterproof, non-staining compound which leaves a smooth finished
appearance, or pack with noncombustible asbestos cotton, rope, or fiberglass to within 13
mm (1/2") of both wall faces, and provide the waterproof compound described above.
C. Finish and escutcheons:
1.
2.
Smooth up rough edges around sleeves with plaster or spackling compound.
Provide 25 mm (1 'I) wide chrome or nickel plated escutcheons on all pipes exposed
to view where passing through walls, floors, partitions, ceilings, and similar
locations. a. Size the escutcheons to fit pipe and a covering. b. Hold
escutcheons in place with set screw.
3.8 CLEANOUTS
A. Secure the Architect's approval of locations for cleanouts in finished areas prior to
installation.
B. Provide cleanouts of same nominal size as the pipes they serve; except where cleanouts
are required in pipes 100 mm (4") and larger provide 100 mm (4") cleanouts.
C. Make cleanouts accessible. After pressure tests are made and approved, thoroughly
graphite the cleanout threads.
3.9 VALVES
A. Provide valves in water, air, and gas systems. Locate and arrange so as to give complete
regulation of apparatus, equipment, and fixtures.
B. Provide valves in at least the following locations:
1.
2.
3.
In branches and/or headers of water piping serving a group of fixtures.
On both sides of apparatus and equipment.
For shutoff of risers and branch mains.
PLUMBING
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
15405 - 12
4.
5.
For flushing and sterilizing the system.
Where shown on the Drawings.
C. Locate valves for easy accessibility and maintenance.
3.10 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS
A. Provide water hammer arrestors on hot water lines and cold water lines.
1.
2.
3.
Install in upright position at all quick closing valves, solenoids, isolated plumbing
fixtures, and supply headers at plumbing fixture groups.
Locate and size as specified or as shown on the Drawings and, where not shown,
locate in accordance with Plumbing and Drainage Institute Standard WH-201.
Install water hammer arrestors behind access panels.
B. Where fixtures are not protected by water hammer arrestors, provide 600 mm (24") high
air chambers on each water supply, properly sized and designed for maintenance and
drainage.
3.11 BACKFLOW PREVENTION
A. Protect plumbing fixtures, faucets with hose connections, and other equipment having
plumbing connection, against possible back-siphonage.
B. Arrange for testing of backflow devices as required by the governmental agencies having
jurisdiction.
3.12 CONCRETE
A. Provide concrete required for the work of this Section in strict accordance with pertinent
provisions of Section 03300 of these Specifications.
3.13 PLUMBING FIXTURE INSTALLATION
A. Installation:
1.
2.
3.
Set fixtures level and in proper alignment with respect to walls and floors, and with
fixtures equally spaced.
Provide supplies in proper alignment with fixtures and with each other.
Provide flush valves in alignment with the fixture, without vertical or horizontal
offsets.
B. Grout wall and floor mounted fixtures watertight where the fixtures are in contact with
walls and floors.
C. Calk deck-mounted trim at the time of assembly, including fixture and casework
mounted. Calk self-rimming sinks installed in casework.
3.14 DISINFECTION OF WATER SYSTEMS
PLUMBING
15405 - 13
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
A. Disinfect hot and cold water systems.
1.
2.
Perform disinfection under the Architect's observation. Notify the Architect at least
48 hours prior to start of the disinfection process.
Upon completion of disinfecting, secure and submit the Certificate of Performance
required under Article 1.2 of this Section, stating system capacity, disinfectant used,
time and rate of disinfectant applied, and resultant residuals in ppm at completion..
Use disinfectant method approved by the Architect. 3.
B. When disinfection operation is completed, and after final flushing, secure an analysis by
a laboratory approved by the Architect, based on water samples from the system,
showing test negative for coli-aerogene organisms. Provide a total plate count of less
than 100 bacteria per cc, or equal to the control sample.
C. If analysis results are not satisfactory, repeat the disinfection procedures and retest until
specified standards are achieved.
3.15 OTHER TESTING AND ADJUSTING
A. Provide personnel and equipment, and arrange for and pay the costs of, all required tests
and inspections required by governmental agencies having jurisdiction.
B. Where tests show materials or workmanship to be deficient, replace or repair as
necessary, and repeat the tests until the specified standards are achieved.
C. Adjust the system to optimum standards of operation.
END OF SECTION
PLUMBING
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
15405 - 14
SECTION 16400
ELECTRICAL (DESIGN BUILD)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A.
B.
B.
Provide the Design and the Design Drawings (Construction Drawings), secure all
approvals from governing agencies, obtain Construction Permit, fabricate, install, and
secure required construction sign-off approvals for a complete electrical system(s) where
shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper
electrical installation(s) in accordance with pertinent requirements of the National
Electrical Code, latest edition, and all governmental agencies having jurisdiction.
Provide complete engineered drawings for systems where shown on the Drawings, as
specified herein, and as needed for a complete installation including, but not necessarily
limited to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Electrical Utility Service
Feeder system, in conduit to branch circuits panels;
Branch circuit panels for power and lighting;
Branch circuit wiring, in conduit, for lighting, receptacles, junction boxes, and
motors;
Hangers, anchors, sleeves, chases, supports for fixtures, and other electrical
materials and equipment in association therewith;
Lighting fixtures and lamps;
Wiring system, in conduit, for equipment and controls provided under other Sections
of these Specifications including, but not necessarily limited to, Plumbing and Fire
Sprinkler Sections;
Motor starters and controls for motors provided under the Contract, but for which
motor starters and controls are not otherwise provided;
Other items and services required to complete the system.
Related work:
1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to,
Contract Documents, Special Provisions and Sections in Division 1 of these
Specifications.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 0 1340.
B. Product data: Within 35 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's
Notice to Proceed, submit:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section;
2. Design drawings, stamped as having been approved by governing agency having
jurisdiction, showing the complete Electrical Modification(s)/addition(s) - the
ELECTRICAL, (DESIGN BUILD)
16400- 1
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
Owner’s designated representative will provide floor plan backgrounds on
AutoCAD Discs for the subcontractors use in preparing the Electrical Design &
Construction Documents.
3.. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the
specified requirements;
4. Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the
Owner’s designated representative, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting
actual installation procedures used on the Work.
C. Samples:
1.
2.
When so requested by the Owner’s designated representative, promptly provide
Samples of items scheduled to be exposed in the fmal structure.
When specifically so requested by the Contractor and approved by the Owner’s
designated representative approved Samples will be returned to the Contractor for
installation on the Work.
D. Manual: Upon completion of this portion of the Work, and as a condition of its
acceptance, deliver to the Owner’s designated representative two copies of an operation
and maintenance manual compiled in accordance with the provisions of Section 01730 of
these Specifications. Include within each manual:
1.
2.
3,
Copy of the approved Record Documents for this portion of the Work;
Copies of all circuit directories;
Copies of all warranties and guaranties.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen thoroughly trained and experienced in the
necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods
needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are
required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of
governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and
associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 0 1620.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. In addition to standard one year warranty on all labor and materials, provide a two year
warranty on ballasts for all fluorescent lighting fixtures.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOTE: THE PRODUCTS & MATERIALS SPECIFIED BELOW ARE
TO ESTABLSH A LEVEL OF ACCEPTABILITY FOR ITEMS THAT WILL COMPRISE THE
ELECTRICAL (DESIGN BUILD)
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
16400-2
R.EVISED/NEW ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS NECESSARY FOR THIS PROJECT - ALL ITEMS
SPECIFIED BELOW MAY OR MAY NOT BE USED IN YOUR DESIGN - IF ITEMS ARE
NOT NECESSARY TO YOUR DESIGN, THEY ARE OBVIOUSLY NOT A REQUIREMENT
FOR THIS PROJECT)
2.1 GENERAL
A. Provide only materials that are new, of the type and quality specified. Where
Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. have established standards for such materials, provide
only materials bearing the UL label.
B. Temporary power:
1. In addition to providing temporary power as described in Section 01 500 of these
Specifications, provide and pay the costs for installing permanent electrical meter or
meters as required.
2. When permanent metering is in place and connected, the Owner will pay the costs for
electrical power charged against the meter or meters.
2.2 ENTRANCES AND SWITCHBOARD
A. Main switchboard
B. Distribution switchboard: (if additional distribution panels are required)
1. Provide factory assembled, dead front, with equipment busing connection, current-
limiting fuses, circuit breakers, and similar components as shown on the Drawings
or required for proper completion.
At fused switches, provide etched plastic nameplates secured by two cadmium
plated screws.
Provide same construction and manufacture as the main switchboard, but equip with
eye bolts to facilitate hoisting and placement of sections.
2.
3.
C. Switches: (if additional switches are necessary)
1. Provide quick-make, quick-break, fused type, rated 240 V ac for 120/208 V systems,
and rated 600 V for 277/480 V systems.
2. Provide one of the following:
a. General Electric: "QMR" up to 1200 amps.
b. Westinghouse: "FDP" up to 1200 amps.
c. ITE: "Vacu-Break" up to 1200 amps.
d. Square D: "QMB" up to 600 amps; "AV" for 800-1200 amps.
e. Zinsco: "QSF" up to 600 amps; "PK" for 800-1200 amps
For switches rated 1600 amps and higher, provide bolted pressure type such as
Pringle "QA."
3.
D. Provide current-limiting fuses: (if additional fuses are required)
1.
2.
For above 600 amps, provide Class L "Hi-Cap" manufactured by Bussman, or equal
mandactured by Chase-Shawmut.
For below 600 amps, as shown for short circuit duty, provide Class K-1 "Limitron,"
ELECTRICAL (DESIGN BUILD)
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
16400-3
or Class K-5 "Low Peak," or Class K-9 "Fusetron" manufactured by Bussman, or
equal manufactured by Chase-Shawmut.
E. At all sections, provide a micarta nameplate with white lettering on a red background,
reading WARNING, REPLACE ONLY WITH CURRENT-LIMITING FUSES AS
ORIGINALLY INSTALLED.
F. Provide 100% spare fuses for each feeder, housed in a suitable cabinet near the main
distribution board.
G. Provide copper busing full height.
H. Motor control center:
1.
2.
Equip with means for locking each circuit separately.
Provide completely Class A, factory wired, including breakers, contactors, starters,
relays, transformers, and other required items, totally enclosed, freestanding type,
with structures joined to form one assembly but with structure designed so that units
may readily be removed and other structures added as required in the fbture.
Provide lifting angles or eye-bolts to facilitate hoisting and placing.
Provide each structure with two horizontal wiring spaces, one at the top and one at
the bottom, which will line up with adjacent units to form convenient wiring
raceways the entire length of the control center.
Provide permanent identification of each item of equipment by means of plastic
laminate nameplates, black face with white core letters, showing service and
location of each motor.
6. Individually tag all conduits and conductors.
7. Provide copper busing.
3.
4.
5.
2.3 GROUNDING SYSTEM
A. Ground all equipment, including switchboards, transformers, conduit systems, motors,
and other apparatus, by conduit or conductor to cold water main or to independent
grounding electrode as shown on the Drawings, using ground clamps manufactured by
Burndy or T&B, and approved by the OWNER'S DESIGNATED REPRESENTATIVE.
B. Use ground rods if water mains or piping are not metallic, or if isolation couplings have
been used.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Locate ground rods in planters or similar areas which will receive water regularly,
and drive to a depth of at least 2.4 m (8'-0").
Make meg ground tests to measure ground resistance, and provide not more than 5
ohms resistance, adding ground rods as required to achieve that level.
Make ground rods accessible for inspection.
Provide "Ufer" ground if so required by governmental agencies having jurisdiction.
2.4 DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
ELECTRICAL (DESIGN BUILD)
16400-4
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
A. Identification:
1.
2.
Identie all panelboards, cabinets, safety switches, and other apparatus used for
operation and control of circuits, appliances, and equipment.
Provide plastic laminate nameplates, black face with white core letters, showing
proper and complete identification.
B. Branch circuit panels:
1.
2.
Provide branch circuit panels for lighting and singlephase loads, using copper busing
with "Quicklag" circuit breakers and main lugs only.
Provide one of the following:
a. General Electric: "NLABB"
b. Westinghouse: "NQB"
c. ITE: "NLAB" with box-type breaker
d. SquareD: "NQQB"
e. Zinsco: "NQB"
Motor control center for air conditioning equipment:
a.
b.
3.
Study Drawings and Specifications for air conditioning system, and coordinate
as necessary to determine motor control center requirements;
Provide floor standing, dead rear and front ventilation, with louvers at top and
bottom of each section, Class B-1 wired, complete with starters, relays,
breakers, time switches, and other items as needed for a complete and operable
installation.
4. Provide units of same manufacture as the main switchboard.
C. Wiring devices:
1. Provide duplex receptacles of 3-pole grounding type with the third pole U-shaped
and grounded to the conduit system, and one of the following:
a. Bryant, Hubbell, Arrow-Hart: No. 5242
b. General Electric: No. 4050 or 4060
c. Sierra: No. 1402
d. Hubbell (208 V-lb-ac-20 a): No. 7310 BU
e. Hubbell (240 V-3a-20 a, gw): No. 7410 BU
2. For flush-mounted receptacles, provide super stainless steel type 302 cover plates.
3. For flush-mounted switches, provide super stainless steel 3200 series cover plates
and, where grouped, set in gangs with one cover plate.
4. Provide tumbler switches of commercial-industrial type, 20 amp, 120/277 V ac, and
one of the following:
Single Two Three Four
*wwav:wavt a. Bryant: 4901 4902 4903 4904
b. Hubbell 1221 1222 1223 1224
C. Arrow-Hart 1991 1992 1993 1994
d. Sierra: 5021 5022 5023 5024
e. General Electric 5951 5952 5953 5954
f. P&S: 20AC1 20AC2 20AC3 20AC4
ELECTRICAL (DESIGN BUILD)
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
16400-5
D. Underfloor raceways:
1. Provide Walker single duct or triple duct undeffloor distribution system where
shown on the Drawings.
a. Provide welded rectangular tubing, factory-processed to prevent rusting,
delivered in 3 m (10 ft) lengths, with outlets uniformly spaced at the centers
shown.
b. Provide marker escutcheons for outlets adjacent to junction boxes and at last
outlet at ends of duct runs.
Provide floor junction boxes where shown, adjustable to elevation of ducts, and with
tops at surface of the finished floor.
a. Provide partitions separating the respective runs.
b.
Provide fittings needed to facilitate connections to the equipment and other items
shown.
2.
Provide junction box cover pans to receive the indicated finishes.
3.
E. Above floor raceways:
1. Provide rigid galvanized or sherardized steel conduit, or electrical metallic tubing,
with compression or tap-on type fittings, for all conduit concealed in the walls,
above the ceilings, or exposed in work areas.
a. Indenter fittings are not acceptable.
b. Where conduit is installed underground or in the floor slab, provide rigid
galvanized steel conduit.
Where electrical metallic tubing is used, comply with pertinent requirements of the
National Electrical Code.
PVC conduit may not be used without specific written approval of the Owner's
designated representative.
Provide flush floor boxes, cast iron, watertight, equal to Russell & Stoll No. 25 1 1,
with combination 13 mm (1/2") and 28 mm (1-1/8") plug.
For floor boxes with convenience outlets, provide Lew No. 632SB-DFB, unless
otherwise shown on the Drawings.
Outlets, junction boxes, and switch boxes:
a.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Provide standard one-piece units, galvanized or sherardized, of shape and size
best suited to that particular location, of sufficient size to contain enclosed wires
without crowding.
Provide deep boxes with 25 rnm (1") and larger conduit.
For lighting outlets, provide standard 100 mrn (4") octagon or square units, with
9.5 mrn (3/8") malleable iron fixturestuds and box hangers where required.
For switches and receptacles, provide standard gang switch boxes with stainless
steel covers; except for exposed work provide pressed steel boxes with gal-
vanized or cadmium plated steel covers.
(1) Provide boxes 100 rnm (4") square by 38 mm (1 - 1/2") deep, except for
boxes at ends of run where containing a single device.
(2) These may be No. 180 handy boxes if permitted by the governing code.
For telephone outlets, provide 100 mm (4") square boxes with single device
cover and one-hole bakelite telephone outlet.
b.
c.
d.
e.
For pull boxes, provide galvanized code-gage sheet steel units with screwed-on
covers, of size and shape required to accommodate wires without crowding, and to
7.
ELECTRICAL (DESIGN BUILD)
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
16400-6
suit the location.
Provide sleeves and chases where conduits pass through floors and walls. 8.
F. Conductors:
1. For line voltages, provide 600 V insulated copper wire and cable, NEC standard, of
types specified below for difference applications, with UL label, and color coded as
required by governmental agencies having jurisdiction.
With conductors No. 4 and larger, provide insulating bushings or insulating sleeves. 2.
3. For wire and cable No. 1 and larger, provide RHW or THW.
a.
b.
Where branch circuit wiring is installed in wiring channels of continuous row-
mounted fixtures, provide UL type RHH or other approved 90 degree C wires, rated
at 600 V.
For wire No. 8 and smaller, provide solid wire; for wire larger than No. 8, provide
stranded wire.
For wire in conduits subjected to direct sunlight, provide THWN or RHWN.
Use only copper wires and cables.
Wires smaller than No. 1 may be TW.
Identifjr feeder neutrals with white tape or white paint.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.5 LIGHTING FIXTURES
A. Provide fixtures of the types shown on the Drawings, and with the following accessories
as applicable.
1. Recessed fixtures:
a.
b.
Provide units having an attached pull box, and with UL label.
Provide local label in addition if so required by governmental agencies having
jurisdiction.
a. Provide ballasts thermally protected against overheating by built-in thermal
protectors sensitive to ballast winding temperature and current.
b. Provide protector preventing winding temperature from exceeding 120 degrees
C, allowing winding temperatures to reach 105 degrees C under normal
operating conditions at 40 degrees C ambient and, after opening, not reclosing
above 80 degrees C
c. Fluorescent luminaires shall be Prudential to match exist fixture
configurations,with standard finish unless an equal is approved by the Owner's
designated representative.
2. Fluorescent fixtures:
B. Where fixture substitutes are proposed, submit a Sample fixture with the materials list
required to be submitted under Article 1.2 above.
2.6TELEPHOIW AND INTERCOM (NOT USED)
2.7MOTOR STARTERS
A. General: Provide Westinghouse units, or equal as approved in advance by the Owner's
ELECTRICAL (DESIGN BUILD)
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
16400-7
designated representative, of the sizes and types needed for the operations shown on the
Drawings, specified herein, and otherwise required for the facility, and with the fol-
lowing attributes:
1. Comply with pertinent requirements of NEMA and NEC.
2. Include required accessory items.
3. Horsepower rated, with interchangeable thermal overloads and with double-break
contacts capable of interrupting 10 times the rated motor current.
4. Normally reset without entering the starter enclosure.
5. Equipped with overloads in each ungrounded leg.
B. Manual starters:
1.
2.
3.
For both single-phase and three-phase starters, provide units that open all
ungrounded conductors simultaneously.
For single-phase starters, provide units of tumbler switch type that clearly indicate
ON, OFF, and TRIPPED positions.
For three-phase starters, provide pushbutton operated units with START, STOP-
RESET button on the enclosure cover.
C. Magnetic starters:
1.
2.
3.
Provide units with operating coils designed to operate on line voltage or any other
auxiliary voltage shown on the Drawings.
For starters with line voltage operating coils, provide built-in under-voltage release.
Provide units with the accessories and auxiliary contacts needed for automatic or
remote operation as shown on the Drawings.
D. Combination starters:
1.
2.
Provide units complying with requirements for magnetic starters and, in addition,
with a circuit breaker in the same enclosure.
Provide circuit protection comply with NEC requirements for the motor being
operated.
2.8 SAFETY SWITCHES
A.
B:
C.
Provide safety switches of heavy duty type, horsepower rated, quick-make and quick-
break design, externally operated with provision for padlocking, fusible or non-fusible as
shown on the Drawings.
Provide enclosures clearly marked for maximum voltage, current, and horsepower rating,
and:
1. Indoor: NEMAtype 1.
2. Outdoor: NEMA type 3R, raintight.
For switches having dual ratings (higher rating when used with dual-element fuses),
provide ratings indicated on a metal plate riveted or otherwise permanently fastened to
the enclosure.
2.9 AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOORS (NOT USED)
ELECTRICAL (DESIGN BUILD)
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
16400-8
2.10 TRANSFORMERS
A. Provide Westinghouse Type DS-3 and ST-3, or equal transformers manufactured by
General Electric or Jefies, with the following attributes.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Dry type, with the ratings shown on the Drawings.
For lighting transformers, provide four 2-1/2% FCBN taps.
For power transformers, provide two 5% FCBN taps.
Adjust all taps to nominal 120 V, 240 V, or 480 V as close as practicable and as
required for the Work.
Do not provide taps on isolating transformers.
B. Provide Group 11 insulation with temperature rise not exceeding 80 degrees C, or Group
I1 with temperature rise not exceeding 150 degrees C, under full load, in an ambient
temperature of 40 degrees C.
C. Build transformers in accordance with current standards of AIEE, ASA, and NEMA, and
provide UL listing and label.
D. For units of 5 kV class, provide a BK of 25 kV on the primary and 10 kV on the
secondary.
E. For units of 600 V and less, provide BIL of 10 kV.
.-
F. Locate terminal compartment in the bottom of the transformer to assure termination of
cable leads in ambient temperature levels and to provide for side or bottom entrance of
the cables.
G. Separate transformer core and coils from case by suitable vibration isolators. Install the
transformer case on suitable vibration isolators, and connect on primary and secondary
sides with minimum of 450 MM (1 8") of flexible conduit.
H. Provide a minimum of 10% overload capacity at rated voltage.
,-
I. Provide the following tests at the factory. 1. Applied voltage test to other winding and ground: Vclsrss: 5k.Y
clacs:
12 kV
4 kV
H.V. - 4 kV
L.V. - 4 kV
2.
3.
4.
Induced voltage test: Two times normal voltage.
Ratio, polarity, and sound level tests.
Perform sound level tests in test room, with an ambient sound level not exceeding
23 db's, and achieve sound level not exceeding:
a. 0 to 150 kVa: 45 db's.
b. 167 to 300 kVa: 50 db's.
c. 500 kVa and more: 53 db's.
Prior to proposing any new design, secure the Owner's designated representatives 5.
ELECTRICAL (DESIGN BUILD)
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
16400-9
approval of a certified rating test report of similar standard ratings, with proper
explanatory drawings, showing the above tests have been performed with
satisfactory results on the first rating of the new design, including ratio, resistance,
copper loss, iron loss, sound level, applied voltage, induced voltage, temperature
rise, impulse test, and short circuit tests.
When so required by the Owner’s designated representative, provide performance
data stating whether figures shown are average, typical, or guaranteed, and corrected
to the corresponding NEMA reference temperatures.
6.
2.11 OTHER MATElUALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Owner’s
designated representative
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate:
1.
2.
3.
Coordinate as necessary with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in
the work of those trades for interface with the work of this Section.
Coordinate the installation of electrical items with the schedule for work of other
trades to prevent unnecessary delays in the total Work.
Where lighting fixtures and other electrical items are shown in conflict with
locations of structural members and mechanical or other equipment, provide
required supports and wiring to clear the encroachment.
B. Data indicated on the Drawings and in these Specifications are as exact as could be
secured, but their absolute accuracy is not warranted. The exact locations, distances,
levels, and other conditions will be governed by actual construction and the Drawings
and Specifications should be used only for guidance in such regard.
C. Where outlets are not specifically located on the Drawings, locate as determined in the
field by Owner’s designated representative. Where outlets are installed without such
specific direction, relocate as directed by the Owner’s designated representative and at no
additional cost to the Owner.
D. Verify all measurements at the building. No extra compensation will be allowed because
ELECTRICAL (DESIGN BUILD)
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
16400- 10
of differences between work shown on the Drawings and actual measurements at the site
of the existing building(s).
E. Branch circuit wiring and arrangement of home runs should be designed for maximum
economy consistent with adequate sizing for voltage drops and other considerations.
3.3 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING
A. Perform trenching and backfilling associated with the work of this Section in strict
accordance with the provisions of Section 02220 of these Specifications.
3.4INSTALLATION OF RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Where conduit is installed concealed in walls or above the ceiling, or exposed in work
areas, provide rigid galvanized conduit or electrical metallic tubing with compression
1. Paint or wrap elbows.
2.
3.
4.
type fittings.
Seal joints to prevent entrance of water.
Provide ground wire of proper size.
Use nylon (rather than steel) fish tape.
Use flexible conduit only for short motor connections, or where subject to vibration.
Provide necessary sleeves and chases where conduits pass through floors and walls, and
provide other necessary openings and spaces, arranging for in proper time to prevent
unnecessary cutting in connection with the Work. Perform cutting and patching in
accordance with the provisions for the original Work.
Where conduit is exposed, run parallel to or at right angle with lines of the building.
1.
2.
Make bends with standard conduit elbows or conduit bent to not less than the same
radius.
Make bends flee from dents and flattening.
Securely and rigidly support conduits throughout the Work.
Where conduits pierce the roof, provide 24 gage galvanized iron roof jacks and flashing
collar brazed onto the conduits and covering the top of the roof jacks.
3.5INSTALLATION OF LIGHTING FIXTURES
A. Install lighting fixtures complete and ready for service in accordance with the Lighting
Fixture Schedule shown on the Drawings.
B. Wire fixtures with fixture wiring of at least 50 degrees C rating. Where fixtures are
mounted in continuous rows, provide conductors in wiring channels of the same size as
the circuit wires supplying the row of fixtures.
ELECTRICAL (DESIGN BUILD)
16400- 1 1
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
C. Use only bonderized, galvanized, or sherardized steel for fixture installation for
protection against rust and corrosion, and install fluorescent fixtures straight and true
with reference to walls.
D. Install all lighting fixtures, including those mounted in continuous rows, so that the
weight of the fixture is supported, either directly or indirectly, by a sound and safe
structural member of the building, using adequate number and type of fastenings to
assure safe installation.
1. Screwed fastenings, and toggle bolts through ceiling material or wall paneling, are
not acceptable.
2. Do not support from sub-purlins of panelized roof systems
3.6 INSTALLATION OF POWER EQUIPMENT
A. Provide power and control wiring for motor starters and safety switches as shown on the
Drawings.
B. Connections to miscellaneous building equipment:
1. Wire to, and connect to, all items of building equipment not specifically described
but to which electrical power is required.
2. Coordinate as necessary with other trades and suppliers to verify types, numbers,
and locations of equipment.
3.7INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS
A. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, use No. 12 type TW conductors for all branch
circuits, protected by 20 amp circuit breakers. Where so indicated on the Drawings, use
larger wires to limit voltage drops.
B. The number of wires in a conduit run is indicated on the Drawings by cross lines on the
conduit runs.
1.
2.
3.
Where wire size is not shown, install No. 12 conductors.
Where conduit size is not shown, install 13 mm (1/2") conduit.
Provide code-sized conduit for number and size wires shown or required, unless a
larger size conduit is shown on the Drawings.
C. Use identified (white) neutrals and color-coded phase Wires for all branch circuit wiring.
1. Make splices electrically and mechanically secure with pressure-type connectors, or
by soldering.
a.
b.
Insulate splices with a minimum of two half-lapped layers of Scotch Branch No. 33
vinyl-plastic electrical tape where insulation is required.
For wires size 6 AWG and smaller, provide nScotchlockn connectors.
For .wire size 4 AWG and larger, provide Burndy "Versitaps" and heavy-duty
connectors, or T&B "Lock Tite" connectors.
2.
ELECTRICAL (DESIGN BUILD)
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
16400- 12
D. Tape all joints with rubber tape 1 -1/2 times the thickness of the conductor insulation,
then cover with the friction tape or the vinyl-plastic electrical tape specified above.
E. The Drawings indicate the general direction of home runs. Continue all such home runs
to the panel as though the routes where shown completely.
3.8INSTALLATION OF PANELS
A. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, install panels with the top of the trim 1.9 m
(6’”’’) above the finished floor.
B. Mount a typewritten directory behind glass or plastic on the inside of each panel door
and, on the directory, show the circuit number and complete description of all outlets on
each circuit.
C. Provide three 25 mm (1 ‘I) conduits only, stubbed out of the top of each flush-mounted
panel and terminated in accessible ceiling space, with each conduit tagged with panel
description.
3.9 TESTING AND INSPECTION
A. Provide personnel and equipment, make required tests, and secure required approvals
from the Owner’s designated representative and governmental agencies having
jurisdiction.
B. Make written notice to the Owner’s designated representative adequately in advance of
each of the following stages of construction:
1.
2.
3.
In the underground condition prior to placing concrete floor slab, when all
associated electrical work is in place;
When all rough-in is complete, but not covered;
At completion of the work of this Section.
C. When material and/or workmanship is found to not comply with the specified
requirements, within three days after receipt of notice of such non-compliance remove
the noncomplying items from the job site and replace them with items complying with
the specified requirements, all at no additional cost to the Owner.
D. In the Owner’s designated representative presence:
1.
2.
3.
Test all parts of the electrical system and prove that all such items provided under
this Section function electrically in the required manner.
Immediately submit to the Owner’s designated representative a report of maximum
and minimum voltages, and a copy of the recording voltmeter chart.
Also measure voltages between phases and between phase wires and neutrals, and
report these voltages to the Owner’s designated representative
3.10 PROJECT COMPLETION
ELECTRICAL (DESIGN BUILD)
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
16400-13
A. Upon completion of the work of this Section, thoroughly clean all exposed portions of
the electrical installation, removing all traces of soil, labels, grease, oil, and other foreign
material, and using only the type cleaner recommended by the manufacturer of the item
being cleaned.
B. Thoroughly indoctrinate the Owner’s operation and maintenance personnel in the
contents of the operations and maintenance manual required to be submitted under
Article 1.2 of this Section of these Specifications.
C. On the first day the facility is in operation, for at least eight hours at a time directed by
the Owner’s designated representative, provide a qualified foreman and crew to perform
such electrical work as may be required by the OWNER’S DESIGNATED
REPRESENTATIVE.
END OF SECTION
ELECTRICAL (DESIGN BUILD)
Project No. 3688 01 Jan 03
16400- 14
APPENDIX 'A'
UPDATE OF GEOTECHNICAL EVALUATION
CARLSBAD FIRE STATION NO. 5 STORAGE FACILITY
I:
I; ,-
TESTING ENGINEERS-SAN DIEGO, INC.
UPDATE GEOTECRNLCAL EVALUATION
CARLSBAD FIRE STATION NO. 5 STORAGE FACILITY,
2650 ORION WAY, CARLSBAD, CALIFORNIA
CWBAD PROJECT NO. 3688
PREPARED FOR:
Mr. Steve Jantz
City of Carlsbad, Engineering Department
1635 Faraday Avenue
Carlsbad, California 92008
PREBARED BY:
Testing Engineers - San Diego, Inc.
7895 Conyoy Court, Suite 18
San Diego, California 92111
-. L .,
May 25, 2000
Project No. 99-519C
Project No. 99-519C
Mr. Steve Jantz
City of Carlsbad, Engineering Department
163 5 Faraday Avenue
Carlsbad, California 92008
Subject : Updated Geotechnical Evaluation, Fire Station No. 5 Storage Facility Project,
2650 Orion Way, Carlsbad California, Carlsbad Project No. 3688
DearMr. Jantz:
Transmitted herewith is our updated geotechnical report for the subject project, dated May 23,
2000. The geotechnical services summarized in this report were conducted in general accordance
with our proposal dated March 22, 2000, as authorized by your office. This report presents a
summary of the findings of our evaluation and includes our conclusions and recommendations for
geotechnical aspects of the project.
We appreciate the opportunity to be of service on this project. Should you have any questions re-
garding this report, please contact our office at (858) 715-5800.
Respectfblly submitted,
TESTING ENGINEERS - SAN DIEGO, INC.
Senior Engineer, Manager of Laboratory Services
WenN. Bradley, CEG
Principal Engineering Geologist
RDPLCISNGlrdp
Distribution: (3) Addressee
_.-
Testing Engineers - San Diego, Inc., 7895 Convoy Court, Suite 18 San Diego, CA. 92111 [858] 715-5800 Fax [85.8] 715-5810
City of Carlsbad
Fire Station No . 5 Storage Facility Project
May 25. 2000
Project No . 99-519C
1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
&e
1 INTRODUCTION 1
2 .
. ...............................................................................................................
SITE DESCRIPTION .......................................................................................................... 1
3 . PROJECT DESCRIE'TION 2
4 . SUB SURFACE EVALUATION 2
5 . SOIL AND GEOLOGIC CONDITIONS 2
5.1. Site Stratigraphy ......................................................................................................... 2
5.1.1. Undocumented Artificial Fill Soils ...................................................................... 3 5.1.2. Residual Soil ...................................................................................................... 3
5.1.3. Undifferentiated Grmtic Rock ........................................................................... 3
GROUNDWATER ............... ' ................................................................................................ 3
7.1. Regional Seismcity ..................................................................................................... 3
..................................................................................................
..........................................................................................
.............................................................................
..
6 .
7 . SEISMICITY ........................................................................................................................ 3 ..
_-
.
7.2. Seismic Evaluation ...................................................................................................... 4
7.2.1. Historical Earthquake ........................................................................................ 4
7.2.2. Determuustic Analysis ........................................................................................ 4
Effective Ground Acceleration ........................................................................... 4
7.3. Hazard Assessment ..................................................................................................... 5
7.3.1. Seismically-Induced Settlement .......................................................................... 5
7.3 .2 . Liquefaction ....................................................................................................... 5
7.3.3. Lurching and Shallow Ground Rupture .............................................................. 5
7.3.4. Landsliding/Rock Falls ....................................................................................... 5
7.3.5. Tsunamis and Seiches ........................................................................................ 5
UBC Seismic Design Parameters ................................................................................. 5
...
7.2.3.
7.4.
.................................................................................................. 6 8 . LABORATORY TESTING
6 9 . GEOTECHNICAL EVALUATION ......................................................................................
9.1. Expansive Soils ........................................................................................................... 7
9.2. Compressible Soils ...................................................................................................... 7
9.3. Corrosive Soils ............................................................................................................ 7
9.4. Rippabllity ................................................................................................................... 7
10.1. Clearing and Grubbing ................................................................................................
10.2. Structural Improvement of Soils ..................................................................................
10.3. Cut/Fill Transitions ...................................................................................................... 9
..
................................................ 10 . GRADING AND EARTHWORK RECOMMENDATIONS 8
8
8
99519CRl i
City of Carlsbad
Fire Station No . 5 Storage Facility Project
May 25. 2000
Project No . 99-5 19C
10.4. Methods and Criteria of Compaction ........................................................................... 9
10.5. Placement of Oversized Rock ...................................................................................... 9
10.6. Permanent Slopes ...................................................................................................... 10
10.7. Temporary Slopes and Cuts ....................................................................................... 10
10.8. Standard Grading Recommendations ......................................................................... 10
.11. 1. Conventional Foundations ......................................................................................... 10
11.2. Interior Slabs on Grade ............................................................................................. 11
11.3. Exterior Flatwork ...................................................................................................... 11
11.5. Settlement ................................................................................................................. 12
12 . ADDITIONAL RECOMME~ATIONS 12
12.1. Pavement Design ....................................................................................................... 12
12.2. Retaining Walls ......................................................................................................... 12
12.3. Trench Backfill .......................................................................................................... 12
12.4. Surface Drainage ....................................................................................................... 13
12.5. Plan Review and Geotechnical Observations .............................................................. 13
13.1. Limts of Invesbgation ............................................................................................... 13
13.2. Additional Services ................................................................................................... 14
14 . SELECTED REFERENCES .............................................................................................. 15
...................................................... 11 . FOUNDATION AND SLAB RECOMMENDATIONS 10
11.4. Concrete ................................................................................................................... 12
...........................................................................
-
13 . CLOSURE ......................................................................................................................... 13 .. ..
Fipures
Plate 1 . Site Location Map
Plate 2 . Boring Location Map
Aopendix
Appendix A . Field Exploration Logs
Appendix B . Laboratory Test Results
Appendix C . Seismic Analysis
Appendix D . Standard Specifications for Grading Projects
.
99519CRI 11
City of Carlsbad
Fire Station No. 5 Storage Facility Project
May 25,2000
Project No. 99-5 19C
1. INTRODUCTION
In response to your request and authorization, we have performed an update geotechnical evalua-
tion for the Fire Station No. 5 Storage Facility Project located in Carlsbad, California. The
purpose of the evaluation was to characterize surface and subsurface geologic and geotechnical
conditions at the site of the proposed project.
The scope of services included the following:
a
a
a
a
2.
Performance of a preliminary site visit to observe the exposed conditions at the site, discuss
the current conditions of the site with you, and discuss a proposed scope of services for this
evaluation.
Preparation of the referenced proposal, dated March 22, 2000.
Review of available documenfs, as referenced herein.
Project coordination by our engineer for fieldwork at the site and client conversations.
Coordination of utility location with Underground Service Alert and relevant utility agencies,
prior to excavation of the exploratory borings.
Subsurface evaluation to identify and characterize the subsurface geotechnical conditions. The
subsurface evaluation will include excavation of two small diameter borings.
Acquisition of relatively undisturbed driven sampIes, and bulk samples for delivery to our
laboratory.
Laboratory testing of the samples obtained to evaluate the following: in-place moisture, in-
place density, maximum density, optimum moisture, Atterberg Limits, Expansion Index, direct
shear, pH, resistivity, sulfate and chloride content.
Analysis of the accumulated data.
Preparation of a final report presenting our findings, conclusions and recommendations. The
discussion, conclusions and recommendations presented herein are based on an analysis of the
data obtained from exploratory excavations, laboratory tests, and our experience with similar
soil and geologic conditions.
SITE DESCRIPTION
The site is located at the 2650 Orion Way, east of the intersection with Orion Street in Carlsbad,
California. The proposed building location is east of the southeast comer of the parking lot for the
Carlsbad Fire Station No. 5, and south of an existing concrete skateboard park. The approximate
location is shown on Figure 1 - Site Location Map.
S9519CRl 1
City of Carlsbad
Fire Station No. 5 Storage Facility Project
May 25,2000
Project No. 99-5 19C
The building pad area is relatively flat, and is reportedly covered by several feet of undocumented
fill material generated fiom the blasting and grading of the large multi-use sports field to the
north. It is landscaped with numerous eucalyptus trees, weeds, and native undergrowth. Several
surface irrigation lines and sprinkler heads were observed.
3. PROJECT DESCRIPTION
Proposed construction consists of a two-story CMU storage building. Building will include an
outside covered storage area, minor parking lot expansion and accessible public toilet room facili-
ties for the adjacent, city owned skateboard park. We understand that grading will construct and
elevated pad that sits several feet above the current elevation to facilitate positive drainage to the
sewer utility lines in Orion Way to the north. We anticipate a maximum removal depth of ap-
proximately ten feet, and a maximum fill thickness of approximately 13 feet.
4. SUBSURFACE EVALUATION
Our field evaluation was performed on April 27, 1999. The subsurface evaluation consisted of the
drilling, logging, and sampling of two 8-inch diameter exploratory borings (B-1 and B-2). The
borings were advanced to depths of 20.5 and 30.0 feet using a truck-mounted drill rig with con-
tinuous flight, hollow-stem augers. The approximate locations of the exploratory borings are
presented on Figure 2 - Boring Location Map.
The purpose of the exploratory borings was to observe the subsurface materials and conditions, to
evaluate the depth to groundwater, and to collect bulk and relatively undisturbed samples for
laboratory testing. Excavated materials were visually classified in the field and samples were
transported to our laboratory for testing. Logs of the exploratory borings are presented in Appen-
dix A.
5. SOIL AND GEOLOGXC CONDITIONS
5.1. Site Stratigraphy
The subsurface descriptions provided are interpreted fiom conditions that were exposed dur-
ing the field investigation and/or inferred fiom the geologic literature. As such, all of the
subsurface conditions may not be represented. Detailed descriptions of the subsurface materi-
als encountered during the field investigation are presented on the exploration logs.
The soils encountered during our field investigation included undocumented artificial fill soil,
residual soil, and granitic rock. A cursory reconnaissance of the site indicated that much of
the site is covered by artificial fill soils and topsoils. Weathered and competent granitic rock
was exposed in numerous outcroppings at the site. Competent granitic rock boulders were
exposed at the ground surface in the adjacent slope surfaces to the east. Each of the soil types
is discussed briefly below in order of increasing depth.
99519CRI 2
City of Carlsbad
Fire Station No. 5 Storage Facility Project -
May 25,2000
Project No. 99-5 19C
5.1.1. Undocumented Artificial Fill Soils
Undocumented artificial fill soils varying from in thickness from five to ten feet deep
were encountered in each boring. The fill soils observed are generally characterized as
olive brown, moist, loose to medium dense, clayey sand. Numerous boulders were en-
countered during drilling. We understand that the boulders are remnants from the
blasting and grading project that occurred during construction of the large, relatively flat
sports field and safety center lot to the north and east. We anticipate that the boulders
will typically be 12 to 24 inches in diameter. However, larger boulders may be encoun-
tered.
5.1.2. Residual Soil
Residual granitic rock was encountered beneath the fill soil. The residual soil exists at the
upper surface of much of the artificial filVgranitic rock interface and appeared to be ap-
proximately three to four feet thick. The residual soil is generally characterized as olive
brown, moist, loose to medium dense clayey sand.
5.1.3. Undifferentiated Granitic Rock
Granitic rock is anticipated to underlie the entire site at depth. The in-situ granitic rock is
generally characterized as mottled orangish brown and yellow brown, moist, moderately
to intensely weathered granite rock. Numerous competent granitic boulders were ob-
served at the surface in the adjacent slopes. Drilling rehsal was reported by the driller in
the two borings at approximately three to four feet. Each boring was moved several
times before it was completed. The boulders observed on the surface and encountered in
the two borings should be anticipated in other areas of the fill as well.
6. GROUNDWATER
Groundwater was not encountered within the iimits of the excavation. Groundwater is not ex-
pected to be encountered within the depth of influence of the proposed construction. However,
perched water could be encountered at the contact between the compacted fill and the underlying
native materials during periods of rainfall.
7. SEISMICITY
7.1. Regional Seismicity
The portion of southern California, which includes the Carlsbad Fire Station No. 5 Storage
Facility, is considered seismically active. In general, the active seismicity can be attributed to
the tectonic forces and relative movement taking place along the San Andreas Fault and other
related major fault zones.
According to the regional geologic maps, the closest known active fault is the Rose Canyon
Fault located approximately 7.4 miles (12 km) southwest of the project site.
99519cR1 3
City of Carlsbad
Fire Station No. 5 Storage Facility Project
May 25,2000
Project No. 99-5 19C
7.2. Seismic Evaluation
The seismicity of the site was evaluated utilizing both historical and deterministic methods for
active Quaternary faults within the regional vicinity. According to the Fault-Rupture Hazard
Zones Act (1994), Quaternary faults are classified as "active" if there is evidence of surface
rupture during the last 11,000 years (i.e., Holocene time). In consideration of the classifica-
tion of the structure by the Uniform Building Code, the Ground Acceleration Values used in
this report are based upon the Maximum Probable Earthquake.
7.2.1. Historical Earthquake
Historic seismicity was evaluated utilizing the EQSEARCH computer program (Blake)
which searches an updated catalog of past earthquakes within a specific distance from
the selected site. The historical analysis was performed for earthquake events with mag-
nitude greater than 4.0 during the past 200 years and occurring within a 65-mile radius.
A total of 397 seismic events were located within the above parameters. Based on the his-
torical analysis described, the Storage Facility site has been subject to a maximum level of
groundshaking as the result of a November 22, 1800 earthquake of 6.5 magnitude. This
earthquake event was centered approximately 10 miles fiom the center of the site. The corre-
sponding peak ground acceleration for this event is estimated to be 0.25 g.
7.2.2. Deterministic Analysis
Deterministic seismicity was evaluated with the EQFAULT computer program which
utilizes a digitized map of known active earthquake faults and an updated catalog of the
estimated Probable and Credible Earthquakes, The deterministic analysis was performed
for all known active faults within a specified a radius of 65 miles.
Based on the analysis described, 18 active faults were located within 65 miles of the
Storage Facility Site. The site is subject to a Maximum Probable Earthquake of 5.9
Magnitude along the Rose Canyon Fault located approximately 7.5 miles (12 km) to the
southwest. The corresponding Peak Ground Acceleration is 0.18 g. The Probable
Earthquake is defined as the maximum earthquake that could occur within a 100-year
interval along a specific fault or segment of a specific fault.
7.2.3. Effective Ground Acceleration
The effective ground acceleration is associated with the part of significant ground motion
which contains repetitive strong-energy shaking and which may produce structural de-
formation. As such, the effective ground acceleration is often referred to as the
Repeatable High Ground Acceleration (RHGA). Based on the above, the site has been
subject to a historical Repeatable High Ground Acceleration (RHGA) up to 0.18 g and is
subject to a Probable RHGA up to 0.12 g. Detailed information regarding seismicity is
earthquake maps, comparison of maximum earthquakes and seismic recurrence curve.
contained in Appendix C, including: deterministic site parameters, fault and historical -
99519CR1 4
City of Carlsbad
Fire Station No. 5 Storage Facility Project
May 25,2000
Project No. 99-519C
7.3. Hazard Assessment
7.3.1. Seismically-Induced Settlement
In general, the supporting soils are anticipated to be a combination of cohesive fill mate-
rials underlain by dense granite rock. Based on the anticipated soil characteristics and
earthquake effect, seismically induced settlement could be anticipated on the order one-
half (1/2) inch. Structures should be designed in accordance with the applicable building
codes and in consideration of anticipated seismically induced settlement.
7.3.2. Liquefaction
Groundwater was not encountered within the explored depths. Based upon the granular
and well-graded nature of the surficial soils, shallow depth to bedrock, and the absence
of near-surface groundwater, the potential for liquefaction affecting the site is considered
very low.
7.3.3. Lurching and Shallow Ground Rupture
Because of the proximity of the active Rose Canyon Fault and the seismicity of the area
in general, shallow ground rupture and/or ground lurching, although not likely, is still a
possibility at this site. As such, consideration should be given to providing flexible lines
and connections for primary and service utilities such as gas and water.
7.3.4. LandslidingRock Falls
At the time of our investigation, there was no evidence that landslides exist within or
immediately adjacent to the project site, It should be noted that landslides are relatively
uncommon within the granitic rock types observed during this investigation.
7.3.5. Tsunamis and Seiches
The proposed development is not anticipated to be subject to inundation by tsunamis or
seiches due to its distance from the ocean and/or any contained bodies of water.
7.4. UBC Seismic Design Parameters
A review of the active fault maps pertaining to the site indicates the Rose Canyon Fault is lo-
cated approximately 7.5 miles (12 kilometers) southwest of the subject site. Ground shaking
fiom this fault and is the most likely event affecting the site. The proposed building should be
designed in accordance with seismic design requirements of the 1997 edition of the Uniform
Building Code or the Structural Engineers Association of California using the following crite-
ria:
99519CRI 5
City of Carlsbad May 25,2000
Fire Station No. 5 Storage Facility Project Project No. 99-519C
-
Parameter
Seismic Zone Factor, Z
Soil Profile Type
Seismic Coefficient, Ca
Seismic Coefficient, 01
Near-Source Facto#, -- Na
Near-Source Factor, Nv
2-e
Seismic Factors
I .. ’ Value UBC Reference
0.4 Table 16-1
sc Table 16-J
0.40 Table 16-4
0.56 Table 16-R
1 .o Table 16-S
33 Table 16-T
BSeismicSource ~ ~~ I B I Table 16-U I
If site-dependent earthquake response spectra or other specific design parameters are consid-
ered necessary by the project structural engineer or are required by the local government
agency with jurisdiction over the project, the geotechnical engineer should be promptly in-
formed for fbrther evaluation. In addition, design of structures should comply with the
requirements of the governing building codes and standard practices of the Structural Engi-
neers Association of California.
8. LABORATORY TESTING
As part of our evaluation, a supplemental laboratory testing program was conducted to establish
the pertinent engineering characteristics of the foundation materials. The laboratory testing pro-
gram included supplementary visual classification, Atterberg limits, direct shear, expansion index,
moisture content, moisture and density, maximum density, pH, resistivity, and 200 wash. The re-
sults of the laboratory tests are summarized in Appendix B - Laboratory Test Results.
9. GEOTECHNICAL EVALUATION
Based on our investigation and evaluation of the collected information, we conclude that the pro- ,
posed development is feasible from a geotechnical standpoint provided the recommendations
contained in this report will be properly implemented during construction. Earthwork at this site
is anticipated to basically consist of overexcavation, recompaction and import fill placement
earthwork to create a level building pad. The primary consideration is the presence of loose un-
documented fill, and moderately expansive soils near the surface. Guidefines for remedial grading
are presented in the Grading and Earthwork section of this report.
--
Based on the moderately-expansive nature of the area soils, and our understanding that several
feet of soil will be imported to build up the pad, it is our opinion that structural foundations may
consist of conventional reinforced spread footings. Based upon the current development plans it
is anticipated that the foundations will be supported entirely by properly compacted fill. Recom- -
99519CRI 6
City of Carlsbad
Fire Station No. 5 Storage Facility Project
May 25,2000
Project No. 99-5 19C
mendations and criteria for foundation design are contained in the Foundation and Slab Recom-
mendations section of this report.
9.1. Expansive Soils
According to our test results, the soils at this site exhibit moderate expansion characteristics.
The design criterion presented in this report assumes that foundations will be supported by
several feet of non-expansive soils, underlain by the soils encountered on site. Based on the
geotechnicd considerations, slab and foundation design should incorporate conventional re-
inforcement, described herein as a minimum.
9.2. Compressible Soils
Our field observations and testing indicated that the underlying fill soils and residual soil are
compressible. Following implementation of the earthwork recommendations presented herein,
the potential for significant soil compression resulting from the anticipated earthwork con-
struction is estimated to be low.
9.3. Corrosive Soils
The corrosion potential of the site subgrade soils was analyzed using the results of a sample
of the fill soil. Laboratory testing was performed to evaluate pH, resistivity, sulfate and chlo-
ride content. The results of our minimum resistivity tests indicated a minimum electrical
resistivity of 560 ohm-cm, which is considered severely corrosive to ferrous metals. The pH
was measured at 7.40, which is generally neutral. The chloride content of the soil sample
tested indicated 190 ppm, which is considered very corrosive to ferrous metals. The sulfate
content of the soil sample tested indicated that 440 ppm, which is considered negligibly to
moderately corrosive to concrete. We recommend that corrosion protection of buried metal
utilities be as recommended by the project architect or civil designer.
9.4. Rippability
From our investigation, we conclude that a majority of the material within the proposed area
of development may be excavated with moderate ripping to depths ranging from five to ten
feet below existing grade. Heavy ripping, blasting or rock breaking would possibly be re-
quired where excavations significantly exceed 10 to 1 5 feet. Observations and drilling
indicate that hard rock is present at relatively shallow depths and that significant quantities
and sizes of boulders should be anticipated in the upper five to ten feet.
As observed in outcrops and at the drill locations, the fresh or unweathered granitic rock is within
20 feet of ground surface. Although we do not anticipate the need to excavate this material, it
should be noted that if excavation were necessary for installation of utility lines or otherwise, this
material would likely require blasting. The drillers indicated the presence of small boulders or
“floaters” that may be removed during grading. Single-shank ripping may be required locally, if
grading extends beneath the residual soil, into the granitic rock.
99Jl9cRI 7
City of Carlsbad
Fire Station No. 5 Storage Facility Project
May 25,2000
Project No. 99-519C
10. GRADING AND EARTHWORK RECOMMENDATIONS
Based upon our understanding of the preliminary plans and the information obtained during the
field investigation, we anticipate that the structure will be founded on continuous spread footings
that are supported entirely by compacted fill soil. The following grading and earthwork recom-
mendations are based upon the limited geotechnical investigation performed and preliminary
designs. TESD should review the final plans for conformance with the earthwork and foundation
recommendations provided herein, prior to construction bidding, or start of construction.
10.1. Clearing and Grubbing
All areas to be graded or to receive fill and structural improvements should be cleared of
surface obstructions, including root systems for any existing large trees. Debris and vegeta-
tion from the clearing operations should be properly disposed of off-site.
The proposed area of development should be thoroughly inspected for any possible buried
objects, which need to be rerouted or removed prior to the inception of, or during grading.
All holes, trenches, or pockets left by the removal of these objects should be properly back-
filled with compacted fill materials as recommended in the Method and Criteria of
Compaction section of this report.
- 10.2. Structural Improvement of Soils
Information obtained from our excavations, laboratory analysis, and visual observations indi-
cate that the undocumented fill and topsoil is in a loose or unstable state. Based upon the soil
characteristics and anticipated foundation design, we recommend the following:
In areas where fill or structural improvements are planned, such as building or parking ar-
eas all loose undocumented fill and topsoil should be completelv removed to firm natural
soils. The removal depths are likely on the order of five to ten feet below ground surface,
and should extend five feet, or more, laterally beyond the edges of the structure. The an-
ticipated depth and limits of soil removal are indicated on the excavation logs, Appendix
B of this report. The Geotechnical Engineer shall evaluate the depth and lateral limits of
the overexcavation required during construction.
0 We do not anticipate a cut/fill transition. However, in order to mitigate a potential transi-
tional bearing condition beneath the structure, overexcavation of "cut" portion of the pad,
if encountered, should be conducted. The overexcavation should be completed to ap-
proximateIy 2 feet below the bottom of the deepest foundation. The Geotechnical
Engineer shall evaluate the depth of the overexcavation required during construction.
0 Removals in non-structural areas that are underlain by natural soils, such as hardscape
and driveway areas, should be overexcavated to a depth of 2 feet, or more, below existing
grade or 6 inches below the proposed subgrade, whichever is greater.
99519CR1 8
..-
City of Carlsbad
Fire Station No. 5 Storage Facility Project '
May 25,2000
Project No. 99-5 19C
0 On-site, moderately expansive soils utilized as fill should be moisture-conditioned to two
percent above optimum moisture content, or greater, and compacted to at least 90 per-
cent relative compaction according to test method ASTM D-1557. The required degree
of compaction required may be increased to improve fill performance or reduce settle-
ment potential as evaluated by the Geotechnical Engineer.
0 The foundation recommendations, which are presented in this report, assume that foot-
ings will be constructed within properly compacted fill. Prior to the placement of
reinforcement and concrete, a representative from TESD should review the bottom of ex-
cavations.
10.3. Cut/Fill Transitions
Cut/fill transitions are not anticipated. If a cutlfill transition is encountered during grading,
the cut side of the pad should be overexcavated to two feet, or more, below bottom of foot-
ings. The fill should then be placed in accordance with the recommendations presented
herein.
10.4. Methods and Criteria of Compaction
Compacted fills should consist of approved soil material that is free of oversized rock, trash,
debris, roots, vegetation or other deleterious materials. Fill soils should be compacted by
suitable compaction equipment in uniform loose lifts of 6 to 8 inches. Unless otherwise
specified by the Geotechnical Engineer, fill soils subjected to recompaction should be mois-
ture-conditioned at optimum moisture content, or greater and recompacted to a minimum of
90 percent of the Maximum Dry Density per ASTM D-1557 test method. Moderately expan-
sive soils, including the fill soils encountered during our evaluation, should be moisture-
conditioned to two percent above optimum moisture content, or greater, as specified herein.
The on-site soils, aRer being processed to remove the aforementioned deleterious materials,
may be used for recompaction purposes. Should imported fill be planned, the intended
sources of importation should be evaluated and approved by TESD prior delivery. Imported
fill should be granular and non-expansive, with an Expansion Index of 20, or less.
10.5. Placement of Oversized Rock
Materials used in the upper three feet of structural building pads should be free of rocks and
debris in excess of 3-inch dimension. This select fill should also extend a minimum of five feet
laterally outside the structural footprint. Due to the limited amount of grading anticipated for
this project, we recommend that oversized material encountered during removals be sepa-
rated and hauled offsite to a suitable location.
As an alternative, the following recommendations may be considered. Material up to 12-inch
dimension may be placed below 3 feet from finish grade, but must remain at least ten feet lat-
99519cRI 9
City of Carlsbad
Fire Station No. 5 Storage Facility Project
May 25,2000
Project No. 99-519C
erally from the face of permanent slopes and should also not be placed within the alignment
of proposed utilities.
Oversized material fiom 12 to 48 inches in dimension may be placed in an approved non-
structural fill area. Oversized material less than 24 inches should be placed in windrows sur-
rounded by granular fiU. The rock windrows should be flooded with water to facilitate filling
of voids. Rocks larger than 24 inches should be individually placed and backfiled as directed
by the Geotechnical Engineer. Care should be taken to avoid nesting of oversize rocks and no
large rock should be placed within 10 feet of any slope face. The non-structural rockfill
should be capped with a minimum of three feet of fill containing no rocks greater than 6-inch
in maximum dimension.
10.6. Permanent Slopes
No significant permanent cut-slopes are anticipated to be constructed during grading.
10.7. Temporary Slopes and Cuts
For the excavation of foundation or utility trenches, temporary vertical cuts to a maximum of
four feet may be conducted in fill and natural soil. Any temporary cuts beyond the above
height constraint should be shored or fbrther laid back following a 1 : 1 (horizontal: vertical)
slope ratio, and should not exceed a total height of 10 feet. OSHA requirements and other
regional safety measures should be strictly followed during earthwork construction.
10.8. Standard Grading Recommendations
Grading and earthwork should be conducted in accordance with the standard-of-practice
methods for the City of Carlsbad, the requirements of the Uniform Building Code, and the
County of San Diego Grading Ordinances. Additionally, we have incorporated our Standard
Specifications for Grading Projects as Appendix D.
11. FOUNDATION AND SLAB RECOMMENDATIONS
The foundation design recommendations herein are llminimums" in keeping with the current stan-
dard-of-practice. They do not preclude more restrictive criteria of the governing agencies or
structural considerations. The Structural Engineer should evaluate the foundation configurations
and reinforcement requirements for structural loading, concrete shrinkage and temperature
stresses. All design and site development criteria should conform to the minimum design re-
quirements provided in the current edition of the Uniform Building Code (UBC).
11.1. Conventional Foundations
A continuous spread footing is suitable for support of the proposed building. All footings
should be founded entirely in properly compacted fill as described in the Cut/Fill Transitions
section of this report. The footing dimensions, reinforcement and other structural criteria
presented below are based on geotechnical considerations are not intended to be in lieu of
necessary requirements of the Structural Engineer.
City of Carlsbad
Fire Station No. 5 Storage Facility Project
May 25,2000
Project No. 99-5 1,9C
Exterior footings for the structwe should be embedded a minimum ofh4 incheshelow lowest
adjacent grade, at a minimu-y! width of --L- 1 -@&res. Excavations shouRl be trimmed "neat",
square and level with no loose deM, jrmrrt6concrete placement,
It is recommended that all exterior footings be reinforced with a minimum of four No. 5 steel
, reinforcing bars placed horizontally in the footing, two near the top and two near the bottom.
Interior footings should be similarly reinforced with four No. 5 rebar. The above reinforce-
ment is based on soil characteristics and is not intended to supersede the requirements of the
structural engineer.
Continuous fo&ngs, which support the walls, may utilize an allowable soil bearing pressure
at 2,000 psf (24-inch depth, 15-inch width). The bearing pressures provided assume the
foainge ~LK founded in properly compacted fill. The calculated bearing value incorporates a
factor-of-safety of 3, in keeping with the standard-of-practice, and may be increased one-
third (1/3) when considering transient loading conditions such as seismic impact or wind load.
The project structural engineer should be notified for additional recommendations, given the
moderately expansive soils anticipated near the bottoms of the foundations.
11.2. Interior Slabs on Grade
Lightly loaded interior slabs should be a minimum thickness of 4 inches. Minimum rein-
forcement should consist of No. 4 rebar spaced on 16-inch centers each way. The slab
reinforcement should be suspended at or above mid-height in the slab.
The slab should be constructed on a bed of sand consisting of a minimum of two inches of
clean sand. If a moisture barrier is needed, the clean sand should be underlain 10-mil visqueen
sheet. A minimum 4-inch thick layer of free-draining coarse sand, gravel or crushed rock
should fbrther underlie "moisture-sensitive" slab areas. Before placement, the material should
be approved by TESD's representative. Please note that these recommendations will inhibit
moisture vapor transmission, but will not prohibit moisture vapor transmission. To fbrther re-
duce transmission,. floors should be sealed with a suitable sealant. The flooring manufacturer
or a flooring expert should be consulted for additional recommendations.
It is recommended that near-surface soil in areas to receive concrete should be moist prior to
concrete placement. The intention of subgrade moistening is to reduce the potential for
shrinkage of the concrete su~ace due to rapid water loss and curing.
11.3. Exterior Fiatwork
Exterior concrete flatwork will substantially consist of patio slabs and walkways, and are
typically considered "non-critical" appurtenances. They are, however, very susceptible to
cracking as a result of concrete curing shrinkage, the cyclic action of subgrade saturation and
drying, and the detrimental effects of expansive subgrade. In order to reduce the potential for
problems, we recommend that any exterior flatwork have a net thickness of 4 inches. The
99519cRI 11
'1
3
City of Carlsbad
Fire Station No. 5 Storage Facility Project
subgrade soil should be moistened to minimum depth of 12 inches prior to concrete place-
ment . .<
In addition, flatwork should be designed with control and/or expansion joints at least every
12 feet. Narrow slabs, such as sidewalks, should be provided with joints more often. Where
flatwork adjoins the structure, it is recommended that a suitable separation material be used.
Joints should be designed in accordance with the American Concrete Institute (ACI 302.1R).
It should be noted that even when these recommendations are followed, concrete cracking
and minor differential movement is still likely to occur. This should be anticipated and does
not necessarily constitute failure of the concrete. If these conditions are not acceptable, more
restrictive subgrade preparation and reinforcement recommendations can be provided.
1-
11.4. Concrete
Concrete for use in the structure should be constructed with Type II or V cement. The mix
designs should be proportioned wit a maximum watedcement ratio of 0.50 1b.flb. Other rec-
ommendations and parameters should be as provided by the project structural engineer.
11.5. Settlement
The following estimate for settlement is based upon construction of a compacted fill pad, as
described herein. While subjected to structural loading, a total settlement up to 1-inch should
be anticipated, with corresponding differential settlement up to 1/2-inch across the structural
span. The values for normal settlement (structure adjustment) assume that compressible un-
documented fill and topsoil is completely removed from beneath the structural area, and that
overexcavation of the "cut" building pad, if encountered, is conducted to mitigate the poten-
tial for adverse transitions. It is also assumed that proper surface drainage is implemented to
prevent soil saturation.
12. ADDITIONAL RECOMMENDATIONS
12.1. Pavement Design
A small section of portland cement concrete pavement will be constructed between the exist-
ing pavement and the proposed building. That pavement section should be designed during
construction when the subgrade soils are exposed and can be evaluated in that area.
12.2. Retaining Walls
No retaining walls were anticipated for this project. Accordingly, evaluation of retaining wall
design parameters was beyond our anticipated scope of services.
12.3. Trench Backfill
Trench excavations for utility lines that extend under structural areas should be properly
backfilled and compacted, in accordance with guidelines set by the City of Carlsbad, Uniform
99519cRl 12
City of Carlsbad
Fire Station No. 5 Storage Facility Project
May 25,2000
Project No. 99-519C
BuiIding Code, and discussed herein. Utilities should be properly bedded and backfilled with
clean sand or approved granular soil to a &@th of at least 1-foot over the pipe. This backfill
should be uniformly moisture-conditioned md compacted to a firm condition for both vertical
and lateral pipe support. The remainder of the backfill may be typical on-site soil or low-
expansive import which should be placed at or above optimum moisture content in lifts not
exceeding 8 inches in thickness and mechanically compacted to a least 90 percent relative
compaction.
9. .+.'
12.4. Surface Drainage
Drainage should be designed to collect and direct surface waters away from structure and
into approved drainage facilities. For earth areas, a positive surface gradient of at least 2
percent should be maintained. Exposed areas within 5 feet of structures should be directed
'laway'' at a minimum surface gradient of 3 percent in order to reduce saturation of founda-
tion soils. Drainage patterns approved at the time of grading should be maintained
throughout the life of the development.
L
12.5. Plan Review. md Geotechnical Observations
When the grading and foundation plans for this project are completed, thev should be re-
viewed by TESD-for- compliance with the recommendations herein. Observation by TESD's
geu&cU representative is essential during grading to confirm conditions anticipated by
the preliminary investigation, to adjust designs to actual field conditions, and to observe that
grading proceeds in general accordance with the recommendations provided herein. In addi-
tion, foundation excavations should be reviewed by TESD prior to the placement of forms,
reinforcement, or concrete for conformance with the plans.
13. . CLOSURE
13.1. Limits of Investigation
Our investigation was performed using the skill and degree of care ordinarily exercised, under
similar circumstances, by reputable soils engineers and geologists practicing in this or similar
localities. No other warranty, expressed or implied, is made as to the conclusions and profes-
sional advice included in this report. This report is prepared for the sole use of our client and
may not be assigned to others without the written consent of the client and Testing Engineers - San Diego, Inc.
The samples taken and used for testing, and the observations made, are believed representa-
tive of site conditions; however, soil and geologic conditions can vary significantly between
exploratory excavations and surface exposures. As in most major projects, conditions re-
vealed by construction excavations may vary with preliminary findings. If this occurs, a
representative of TESD should evaluate the conditions encountered, and provide revised rec-
ommendations, as necessary.
rc
99519CRI 13
City of Carlsbad
Fire Station No. 5 Storage Facility Project
May 25,2000
Project No. 99-5 19C
This report is issued with the understanding that it is the responsibility of the owner, or their
representative, to ensure that the information and recommendations contained herein are
brought to the attention of the project architect and engineer. Appropriate recommendations
should be incorporated into the structural plans. The necessary steps should be taken to see
that the contractor and subcontractors carry out such recommendations in the field.
The findings of this report are valid as of this present date. However, changes in the condi-
tions of a property can occur with the passage of time, whether they are due to natural
processes or the works of man on this or adjacent properties. In addition, changes in appli-
cable or appropriate standards may occur from legislation or the broadening of knowledge.
Accordingly, the findings of this report may be invalidated wholly or partially by changes out-
side of our control. Therefore, this report is subject to review and should be updated after a
period of three years.
13.2. Additional Services '
The review of plans and specifications, field observations and testing under our direction is an
integral part of the recomniendations made in this report. If TESD is not retained for these
services, the client agrees to assume our responsibility for any potential claims that may arise
during construction. Observation and testing are additional services that may be provided by
our firm, and should be budgeted within the cost of development.
99519cRI 14
City of Carlsbad May 25,2000
Fire Station No. 5 Storage Facility Project Project No. 99-5 19C
14. SELECTED REFERENCES
Building News, Inc., 1999, 'Greenbook'' Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction,
California Department of Transportation, 1990, "Highway Design Manual," Fourth Edition, Dated
2000 Edition
July 1
California Division of Mines and Geology, 1966, "Geologic Map of California, Santa Ana Sheet,"
Scale 1:250,000
California Division of Mines and Geology, 1998, "Maps of Known Active Fault Near-Source
Zones in California and Adjacent Portions of Nevada," Published by International Confer-
ence of Building Officials
City of Carlsbad, 1993, "Standard's for Design and Construction of Public Works Improvements in
the City of Carlsbad," dated April 20
Department of the Navy, Naval Facilities Endneering Command, Pavements, Design Manual 5.4
Gillis & Associates, 2000, "Carlsbad Station 5 Storage Facility," Job No. 9818, Sheet A-1, dated
International Conference of Building Officials, 1997, "Uniform Building Code, Volume 2, Struc-
Kleinfelder, Inc., 1997, "Limited Geotechnical Exploration for Carlsbad Skateboard Park, Orion
The Thomas Guide, San Diego County, Year 2000, p. 11 27
April 21
tural Engineering Design Provisions,"
Way, Carlsbad, California," Job No. 5 1-4640-01 , dated December 1
Testing Engineers - San Diego, Inc., 1987, "Geotechnical Investigation, Carlsbad Safety Center,
Phase 111, Carlsbad, California," Job No. 7079, dated February 17
995 19CR I 15
N
(elereme: The Thomas Guide, San Diego County, Year 2000, p. 1127
I Site Location Map
1 Carlsbad Fire Station No. 5 Storage Facilitj
Carlsbad, California -. TEqT!h!G FNG!NEE:RS - SAN DIEGO, INC. I
I L.
Reference: "Carlsbad Station 5 Storage Building.'ZOOO, Gillis & Assoclates Architecls, Job No. 9818, Sheet A-1, daled April 21 - Boring Location Map
Carlsbad Fire Station No. 5 Storage Facility
. FST'b'y: =~~~~blFFFls - SPN lyEG0. IMC. Carlsbad. California
City of Carlsbad
Fire Station No. 5 Storage Facility Project
May 24,2000
Project No. 99-519C
?-
APPENDIX A - FIELD EXPLORATION LOGS
99519CR1
TESTING ENGINEERS - SAN DIEGO
Record of Subsurface Exploration
Id,pcf
113.3
114.2
117.0
-.
r.c. %
90.4
Boring B1
Date of Exploration: 41 27 IO0
Project Name: Carlsbad Fire Station No. 5 Storage Facility Project No.: 99519C
RDPI JM Location: 2650 Orion Way Carlsbad, California Logged By:
moist, stiff, scattered gravel, iron
oxide stains, micaceous.
Refusal at 4 Ft. on boulder. Moved over
Hard 1
10 - BIDUAL SOL: Red-brown clayey
SAND; moist, loose, with scattered
gravel, scattered pinholes and rootlets.
012 ft.: Drilling becoming more difficiilt
granitic rock.
014 ft.: Drilling becoming more difficult
still.
GRANITIC ROCK: Orangish brown,
intensely weathered to decomposed
GRANITIC ROCK; damp, medium to
coarse grained, micaceous, iron oxide
Stains.
Mottled light gray and orange brown.
- -
15 - extremely weathered decomposed -
-
20 - - -
-
- - 25
30 -- 1
Total Depth: 31.0 ft.
No Groundwater Encountered
No caving observed
Backfilled with excavated material
35
Bulk
2-5 ft.
Drive
5-65 ft.
Drive
10-11.5 ft.
Drive
Bulk
15-15.5 ft.
(17-20 ft.]
Drive
(20-21 ft.:
Drive
I30-3l ft.
48
16
50/5 in.
10014 in.
5013in.
sc
- - -
ne, % -
15.2
- 34.1
-
12.4
12.3 -
- -
BORINGLOG.XLS
TESTING ENGINEERS - SAN DIEGO
Record of Subsurface Exploration
Boring B2
Date of Exploration: 41 27 IO0
Project Name: Carlsbad Fire Station No. 5 Storage Facility Project No.: 99519C
Location: 2650 Orion Way Grlsbad, California Logged By: RDPI JM
SAND; moist, stiff.
@ 2.5 ft.: Refusal on boulders. Boring
5 moved three times.
- mUAL SOIL: Red-brown clayey
SAND; moist, loose; with scattered
gravel. - \GRANITIC ROCK: Mottled orange- - brown decomposed GRANITE; damp, - intensely weathered to decomposed,
- IO - -
15 - micaceous. - - - - - 20 - - - - - - 25 Total Depth: 20.5 ft. - No Groundwater Encountered - No caving observed
Excavated material
-
- - 30 - - - - - - 35
- -
(1-5 ft.)
Drive
Bulk
Drive
10-10.5 ft.)
j5-6.5 ft.)
(8-12 ft.)
Drive
020.5 ft.:
- - Blow
count -
20
10 I
10 in.
100 I
5 in.
iialysis Remark
Id,pcf r.c. 940
BORINCL0C.XI.S
City of Carlsbad May 25,2000
Fire Station No. 5 Storage Facility Project Project No. 99-5 19C
APPENDIX B - LABORATORY TEST RESULTS
In-Place Moisture and Density Tests
The moisture content and dry density of relatively undisturbed samples obtained from the ex-
ploratory excavations were evaluated in general accordance with ASTM D 2937-83. The test
results are presented in the Field Exploration Logs (Appendix A).
Soil Corrosivity Tests
Soil pH and resistivity tests were performed on a selected soil sample in general accordance
with Caltrans Test Method (CTM) 643. The chloride content of the selected sample was
evaluated in general accordance with CTM 422. The sulfate content of the selected sample
was evaluated in general accordance with CTM 417. The test results are presented in Table 1.
Expansion Index
An evaluation was performed on a selected soil sample in general accordance UBC Standard
18-2. A specimen was molded under a specific compactive energy at approximately 50 per-
cent saturation. The prepared 1-inch thick by 4-inch dicmeter specimen was loaded with a
surcharge of 144 pounds per square foot and was inundated with tap water. Readings of
volumetric swell were made for a period of 24 hours. The results of this test are presented in
Table 2.
Gradation Analysis
An evaluation was performed on a selected soil sample in general accordance with ASTM
D422-63. The test results are presented on Plate 3. The test results were utilized in evaluating
the soil classifications in accordance with the Unified Soil Classification System.
Atterberg Limits
Testing was performed on a selected sample of soil to evaluate the liquid limit, plastic limit,
and plasticity index in general accordance with ASTM D 4318-93. The results of the test
were utilized to evaluate the soil classification in accordance with the Unified Soil Classifica-
tion System. The test results are presented Plate 3.
Maximum Dry Density and Optimum Moisture Content Tests
The maximum dry density and optimum moisture content of a selected soil sample was evalu-
ated in general accordance with ASTM D1557-91. The results of this test are presented on
Plate 4.
Direct Shear Test
Direct Shear testing was performed on a remolded sample of soil in general accordance with
ASTM D 3080-90 to evaluate the shear strength characteristics of the selected sample. The
sample was inundated during shearing to represent adverse field conditions. The test results
are presented on Plate 5.
City of Carlsbad
Fire Station No. 5 Storage Facility Project
Boring
No.
B-2
May 25,2000
Project No. 99-5 19C
Depth PH Resistivity Sulfate Content Chloride
(ft4 (ohm-cm) (PPm) Content
1-5 7.4 560 190 440
(PPm)
Table 1 - Summarv of Corrosivitv Test Results
? Boring Depth Description Expansion Expansion
Index Pot en tial
€3-2 1-5 Olive brown, clayey SAND 62 Medium
No. (ft4
x
- Particle Size Distribution Report
Sample No.: 54404 Source of Sample: Date: 4l27100
Location: B-2 ElevJDepth: 5' - 6.5' -
Client: CtTY OF CARLSBAD
I Soil Descrbtion
Clayey sand
Atterbera Limits
Coefficient5
PL= 21 LL= 49 PI= 28
D85= 2.10 060' 0.568 D50= 0.1 83
D30' Dl 5= DI o= C,= C,=
Classification uscs= sc AASHTO=
..-- ,
Remarks'
mwc;,.+-? P II n 1 - TC 2 $ n c * rrTv CrkI-Cn PLI b r- rr( Tr!i,fcc;TTr.ATln\T
I1 I
COMPACTION TEST REPORT
Project No.: 99-5 19C
Project: CARLSBAD SAFETY CENTER PHASE 111 INVESTIGATION
-
Date: 4/21/00
location: B-l
ElevJDepth: 2' - 5'
Remarks: TESD LAB NO. 54396
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
Description: BROWN SILTY CLAYEY SAND
Classifications -
Nat. Moist. =
Liquid Limit =
Yo > N0.4 = %
USCS: AASHTO:
Sp.G. =
Plasticity Index =
Yo N0.200 =
I TEST RESULTS I
~~ I Maximum dry density = 125 pcf 1 I Ontimum moisture = 1 I I
TESTING ENG/NEERS - SAN DIEGO
ESD JOB NO:
CLIENT:
99-519C
0
DIRECT SHEAR TEST DATA
TESD LAB NO.: 54396
PROJECT
SAMPLE LOCATION:
CARLSBAD SAFETY CENTER, PHASE 111 INVESTIGATION
6.1 Q 2' - 5'
DIRECT SHEAR GRAPH
2.50
2.00
1.50 E a
a ti
S I, 1.00
0.50
y ;a.517sx + 0.124 Rp=O&9J 0.50 1.00 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 3.50 4.00 4.50
NORMAL PRESSURE
CALCULATED DATA
[INITIAL. after consolidationlsaturation
WET DENSITY
DRY DENSITY
MOISTURE
COMPRESSION(-) or EXPANSION (+)
FINAL, at failure
WET DENSITY
DRY DENSITY
MOISTURE
COMPRESSION(-) or EXPANSION (+)
pcf
pcf
%
%
pcf
PCf %
%
108.3 #DIVIO! #DIVIO!
11.6% #DNlO! #DIV/O!
2.9% 1.3% 1.7%
129.9
1oe.o #DIVIO! #DIVIO!
20.3% #DIV/O! #DIV/OI
NORMAL PRESSURE ksf 1.04 2.06 4.09
SHEAR STRENGTH ksf 0.65 1.22 2.23
FRICTION ANGLE = 27.4 degrees
COHESION = 0.12 ksf
PLATE 5
City of Carlsbad
Fire Station No. 5 Storage Facility Project
May 24,2000
Project No. 99-5 19C
.-
APPENDIX C - SEISMIC ANALYSIS
99519CRI
DATE: Wednesday, May 24, 2000
..................................... * *
EQFAULT
Ver. 2.20
* * .....................................
(Estimation of Peak Horizontal Acceleration
From Digitized California Faults)
SEARCH PERFORMED FOR: Testing Engineers - San Diego
JOB NUMBER: 99519C
JOB NAME: Carlsbad Fire Sta. No. 5 Storage Facility
SITE COORDINATES:
LATITUDE: 33.138 N
LONGITUDE: 117.266 W
SEARCH RADIUS: 65 mi
ATTENUATION RELATION: 2) Campbell & Bozorgnia (1994) Horiz. - Soft Rock
UNCERTAINTY (M=Mean, S=Meantl-Sigma): M
SCOND: 0
COMPUTE PEAK HORIZONTAL ACCELERATION
FAULT-DATA FILE USED: CALIFLT.DAT
SOURCE OF DEPTH VALUES (A=Attenuation File, F-Fault Data File): A
PEAK
SITE
ACC. g
0.012
0.040
----_-
------
IHOT S-BUCK RDG.(S.Jacinto) I 49 ( 7811 7.00 0.0371 V I] 6.101 0.017 IV
-END OF SEARCH- 18 FAULTS FOUND WITHIN THE SPECIFIED SEARCH RADIUS.
THE ROSE CANYON FAULT IS CLOSEST TO THE SITE.
IT IS ABOUT 7.4 MILES AWAY.
LARGEST MAXIMUM-CREDIBLE SITE ACCELERATION: 0.351 g
LARGEST MAXIMUM-PROBABLE SITE ACCELERATION: 0.182 gD
DATE: Wednesday, May 24, 2000
.......................................
EQSEARCH
Ver. 2.20
* * .......................................
(Estimation of Peak Horizontal Acceleration
From California Earthquake Catalogs)
SEARCH PERFORMED FOR: Testing Engineers - San Diego
JOB NUMBER: 99519
JOB NAME: Carlsbad Fire Sta. No. 5 Storage Facility
SITE COORDINATES:.
LATITUDE: 33.138 N
LONGITUDE: 117.266 W
TYPE OF SEARCH: RADIUS
SEARCH RADIUS: 65 mi
SEARCH MAGNITUDES: 4.0 TO 9.0
SEARCH DATES: 1800 TO 2000
ATTENUATION RELATION: 2) 'Campbell & Bozorgnia (1994) Horiz. - Soft Rock
UNCERTAINTY (M=Mean, S=Mean+l-Sigma): M
SCOND: 0
FAULT TYPE ASSUMED (DS-Reverse, SS=Strike-Slip) : DS
COMPUTE PEAK HORIZONTAL ACCELERATION
EARTHQUAKE-DATA FILE USED: ALLQUAKE.DAT
TIME PERIOD OF EXPOSURE FOR STATISTICAL COMPARISON: 25 years
SOURCE OF DEPTH VALUES (A=Attenuation File, ErEarthquake Catalog): A
Page
LONG.
WEST -------
117.300
117 .lo0
117.000
117.170
117.500
117.200
117.170
17.170
17.170
17.170
17 -500
17.200
17.070
17.420
.16.300
.16 -300
.16.200
.16.800
.17.000
.17.900
.17.100
.17.900
.17.600
.17.000
.17.200
.17.400
-17.500
-17.400
~17.400
117.400
L16.700
L16.700
t17.000
L16.600
116.60C
116.60C
117.20C
L16.50C
L16.80C
117.80C
117.801
117. 80t
116.60(
116.80t
116.80(
116.60(
116.60(
116.70(
116.80(
117.00(
117.601
116.901
116.901
116. SO(
117.001
116.901
tia.ooc
- FILE
CODE
DMG
MG I
MG I
T-A
MG I
DMG
T-A
T-A
T-A
T-A
T-A
----
DMG
T-A
T-A
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
MG I
DMG
MGI
DMG
DMG
MGI
MGI
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
MGI
MG I
MG I
MG I
MG I
DMG
MG I
MG I
MG I
MG I
MGI
MGI
MGI
MGI
MGI
MG I
MG I
DMG
MGI
MGI
MG I
MG I
DMG
MG I
1
LAT .
UORTH
33.000
32.800
33.000
2.670
4.000
2.700
2.670
2.670
2.670
2.670
2.250
3.900
3.500
4.000
3.400
2.700
3.200
2. 800
83.800
13.800
13.700
13.700
13. BOO
13.000
12.700
14.000
14.000
13.700
13.700
13.700
13. BOO
$3.800
33.80C
33 .OOO
33.10C
33.10C
33.10c
32.70C
33.50C
33.50C
33.80C
33.80C
33. BO(
33.10(
33.50(
33.50(
33.00(
33.10(
32.701
33.501
33.75(
33. 80(
33.801
33.801
32.601
33.751
33.808
--_---
DATE
__---------
11/22/1600
5/25/1803
9/21/1856
L2/ 0/1856
L2/16/1858
5/27/1862
10/21/1862
1/25/1863
4/15/1865
5/24/1865
1/13/1877
12/19/1880
12/29/1880
4/12/1888
2/ 9/1890
2/24/1892
10/23/1894
12/25/1899
5/22/1902
6/11/1902
7/ 8/1902
9/16/1903
3/ 3/1906
4/19/1906
5/22/1907
7/ 3/1908
4/11/1910
5/13/1910
5/15/1910
8/11/1911
8/11/1911
10/21/1913
12/29/1914
2/16/1915
3/ 4/1915
5/11/1915
9/ 8/1915
9/30/1916
11/26/1916
5/19/1917
5/19/1917
5/20/1917
5/2 8/1917
5/31/1917
6/ 2/1917
6/11/1917
8/19/1917
3/21/1918
3/30/1918
4/2 1 /1918
4/22/1918
4/23/1918
4/29/1918
5/ 3/1918
6/ 6/1918
6/14/1918
5/28/1892
TIME
(GMT)
H M Sec -------
130 0.0
0 0 0.0
730 0.0
0 0 0.0
0 0 0.0
0 0 0.0
0 0 0.0
020 0.0
840 0.0
0 0 0.0
0 0 0.0
0 0 0.0
7 0 0.0
315 0.0
2 6 0.0
720 0.0
115 0.0
3 3 0.0
,225 0.0
740 0.0
245 0.0
945 0.0
.210 0.0
!025 0.0
028 0.0
652 0.C
-255 0.c
757 0.c
620 0.C
.547 0.c
L820 0.C
!340 0.C
938 0.c to 0 0.c
L330 0.C
1250 0.C
1145 O.(
742 O.(
211 O.[
17 5 0.t
635 O.(
719 O.(
945 O.(
1017 O.(
435 0.f
435 0.1
354 0.1
710 0 .I
2325 0.1
16 5 0.1
223225.1
2115 0.
1415 0.
2 0 0.
425 0.
2232 0.
1024 0.
EPTH
(km) __-_
3 .O
7.3
7.3
7.3
3.0
4.0
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
3.5
7.3
7.3
3 .O
3 .O
3 .O
5.0
3 .O
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
3 .E
7.2
7.:
7.:
7.:
7.:
7.:
7 .:
7.:
7 .:
7.:
7 .:
7.:
7 .:
7 .:
7.:
7.:
7:
7 .:
7.
7.
3.
7.
7.
7.
7.
7.
7.
JAKE
VYlG .
6.50
5.00
5.00
5.00
7.00
5.90
5.00
4.30
4.30
5.00
5.00
6.00
4.30
4.30
6.30
6.70
6.30
5.70
6.40
4.30
4.50
4.00
4.00
4.50
4.30
4.60
4.00
5.00
5.00
6.00
4.00
4.50
4 .OO
4.00
4.00
4.00
4.00
4.00
5.00
4.00
4 .OO
4.00
4.00
4 .OO
4.00
4.00
4.00
4.00
4 .OO
4.60
6.80
5.00
4.00
4.00
4.00
5.00
4 .OO
--_--
a,,. I. .
SITE
ACC .
9
0.253
0.020
0.033
0.013
0.025
0.031
0.013
0.008
0.008
0.013
0.005
0.014
0.010
0.003
0.015
0.018
0.014
0.021
0.022
0.003
0.007
0.003
0.003
0.022
0.009
0.004
0.002
0.010
0.010
0.022
0.003
0.004
0.002
0,015
0.005
0.005
0.005
0.007
0.007
0.005
0.003
0.003
0.003
0.005
0.005
0.005
0.004
0.005
0.004
0.008
0.034
0.007
0.003
0.003
0.002
0.008
0.003
.____^_
I ITE
MM
.NT .
IX
IV
V
I11
V
V
I11
I1
I1
I11
I1
IV
I11
I
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
I
I1
I
I
IV
I11
I
I11
I11
IV
I
IV
I1
I1
I1
I1
I1
I1
---
-
-
-
-
I1
I1
I1
I
I1
I
11:
V
I1
I
I
11:
I
-
&,
APPROX .
DISTANCE
mi [kml
10 [ 161
25 [ 411
18 [ 291
33 [ 531
61 981
30 [ 491
33 [ 531
33 [ 531
33 [ 531
33 [ 531
63 [ 1011
53 [ 851
27 [ 441
60 [ 971
59 [ 941
64 [ 1021
62 [ 991
36 [ 571
48 [ 781
59 I 941
40 [ 641
53 [ 861
50 [ 801
18 t 291
30 [ 491
60 [ 971
61 [ 981
40 [ 641
40 [ 641
40 [ 641
56 [ 901
56 [ 901
62 [ 1001
18 [ 291
39 [ 621
39 [ 621
39 [ 621
30 [ 491
51 [ 821
37 [ 591
55 [ 891
55 [ 891
55 [ 891
39 [ 621
37 [ 591
37 [ 591
40 [ 641
39 [ 621
45 [ 721
37 [ 591
----__-__-
45
50
50
50
58
45
50
Page 2 -
FILE
CODE
DMG
DMG
MGI
MG I
DMG
MG I
MGI
MG I
MGI
MG I
DMG
MGI
DMG
DMG
MGI
MGI
MGI
MGI
MGI
DMG
MGI
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
11:
_---
T-A
LAT .
NORTH
33.400
33.200
33.100
32.700
33.500
34.000
33.200
33.800
33.100
33.100
33.100
34.000
33.200
34.000
33.500
33.800
33 -800
33.800
33.800
32.800
33.630
34 .OOO
33.200
33.200
33.800
33.167
33.167
34 .OOO
33.917
33.617
33.750
33.750
33.750
33.750
33.750
33.750
33.600
33.750
33.750
33.750
33.600
33.750
33.750
33.750
33.750
33.750
33.750
33.750
33.750
33.750
33.750
33.750
33.750
33.750
33.750
33.700
33.750
------
LONG.
WEST
116.500
116.700
116.600
117.200
118.250
117.420
116.600
116.900
116.600
116.600
116.600
117,000
117.000
117.250
117.000
117.800
117.800
117.000
117 .BOO
116.800
118.200
117.700
116.300
116.720
116.600
116.500
116.500
117.250
116.750
117.967
118.083
118.083
118.083
118.083
118.083
118.083
118.000
118.083
118.083
118,000
118.083
118.083
118.083
118.083
110.083
118.083
118.083
118.083
118.083
118.083
118.083
118.083
118.083
118.083
118.067
118.083
-------
118. 083
; . :: c
DATE
------_--_-_
10/11/1910
1/ 1/1920
2/ 9/1920
5/20/1920
6/18/1920
9/10/1920
10/12/1920
12/18/1920
8/10/1921
2/ 5/1922
6/30/1923
7/20/1923
7/23/1923
8/ 8/1925
11/ 4/1926
11/ 7/1926
11/ 9/1926
11/10/1926
8/ 14 /1927
9/13/1929
121 311929
5/12/1930
5/12/1930
9/10/1931
6/23/1932
6/23/1932
11/ 1/1932
1/25/1933
3/11/1933
3/11/1933
3/11/1933
3/11/1933
3/11/1933
3/11/1933
3/11/1933
3/11/1933
3/11/1933
3/11/1933
3/11/1933
3/11/1933
3/11/1933
3/11/1933
3/11/1933
3/11/1933
3/11/1933
3/11/1933
3 /11/1933
3/11/1933
3/11/1933
3/11/1933
3 /11/1933
3/11/1933
3/11/1933
3/11/1933
3/11/1933
3/11/1933
a/io/i92i
-. .I
TIME
( GMT )
H M Sec
4 0 0.0
235 0.0
220 0.0
1330 0.0
10 8 0.0
1415 0.0
1748 0 .O
1726 0.0
19 6 0.0
2151 0.0
1915 0.0
022 0.0
7 0 0.0
73026.0
1013 0.0
2238 0.0
1948 0.0
1535 0.0
1723 0.0
1448 0.0
132336.2
9 5 0.0
414 0.0
172548.5
436 0.0
22552.7
23037.1
445 0.0
1444 0.0
154 7.0
2 4 0.0
2 5 0.0
2 9 0.0
210 0.0
211 0.0
216 0.0
217 0.0
222 0.0
227 0.0
230 0.0
231 0.0
252 0.0
257 0.0
258 0.0
259 0.0
3 5 0.0
3 9 0.0
311 0.0
323 0.0
336 0.0
339 0.0
347 0.0
436 0.0
439 0.0
440 0.0
51022.0
513 0.0
:,5 7
--------
3EPTH
(km)
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
6.5
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
3.0
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7,3
3.0
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.1
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.1
7.3
--..--
JUAKE
MAG.
4.00
5.00
4.00
4.00
4.50
4.30
5.30
4.00
4.00
4.00
4.00
4.50
4.00
6.25
4.50
4.60
4.60
4.60
4.60
4.60
4.00
4.00
4.00
4.20
4.00
4.00
4.00
4.00
4.00
6.30
4.90
4.30
5.00
4.60
4.40
4.80
4.50
4.00
4.60
5.10
4.40
4.00
4.20
4.00
4.60
4.20
4.40
4.20
5.00
4.00
4.00
4.30
4.60
4.90
4.70
5.10
4.70
__----
. .,
SITE
ACC .
9
0.003
0.013
0.005
0.007
0.003
0.003
0.013
0.003
0.005
0.005
0.00s
0.003
0.018
0.014
0.011
0.004
0.004
0.004
0.004
0.008
0.002
0.002
0.003
0.007
0.002
0.004
0.004
0.002
0.002
0.018
0.004
0.003
0.005
0.003
0.003
0.004
0.004
0.002
0.003
0.005
0.004
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.003
0.002
0.003
0.002
0.005
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.003
0.004
0.004
0.006
0.004
.------
APPROX .
DISTANCE
mi [kml
48 [ 771
33 531
39 [ 621
30 [ 491
62 [ 1001
60 971
39 [ 621
50 811
39 [ 621
39 I 621
39 [ 621
61 1 991
16 [ 261
60 [ 961
29 471
55 [ 891
55 [ 891
55 [ 891
55 [ 891
36 [ 571
64 [ 1021
65 [ 1041
56 [ 901
32 [ 511
60 [ 961
44 [ 711
44 [ 711
60 [ 961
61 [ 991
52 841
63 [ 102J
63 [ 1021
63 t 1021
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
63 I 1021
53 [ 851
63 1021
63 [ 2021
53 851
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
60 [ 971
63 [ 1021
*; 2, j ' I
___-------_
63 r 1021
Page 3 -
A FILE
CODE
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
c- DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
_---
-
LAT .
NORTH
33.575
33.750
33.750
33.750
33.750
33.750
33.750
33.750
33.683
33 .750
33.7f0
33.750
33.750
33.750
33.700
33.750
33.750
33.750
33.750
33.750
33.750
33.750
33.750
33.750
33.750
33.683
33.733
33.750
33.733
33.733
33.750
33.750
33.750
33.750
33,750
33 a 750
33.750
33.750
33.750
33.750
33.750
33.750
33.750
33.750
33.750
33.750
33.750
33.750
33.75c
33.75c
33.750
33.75c
33.75c
33.75c
33.75c
33.75c
33.75c
------
LONG.
WEST --..----
~17.983
118.083
118.083
~18.083
118.083
tl8.083
118.083
118.083
118.050
118.083
118.083
118.083
L18. 083
118.083
118.067
L18.083
118.083
118 I 083
118.083
118.083
L18.083
L18.083
118,083
118.083
118.083
L18.050
118.100
L18.083
118.100
118 .loo
118.083
118.083
118,083
118.083
118.083
118.083
118.083
118.083
118.083
118.083
118.083
118.083
118.083
118.083
118 .OB3
118.083
118.083
118.083
118.083
118.083
118.083
118.083
118.083
118.083
118.083
118.083
118.083 - .-
DATE
.------___--
3/11/1933
3/11/1933
3/11/1933
3/11/1933
3/11/1933
3/11/1933
3/11/1933
3/11/1933
3/11/1933
3/11/1933
3/31/1933
3/11/1933
3/11/1933
3/11/1933
3/11/1933
3 /11/1933
3/11/1933
3/11/1933
3 / 11 / 19 3 3'
3/11/1933
3/11/1933
3/11/1933
3/11/1933
3/11/1933
3/11/1933
3/11/1933
3/11/1933
3/11/1933
3/11/1933
3/11/1933
3/11/1933
3/11/1933
3/11/1933
3/11/1933
3/11/1933
3/11/1933
3/11/1933
3/11/1933
3/11/1933
3/12/1933
3/12/1933
3/12/1933
3/12/1933
3/12/1933
3/12/1933
3/12/1933
3/12/1933
3 /12/1933
3/12/1933
3/12/1933
3/12/1933
3/12/1933
3/12/1933
3/13/1933
3/13/1933
3 /13 /193 3
3/13 /1933 _. , 7.-
TIME
(GMT) n M Sec .-------
518 4.0
521 0.0
524 0.0
553 0.0
555 0.0
611 0.0
618 0.0
635 0.0
658 3.0
751 0.0
759 0.0
8 8 0.0
832 0.0
837 0.0
85457 .O
910 0.0
911 0.0
926 0.0
-025 0.0
!045 0.0
.1 0 0.0
1129 0.0
L138 0.0
L141 0.0
L147 0.0
L250 0.0
L350 0.0
1357 0.0
1447 0.0
L5 9 0.0
L547 0.0
L653 0.0
L944 o..o
1956 0.0
22 0 0.0
2231 0.0
1232 0.0
1240 0.0
13 5 0.0
027 0.0
034 0.0
448 0.0
546 0.C
6 1 0.G
616 0.C
740 0.C
835 0.c
15 2 0.C
1651 0.C
1738 0.C
1825 0.C
2128 0.c
2354 0.C
343 0.c
432 0.C
617 0.C
131828. C -.
-
IEPTH
(kml ----
6.8
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
5.8
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.1
7.1
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7 *3
7.3
7.2
7.3
7-2
7.2
7 ,2
6.E
..
IUAKE
MAG.
5.20
4.40
4.20
4.00
4 .OO
4.40
4.20
4.20
5.50
4.20
4.10
4.50
4.20
4.00
5.10
5.10
4.40
4.10
4.00
4 .OO
4.00
4.00
4.00
4.20
4.40
4.40
4.40
4.00
4.40
4.40
4 .OO
4.80
4.00
4.20
4.40
4.40
4.10
4.40
4.20
4.40
4 .OO
4.00
4.40
4.20
4.60
4.20
4.20
4.20
4.00
4.50
4.10
4.10
4.50
4.10
4.70
4.00
5.30
-----
i -,
SITE
ACC .
g
0.008
0.003
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.003
0.002
0.002
0.008
0.002
0.002
0.003
0.002
0.002
0.006
0.005
0.003
0.002
0.002
0 .a02
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.003
0.003
0.003
0.002
0.003
0.003
0.002
0.004
0.002
0.002
0.003
0.003
0.002
0.003
0.002
0.003
0.002
0.002
0.003
0.002
0.003
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.003
0.002
0,002
0.003
0,002
0.004
0.002
0.006
._-__--
- P..? I .,
APPROX .
DISTANCE
mi [km]
51 I 821
63 I 1021
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
63 [ IO21
59 951
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
60 [ 971
63 [ 1021
63 I 1021
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
63 1 1021
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
63 I 1021
59 [ 951
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1023
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1023
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
--_-------
63 r 1021
I , r -^-I
Page
33.750
33.750
33.750
33.617
33.750
33.750
33.750
33.750
33.617
33 -750
33.750
33.750
33.750
33.750
33.750
33.750
33.750
33.750
33.750
33.750
33.750
33.750
33.750
33.750
33.750
33.333
33.333
33.617
33.617
33.467
33.567
33.750
33.267
33.717
34.033
33.167
33.500
33.150
33 -600
33.454
33.767
33.561
33.408
33.426
33.368
33.467
33.467
33 -467
33.567
33.167
33.467
32.718
33.617
33.695
33.42~
4
FILE
CODE
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
__--
DMG 133.456
DMG 133.682
LONG.
WEST -------
118.083
118.083
118.083
118.017
118.083
118.083
118.083
118.083
118.017
118.083
118.083
118.083
118.083
118.083
118.083
118.083
118.083
118.083
iia .om
118.083
118.083
118.083
118.083
118.083
118.083
116.30C
116.30C
118.015
118.115
116.632
117.983
118. ooc
117.017
117.51;
117.31;
116.41;
116.91;
116.582
118.01:
116.89E
117.81:
118.05t
116.26:
116.423
116.441
116.58:
116.58:
116.58:
116.49(
117.98:
116.16'
116.58:
118.17:
118.03:
117.51:
116.891
117.55.
~ .,
DATE
-----------
3/13/1933
3/14/1933
3/14/1933
3/14 /1933
3/14/1933
3/15/1933
3 /15/1933
3/15/1933
3/15/1933
3/16/1933
3/16/1933
3/16/1933
3/17/1933
3/18/1933
3/19/1933
3/20/1933
3 /21/1933
3/23/1933
3/23/1933
3/25/1933
3/30/1933
3/31/1933
4/ 1/1933
4/ 2/1933
4/ 2/1933
8/ 5/1933
8/ 6/1933
10/ 2/1933
1/20/1934
2/20/1934
4/17/1934
11/16/1934
6/ 7/1935
6/19/1935
9/ 3/1935
10/14/1935
11/ 4/1935
12/ 2/1935
12/25/1935
7/29/1936
8/22/1936
1/15/1937
3 /25/1937
3/25/1937
3/25/1937
3/26/1937
3/27/1937
3/27/1937
3/29/1937
7/ 7/1937
11/16/1937
4/28/1938
5/21/1938
5/31/1938
6/16/1938
7/ 5/1938
1/ 4/1938
, . I;'. -<
TIME
( GMT 1
H M Sec
1929 0.0
036 0.0
1219 0.0
19 150.0
2242 0.0
2 8 0.0
432 0.0
540 0.0
111332.0
1456 0.0
1529 0.0
1530 0.0
1651 0.0
2052 0.0
2123 0.0
1358 0.0
326 0.0
840 0.0
1831 0.0
1346 0.0
1225 0.0
1049 0.0
642 0.0
8 0 0.0
1536 0.0
2331 0.0
332 0.0
1326 1.0
2117 0.0
1035 0.0
1833 0.0
2126 0.0
__----_-
1633 0.0
1117 o.a
647 0.C
1550 0.C
355 0.c
319 0.0
1715 0.a
142252. @
521 0.c
183547. C
1649 l.E
20 4 8.2
232026. i
2124 0.C
528 0.c
742 O.(
17 316.E
1112 O.(
1057 0.C
029 0.C
6 728.(
944 O.(
83455.1
55916.i
18 655.' .- .. .- I
-
lEPTH
(km)
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.1
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
3 .E
7.2
7.3
7.2
7.2
7.2
7.:
7.:
7 .I
7.:
7.:
7.:
5.t
7.:
7.:
----
IUAKE
MAG.
4.20
4.20
4.50
5.10
4.10
4.10
4.10
4.20
4.90
4.00
4.20
4.10
4.10
4.20
4.20
4.10
4.10
4.10
4.10
4.10
4.40
4.10
4.20
4.00
4.00
4.40
4.70
4.00
4.50
4.00
4 .OO
4.00
4.00
4.00
4.50
4.00
4.50
4.00
4.50
4.00
4.00
4.00
6.00
4.00
4.00
4.00
4.00
4.50
4.00
4.00
4.00
4.50
4.50
4.00
5.50
4.00
4.50
-----
,,-l
SITE
ACC .
g
0.002
0.002
0.003
0.006
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.006
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.003
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.002
0.003
0.004
0.003
0.003
0.004
0.003
0.002
0.017
0.004
0.003
0.003
0 ; 009
0.004
0.004
0.007
0.003
0.003
0.011
0.003
0.003
0.004
0.004
0.005
0.003
0.003
0.002
0.005
0.003
0.003
0.014
0.006
------
0.007
il
- lITE
MM
'NT . --- - -
I
I1 - - - -
I1 - -
- - -
- -
I
-
I
I
I
I
I
I
IV
I
I
I
I11
I
I
I1
I
I
11:
I
I
I
I
I1
I
I
I1
I
IV
I1
I1
-
-
-
APPROX .
DISTANCE
mi [km]
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
54 [ 881
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
54 t 881
63 [ 1021
63 [ 102)
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
.------ - _--
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
57
1021
1021
1021
1021
1021
1021
1021
921
57 921
54 [ 881
59 [ 951
43 [ 691
51 [ 821
60 [ 961
17 [ 271
43 [ 681
62 [ 1001
49 [ 791
32 L 521
39 [ 641
54 [ 871
30 [ 491
54 [ 871
54 [ 871
61 [ 981
53 [ 851
50 [ 811
45 [ 731
45 [ 731
45 [ 731
49 [ 791
51 821
64 [ 1021
45 [ 731
60 [ 971
55 [ 891
41 [ 661
31 [ 491
41 [ 661 ~- . .1 .
Page 5 - - FILE
CODE
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
----
-
-
LAT .
VORTH
33.933
33.717
34.043
32.583
33.467
32.750
34.000
33.167
33.300
33.700
34.017
34.033
33.000
33.117
33,833
33.267
33.700
33.117
33.633
33.500
33.517
33.950
32.800
33 .ZOO
33.367
33.950
33.333
33.533
32.967
33.417
32.850
33.933
33.917
33.973
33.283
33.933
33.967
33.950
33.483
33.283
33.183
33.650
32.717
33.417
33.483
33.483
32.950
33.100
32.867
33.996
33.400
33.100
33.333
33.283
33.283
-_----
33.283
33.283
LONG.
WEST
116.750
117.507
117.228
117.800
116.433
118.200
117.283
116.417
116.300
118.067
117.050
117.350
116.433
116.417
117.400
116.400
118.067
116.417
118.200
116.483
117.583
117.833
116.233
118.150
116.733
116,233
116.633
116.383
116.417
117.483
117.367
116.700
116.769
116.183
116.750
116.800
116.850
116.700
116.350
-------
118. io0
116.383
116.750
117.833
116.567
116.500
116.500
116.250
116.633
118.250
117.270
116.567
116.450
116.433
116.183
116.183
116.183
116.183
DATE
---- -----_-_
8/ 6/1938
8/ 6/1938
4/ 3/1939
5/12/1939
6/25/1939
11/ 7/1939
12/ 5/1939
1/ 4/1940
2/19/1940
4/18/1940
6/ 4/1940
6/ 4/1940
6/ 5/1940
6/ 6/1940
7/20/1940
10/21/1940
11/ 1/1940
2/23/1941
3/22/1941
4/11/1941
1/24/1942
4/ 5/1942
4/16/1942
4/26/1942
6/ 9/1942
9/21/1942
10/31/1942
1/ 2/1943
2/23/1943
10/24/1943
11/17/1943
6/10/1944
10/26/1944
10/20/1944
9/28/1946
12/28/1948
4/13 /1949
10/14/1949
9/ 5/1950
11/ 6/1950
12/22 /1950
2/15/1951
2/15/1951
11/14/1951
2/ 8/1952
2/13/1952
2/17/1952
11/23/1953
2/12/1954
3/19/1954
3 /19/1954
3/19/1954
3/19/1954
4/19/1939
2/ a/mo
9/ 7/1945
2/ 4/1953
,-
TIME I
(GMT) IDEPTH
H M Secl (km) __-__---)-r-__
228 0.01 7.3
22 056.01 7.3
25044.71 7,3
741 0.01 7.3
1925 2.2) 7.3
149 0.0) 7.3
1852 8.41 7.3
173352.01 7.3
8 711.0) 7.3
165617.01 7.3
12 655.71 7.3
184343.91 7.3
1035 8.31 7.1
103656.0) 7.3
82727.0) 7.3
2321 4.0) 7.3
4 113.01 7.3
64933.01 7.3
20 046.01 7.3
183614.0) 7.3
82240.01 7.3
12024.0) 7.3
214148.0) 7.3
92039.0) 7.3
72833.01 7.3
151023.0 I 7.3
5 633.01 7.3
7 754.01 7.3
15 758.01 7.3
141118.0] 7.3
92112.0) 7.3
02921.0
112841.0
111531.9
225410.0
183016.0
153424.0
719 9.0
125341.0
75336.0
02925.0
191956.0
205546.0
2 536.0
104759,O
104957.0
2355 3.0
174028.0
151337.0
123658.3
43616.0
1339 7.0
94428.0
95429.0
95556.0
957 7.0
95748.0
> I__.
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
3 .O
7.3
7.3
7.3
WAKE
MAG.
4.00
4.00
4.00
4.50
4.50
4.50
4.70
4.00
4.00
4.00
4.60
4.40
5.10
4.00
4.00
4.00
4.00
4.50
4.00
4.50
4.00
4.00
4.00
4.00
4.00
4.00
4.00
4.00
4.00
4.50
4.00
4.00
4.50
4.00
4.20
4.40
4.30
5.00
4 .OO
4.10
4.10
4.80
4.40
4.00
4.80
4.10
4 .OO
4.70
4.50
4.30
4.30
4.50
6.20
5 .OO
4.60
4.00
I-----
4.80
..
SITE
ACC .
g
0.002
0.004
0.002
0.005
0.004
0.003
0.004
0.003
0.002
0.002
0.004
0.003
0.008
0.003
0.003
0.003
0.002
0.005
0.002
0.004
0.003
0.002
0.004
0.002
0.003
0.002
0.002
0.004
0.003
0.004
0.010
0.003
0.003
0.002
0.002
0.003
0.003
0.005
0.004
0.003
0.003
0.007
0.005
0.004
0.006
0.006
0.002
0.005
0.004
0.003
0.005
0.004
0.005
0.012
0.005
0.003
0.002
-------
- ;ITE
MM
[NT. .--_ -
I
I1
I
I
I
I - -
I
I
I1
I
I r
I1
I
I
I
I
-
- -
I
I
I
111
I
-
- -
I
I
11
I
I
I
I1
I1
I
I1
IX
I1
I
I
I1
I
I1
SI1
SI
I
-
APPROX .
DISTANCE
mi [kml
62 I 1001
42 [ 681
63 [ 1011
49 r 791
53 r 861
60 [ 971
60 [ 961
49 [ 791
57 [ 921
60 [ 971
62 [ 1001
62 [ 100)
49 [ 791
49 I 791
49 [ 781
51 [ 821
60 [ 971
49 [ 791
64 [ 1031
52 [ 831
55 [ 881
59 [ 951
40 [ 651
60 [ 961
53 1 861
64 [ 1031
61 f 961
46 [ 731
52 [ 841
53 [ 851
24 [ 381
55 891
63 [ loll
64 [ 1041
63 [ 1021
62 [ 1001
63 r 1021
61 [ 981
40 r 651
54 I 871
51 t 821
46 I 741
44 1 711
45 I 721
50 Ell
50 [ 811
60 r 971
37 r 591
60 [ 971
44 [ 711
47 [ 761
50 [ 801
63 1 1021
63 1021
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
_------- ---
59 r 951
Page 6 -
FILE
CODE
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
DMG
----
F.."
UT.
NORTH
33.283
33.283
33.283
33.283
33.283
33.283
33.283
33.283
33 -283
------
33.283
33.283
33.733
33.450
33.725
33.534
33.110
33.038
33.002
32.990
33 -488
33.968
33.097
33.167
33.043
33.050
33.033
33 .a54
33.654
33.659
33.665
33.671
33.680
33.738
33.333
33.021
33.710
33.976
33.279
33.291
33.053
33.506
33.508
33.235
33.315
33.237
33.310
33.343
33.349
33.019
32.923
33.545
32.680
33 .SO1
33.121
33.748
32.961
32.529
7- r--
LONG.
WEST
116.183
116.183
116.183
116.183
116.183
116.183
116.183
116.183
116.183
116.183
116.183
117.467
116.683
117.498
116.561
116.523
116.361
116.436
116.268
116.777
116.882
116.444
116.467
116.260
116.238
116.233
117.752
117.994
117.981
117.979
118.012
117.993
117.187
116.236
116.223
116.925
116.775
116.249
116.317
116.306
116.585
116.631
116.266
116.305
116.190
116.224
116.346
116.188
116.225
116.272
117.807
116.354
116.429
116.349
117.479
116 .290
118.082
7-- 97:
----__-
DATE
------ -----_
3/19/1954
3/19/1954
3/19/1954
3/19/1954
3/19/1954
3/19/1954
3/19/1954
3/20/1954
3/20/1954
3/23/1954
4/ 411954
10/26/1954
4/25/1955
1/ 311956
9/23 /1956
1/24/1957
2/26/1957
7/ 2/1957
6/12/1959
6/27/1959
8/16/1959
8/ 1/1960
8/22/1961
8/23/1961
9/20/1961
10/ 4/1961
10/20/1961
10/20/1961
10/20/1961
10/20/1961
11/20/1961
4/27/1962
101 511962
1/13/1963
9/23/1963
10/17/1965
1/ 7/1966
3 /19/1966
41 2/1967
5/21/1967
8/11/1967
4/ 9/1968
4/ 9/1968
4/14/1968
5/22/1968
4/28/1969
5/19/1969
8/20/1969
10/14/1969
10/27/1969
1/21/1970
2/23/1971
5/25/1971
6/22/1971
8/25/1971
5/26/1973 .~ I. 3 I. 9'7
11/ B/1958.
TIME 1 I (GMT) 1 DEPTH I QUAKE
H M Secl (km) I MAG.
101522.01 7.3) 4.50
101957.0) 7.31 4.50
102117.0) 5.81 5.50
102610.0) 7.3j 4.00
13 8 4.01 7.3) 4.30
14 057.01 7.31 4.10
143750.01 7.31 4.00
41919.0) 7.31 4.90
6 353.01 7.31 4.30
41450.0) 7.1) 5.10
42920.0) 7.3) 4.10
162226.01 7.31 4.10
25515.0l 7.3) 4.00
02548.91 7.3) 4.70
112441.91 7.31 4.30
205449.91 7.31 4.60
211652.21 7.31 4.10
65638.51 7.31 4.10
132044.11 7.31 4.10
11 313.0) 7.31 4.00
162211.11 7.31 4.00
215221.31 7.31 4.30
193930.01 7.31 4.20
231933.61 7.31 4.40
1 047.81 7.31 4.70
5 410.0) 7.31 4.00
22131.61 7.31 4.10
194950.5) 7.31 4.30
20 714.51 7.31 4.00
214240.71 7.31 4.00
223534.21 7.3) 4.10
85334.71 7.3) 4.00
91232.11 7.31 4.10
1529 2.61 7.3) 4.10
23938.9) 7.3) 4.20
144152.61 7.3) 5.00
94519.0) 7.3) 4.90
191023.0l 7.31 4.00
142156.01 7.3) 4.00
201538.61 7.3) 4.30
144234.41 7.31 4.70
05711.41 7.31 4.10
1831 3.81 7.31 4.70
125558.71 7.31 4.30
132655.41 7.31 4.40
232042.91 4.51 5.80
144033.01 7.31 4.50
152957.21 7.31 4.00
131842.71 7.31 4.50
1316 2.3) 7.3) 4.50
1124 0.4) 7.31 4.10
0 739.21 7.31 4.20
10 252.91 7.3) 4.10
104119.0) 7.31 4.20
23 033.01 7.31 4.00
234633.3) 7.3) 4.30
---.r-n PI .. 71 . rn
--------I-----I------
93833.01 7.31 4.00
SITE
ACC .
9
0.003
0.003
0.007
0.002
0.003
0.002
0.002
0.004
0.003
0.005
0.002
0.004
0,004
0.007
0.004
0.006
0.003
0.003
0.003
0.005
0.002
0.004
0.004
0.003
0.004
0.002
0.003
0.003
0.003
0.003
0.003
0.003
0.004
0.002
0.003
0.008
0.004
0.002
0.003
0.003
0.006
0.004
0.002
0.004
0.003
0.003
0.011
0.003
0.002
0.003
0.006
0.002
0.003
0.003
0.004
0.002
0.003
-------
- ,-ny
3 ITE
MM
TNT.
I
I
I1
I
----
-
I
I
I1
I
I
I1
I
11
I
I
I1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
111
I
-
-
-
-
-
-
- -
I
I1
I
I
I
I
I11
I
I
I1
I
1
-
-
r -
I -
APPROX .
DISTANCE
mi [km] -_------___
63 t io21
63 [ io21
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
63 [ 1021
63 f 1021
63 [ 1021
43 [ 691
40 641
43 r 691
49 t 791
43 [ 691
53 r 851
49 1 791
59 [ 941
37 [ 601
61 [ 991
48 [ 771
46 I 741
59 941
60 [ 961
60 [ 971
57 [ 911
55 I E91
55 r 881
55 [ 881
57 [ 911
56 [ 901
42 [ 671
61 [ 981
44 I 711
64 [ 1041
60 I 961
56 [ 901
56 [ 901
47 [ 751
45 [ 721
58 941
57 1 911
63 [ 1011
61 991
55 [ 881
64 I 1031
61 I 981
59 [ 961
42 [ 681
62 [ 991
54 [ 88?
53 [ 851
44 [ 711
58 [ 931
63 I 1021
r^ r q/,'
61 [ sei
Page 7 - - FILE
CODE
DMG
PAS
PAS
PAS
PAS
PAS
PAS
PAS
PAS
PAS
PAS
PAS
PAS
PAS
PAS
PAS
PAS
PAS
PAS
GSP
PAS
PAS
PAS
PAS
PAS
PAS
PAS
PAS
USG
USG
PAS
PAS
PAS
PAS
PAS
PAS
PAS
GS P
GSP
GSP
GSP
GSP
GSP
GSP
GSP
GSP
GSP
GS P
GSP
_---
UT.
PORTH
32.680
32.756
33.520
32.905
33.484
32.714
32.759
33.420
32.302
33.458
33.701
33.501
32.625
33.058
33.538
33.558
33.033
32 - 627
33.471
33.110
32.945
33.460
33.138
32.679
34.023
32.971
32.990
32.970
33.017
33.017
32.933
32.945
32.986
32.615
33.483
33.508
32.947
33.620
33.650
33.510
32.970
33.070
32.985
32.681
32.685
32.626
33.395
33.951
34.024
-_----
LONG.
WEST -------
118.077
117.988
116.558
116.261
116.513
117.910
117,906
116.698
116.881
116.434
116.837
116.513
118.009
116.211
118.207
116.667
117.944
117.377
118.061
116.400
117.806
116.370
116.501
117.151
117.245
117.87C
117.84s
117.803
117.817
117.817
117.841
117.831
117.844
117.152
116.43f
118.071
117.73t
117.90C
116.74C
116.45t
117.81[
116. 80t
117. 81f
118.105
118.13l
118.15:
116.354
117.70:
117.23(
DATE
.___--------
10/28/1973
1/12/1975
8/ 2/1975
12/25/1975
8/11/1976
10/18/1976
10/18/1976
6/ 5/1978
8/19/1978
2/12/1979
8/22/1979
2 /25 /1980
7/11/1981
3/22/1982
5/25/1982
6/15/1982
2/22/1983
6/29/1983
2/27/1984'
9/ 7/1984
9/ 7/1984
10/10/1984
6/18/1985
lo/ 2/1985
7/13/1986
7/13/1986
7/14/1986
7/14/1986
7/16/1986
7/29/1986
7/29/1986
10/ 1/1986
10/29/1986
7/ 2/1988
ll/20/1988
1/15/1989
4/ 7/1989
12/ 2/1989
2/18/1990
4/ 4/1990
12/ 4/1991
6/21/1995
6/20/1997
6/20/1997
6/20/1997
7/26/1997
3/11/1998
4/ 1/1984
1/ 5/1998
TIME
(GMT)
H M Sec
E2 0 2.7
212214.8
014 7.7
71852.3
152455.5
172652.6
172753.1
16 3 3.9
931 5.7
44842.3
2 136.3
104738.5
215029.4
85328.6
134430.3
234921.3
21830.4
8 836.4
101815.0
071702.3
11 313.4
175730.3
212258.9
32228.7
234412.4
1347 8.2
14 133.0
03246.2
11112.6
1247 3.7
81741.6
81741.8
201218.6
23815.3
02658.2
53928.7
153955.2
200730.2
231647.8
155259.5
085439.3
071057.5
211736.2
043540.5
053855. C
080413. E
031456. C
181406.5
121851. E
------__
IEPTH
(km)
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
5.8
7.3
7.3
7.3
7 -3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
6.5
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.2
7.3
7.2
.----
WAKE
MAG.
4.50
4.80
4.70
4.00
4.30
4.20
4.20
4.40
4.10
4.20
4.10
5.50
4.30
4.50
4.10
4.80
4 -30
4.60
4.00
4.00
4.30
4.10
4.50
4 .OO
4.80
5.30
4.60
4.00
4.12
4 .ll
4.30
4.10
4.00
4.10
4.00
4 .50
4.20
4.50
4.20
4.10
4 .OO
4.20
4.30
4.70
4.20
4.60
4.80
4.30
4 .so
.-----
SITE
ACC .
g
0.004
0.006
0.006
0.002
0.004
0.004
0.004
0.007
0.002
0.003
0.004
0.010
0.003
0.003
0.002
0.007
0.006
0.008
0.003
0.003
0.007
0.003
0.006
0.006
0.004
0.014
0.009
0.006
0.007
0.006
0.007
0.006
0.005
0.005
0.003
0.004
0.008
0.005
0.004
0.003
0.006
0.009
0.007
0.004
0.003
0.003
0.005
0.003
0.003
.-----_
-
I ITE
MM
NT .
I
I1
I1
I
I
I
I1
I
I
I11
I
I
I1
I1
I11
I
I
I1
I
I1
I1
I
IV
111
I1
I1
I1
I1
I1
I1
I
I
111
11
I
I
I1
I11
I1
I
I
I
I1
I
I
---
-
-
-
rI
APPROX .
DISTANCE
mi [km]
57 [ 911
49 801
49 [ 781
60 [ 971
50 [ 801
47 [ 761
45 [ 731
38 1 611
62 [ 1001
53 [ 851
46 [ 741
50 [ 811
56 901
61 [ 991
61 [ 981
45 [ 731
40 [ 641
36 [ 581
51 [ 831
50 [ 811
34 [ 551
56 [ 911
44 [ 711
32 [ 521
61 [ 981
---------__
37
35
33
33
33
36
35
35
37
53 [ 861
53 [ 851
30 [ 491
49 [ 801
47 [ 751
54 [ 861
34 [ 541
27 [ 441
34 [ 541
58 [ 941
59 [ 961
62 [ 1001
56 [ 901
62 [ 991
61 [ 991
-END OF SEARCH- 397 RECORDS FOUND
COMPUTER TIME REQUIRED FOR EARTHQUAKE SEARCH: 1.0 minutes
MAXIMUM SITE ACCELERATION DURING TIME PERIOD 1800 TO 2000: 0.253g
MAXIMUM SITE INTENSITY (MM) DURING TIME PERIOD 1800 TO 2000: IX
MAXIMUM MAGNITUDE ENCOUNTERED IN SEARCH: 7.00
NEAREST HISTORICAL EARTHQUAKE WAS ABOUT 10 MILES AWAY FROM SITE.
I . .!\ .--: -I.-.- -3- ,.:..z .~,...~,~ ,--. --.--,>.. --.-I,,- ,.... - ,,... - ....
.Y .-
RESULTS OF PROBABILITY ANALYSES ...............................
TIME PERIOD OF SEARCH: 1800 TO 2000
LENGTH OF SEARCH TIME: 201 years
ATTENUATION RELATION: 2) Campbell & Bozorgnia (1994) Horiz. - Soft Rock *** TIME PERIOD OF EXPOSURE FOR PROBABILITY: 25 years
-
ACC .
g
0.01
0.02
0.03
0.04
0.05
0.06
0.07
0.08
0.09
0.10
0.11
0.12
0.13
0.14
0.15
0.16
0.17
0.18
0.19
0.20
0.21
0.22
0.23
0.24
0.25
___-
----
IO. OF
XMES
EXCED
33
10
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
._---
AVE . 1cm.
# /yr .-----
0.164
0.050
0.020
0.005
0.005
0.005
0.005
0.005
0.005
0.005
0.005
0.005
0.005
0.005
0.005
0.005
0.005
0.005
0.005
0.005
0.005
0.005
0.005
0.005
0.00s
RECURR.
INTERV .
years -------
6.091
20.100
50.250
201.000
201.000
201.000
201.000
201.000
201 .ooo
201.000
201 .ooo
201.000
201.000
201 .ooo
201.000
201.000
201.000
201.000
201.000
201.000
201 .ooo
201.000
201.000
201.000
201.000
in
0.5 yr -----_
0.0788
0.0246
0.0099
0.0025
0.0025
0.0025
0.002s
0.0025
0.0025
0.0025
0.0025
0.0025
0.0025
0.0025
0.0025
0.0025
0.0025
0.0025
0.0025
0.0025
0.0025
0.0025
0.0025
0.0025
0.0025
COMPUTED PROBABILITY
in
1 Yr -_-___
0.1514
0 -0485
0.0197
0.0050
0.0050
0.0050
0.0050
0.0050
0.0050
0.0050
0.0050
0.0050
0.0050
0.0050
0.0050
0.0050
0.0050
0.0050
0.0050
0.0050
0.0050
0.0050
0.0050
0.0050
0.0050 ------
in
10 yr ------
0.8064
0.3920
0.1805
0.0485
0.0485
0.0485
0.0485
0.0485
0.0485
0.0485
0.0485
0.0485
0.0485
0.0485
0.0485
0.0485
0.0485
0.0485
0.0485
0.0485
0.0485
0.0485
0.0485
0.0485
0.0485 ___---
in
50 yr
3.9997
3.9169
3.6303
3.2202
3.2202
3.2202
3.2202
3 ,2202
0.2202
0.2202
0.2202
0.2202
0.2202
0.2202
0.2202
0.2202
0.2202
0.2202
0.2202
0.2202
0.2202
0.2202
0.2202
0.220:
0.220:
_-----
OF EXCEEDANCE
in
75 yr
1.0000
0.9760
0.7752
0.3114
0.3114
0.3114
0.3114
0.3114
0.3114
0.3114
0.3114
0.3114
0.3114
0.3114
0.3114
0.3114
0.3114
0.3114
0.3114
0.3114
0.3114
0.3114
0.3114
0.3114
0.3114
------
in
100 yr
1.0000
0.9931
0.8633
0.3920
0.3920
0.3920
0.3920
0.3920
0.3920
0.3920
0.3920
0.3920
0.3920
0.3920
0.3920
0.3920
0.3920
0.3920
0.3920
0.3920
0.3920
0.3920
0.3920
0.3920
0.3920
------
A
in
Yr
0.9835
0.7117
0.3920
0.1170
0.1170
0.1170
0.1170
0.1170
0.1170
0.1170
0.1170
0.1170
0.1170
0.1170
0.1170
0.1170
0.1170
0.1170
0.1170
0.1170
0.1170
0.1170
0.1170
0.1170
0.1170
*** -__-_-
------
PROBABILITY OF EXCEEDANCE FOR MAGNITUDE
- INO.OF1 AVE. 1RECURR.I
MAG. TIMES OCCUR. INTERV. I in [EXCEDI #/yr 1 years 10.5 yr
4.001 3971 1.9751 0.50610.6275
4.501 1321 0.6571 1.52310.2799
5.001 481 0.2391 4.18810.1125
5.501 201 0.lOOl lO.OSO~O.0485
6.001 131 0.0651 15.46210.0318
6.501 41 0.0201 50.250~0.0099
7.001 11 0.005~201.000~0.0025
----I-----]------I-------l------
COMPUTED PROBABILITY OF EXCEEDANCE
in
1 Yr
0.8613
0.4814
0.2124
0.0947
0.0626
0.0197
0.0050
-_---_
in I in
10 yrl 50 yr __-_--I ------
1.0000~1.0000
0.998611.0000
0.9082(1.0000
0.6303 10.9931
0.476310.9606
0.1805 IO. 6303
0.048510.2202
in
75 yr
1.0000
1.0000
1,0000
0.9994
0.9922
0.7752
0.3114
------
in I in
100 yrl*** yr ------ 1 ------
1.0000~1.0000
1.0000~1.0000
1.000010.9974
1.000010.9169
0.9984l0.8015
0.863310.3920 .
0.3920 IO .1170
GUTENBERG & RICHTER RECURRENCE RELATIONSHIP :
a-value= 3.249
b-value- 0.758
beta-value= 1.745
City of Carlsbad May 24,2000
Fire Station No. 5 Storage Facility Project Project No. 99-5 19C
~
APPENDIX D - STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR GRADING PROJECTS
TESTING ENGINEERS - SAN DEGO, INC STANDARD SPECIFTCATIONS FOR GRADING PROJECTS
Section 1 - General
The guideIines contained herein and the standard details attached hereto represent Testing
Engineers-San Diego standard recommendations for grading and other associated
operations on construction projects. These guidelines should be considered a portion of
the project specifications. Recommendations contained in the body of the previously
presented soils report shall supersede the recommendations and/or requirements as
specified herein. Disputes arising out of interpretation of the recommendations contained
in the soils report or specifications contained herein shall be interpreted by the project
geotechnical consultant.
Section 2 - Responsibilities of Proieet Personnel
The geotechnical consultant should provide observation and testing services sufficient to
assure that geotechnical construction is performed in general conformance with project
specifications and standard grading practices. The geotechnical consultant should report
any deviations to the client or is, authorized representative.
The client should be chiefly responsible for all aspects of the project. He or his authorized
representative has the responsibility of reviewing the findings and recommendations of
the geotechnical consultant. He shall authorize or cause to have authorized the Contractor
and/or other consultants to perform work andor provide services. During grading the
Client or his authorized representative should remain on-site or should remain reasonably
accessible to all concerned parties in order to make decisions necessary to maintain the
flow of the project.
The contractor should be responsible for the safety of the project and satisfactory
completion of all grading and other associated operations on construction projects,
including, but not limited to, earth work in accordance with the project plans,
specifications and controlling agency requirements.
Section 3 - Preconstniction Meeting
A preconstmction site meeting shall be manged by the owner and/or client and shall
include the grading contractor, the design engineer, the geotechnical consultant, owner’s
representative and representatives of the appropriate governing authorities.
Section 4 - Site PreDaration
The client or contractor should obtain the required approvals from the controlling
authorities for the project prior, during and / or after demolition, site preparation and -
Page 1
TESTING ENGINEERS - SAN DlEGO, MC
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR GRADING PROJECTS
Removals, etc. The appropriate approvals should be obtained prior to proceeding with
grading operations.
Clearing and grubbing should consists of the removal of vegetation such as brush,
grass, woods, stumps, trees, root of trees and otherwise deleterious natural materials
from the areas to be graded. Clearing and grubbing should extend to the outside of all
proposed excavation and fill areas.
Demolition should include removal of buildings, structures, foundations, reservoirs,
utilities (including underground pipelines, septic tanks, leach fields, seepage pits,
cisterns, mining shafts, tunnels, etc.) and other man-made surface and subsurface
improvements from the areas to be graded. Demolition of utilities should include
proper capping and/or rerouting pipelines at the project perimeter and cutoff and
capphg of wells in accordance with the requirements of the governing authorities and
the recommendations of the geotechnical consultant at the time of demolition.
'
Trees, plants or man-made improvements not planned to be removed or demolished
should be protected by the contractor fiom damage or injury.
Debris generated during clearing, grubbing and/or demolition operations should be
wasted fi-om areas to be graded and disposed off-site. Clearing, grubbing and
demolition operations should be performed under the observation of the geotechnical
consultant.
Section 5 - Site Protection
Protection of the site during the period of grading should be the responsibility of the
contractor. Unless other provisions are made in writing and agreed upon among the
concerned parties, completion of a portion of the project should not be considered to
preclude that portion or adjacent areas form the requirements for site protection until
such time as the entire project is complete as identified by the geotechnical consultant,
&e client and the regulating agencies.
Precautions should be taken during the performance of site clearing, excavations and
grading to protect the work site from flooding, ponding or inundation by poor or
improper surface drainage. Temporary provisions should be made during the rainy
season to adequately direct surface drainage away from and off the work site. Where
low areas cannot be avoided, pumps should be kept on had to continually remove
water during periods of rainfall.
Rain related damage should be considered to include, but may not be limited to,
erosion, silting, saturation, swelling, structural distress and other adverse conditions as
determined bv the geotechnical consultant. Soil adversely affected shoiild be
Page 2
TESmG ENGINEERS - SAN DIEGO, INC
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR GRADING PROJECTS
Roof, pad and slope drainage should be directed away from slopes and area of
structures to suitable areas via non-erodible devices {i,e., gutters, down spouts,
concrete swales) as shown in the attached plates.
For drainage in extensively landscaped areas near structures, @e., within four feet) a
minimum of 5 percent gradient away from the structure should be maintained. Pad
drainage of at least 2 percent should be maintained over the remainder of the site.
Drainage patterns established at the time of fine grading should be maintained
throughout the lift of the project. Property owners should be made aware that altering
drainage patterns can be detrimental to slope stability and foundation performance.
Section 10 - SIoDe Maintenance
10.1 LandscaDe Plants -
In order to enhance surficial slope stability, slope planting should be
accomplished at the completion of grading. Slope planting should consist of
deep-rooting vegetation requiring little watering. Plants native to the Southern
California area and plants relative to natives plants are generally desirable.
Plants native to other semi-arid and arid area may also be appropriate. A
Landscape Architect should be the best party to consult regarding actual types
of plants and planting configuration.
10.2 lirigation
Irrigation pipes should be anchored to slope faces,
excavated into slope faces.
10.3 Rmair
As a precautionary measure, plastic sheeting should
not placed in trenches
be readily available, or
kept on hand, to protect all slope areas fiom saturation by periods of heavy or
prolonged rainfall. This measure is strongly recommended, beginning with the
period of time prior to landscape planting.
If slope failures occur, the geotechnical consultant should be contacted for a
field review of site conditions and development of recommendations for
evaluation and repair.
In the accompanying Standard Details, appropriate repair procedures are
illustrated for superficial slope failures (i.e., occurring typically within the outer
one foot to three of a slope face).
Page 9
APPENDIX ‘B’
Select Standard Drawings
CLEAN - OUTS IN YARD R3 BE WERED 'iVfTH 10' PLASTIC
COVER BY CARSON PCIRTNQ 910 0.AE CLEAN-WE IN CONCRETE TO HAVE CONCRETE BOX WITH TRAFFIC UD BY J8R OR BROOKS WRT NO. 3-R%
SEWERCLEAN-WTRISERSTOBE FlTTED WITH MU SCREW IN PLUG.
7 CURB FACE. t NOTES :
I. THE LAlERALsHAu.BE: -THE SAME 4s THE M4UN LINE SEWER.
2. IN NO CASE SHALL A LATERAL CONNECT TO THE SEWER MAIN DIRECTLY ON TOP OF THE PIPE.
MINIMUM SIDE.
5. AS- BUILT SEWER LATERAL LOCATIONS SHALL BE FURNISHED TO THE CITY INSPECTOR ON FORMS PROVIDED PRIOR TO FINAL APPROVAL OF WORK.
6. ALL LATERAL TRENCHES TO f33OPERTY LINE AND SEWER MAIN TRENCHES TO BE COMPACTED PER S5. 3. SEWER LATERALS SHALL HAVE A 2%
7. CLEAN- OUT TO BE ADJUSTED TO GRADE AFTER FINAL FINISH GRADING. 4. ALL JOINTS ON SEWER LATERAL PIPE SW BE COMPRESION TYPE OR
APPROVED SOLVENT WELD.
* USE SAME DIMENSION G
WHEN METER IS LOWED ijc TO REAR OF CURB OR SIDEWAU(. h
1 :- A
. .. I
wc MAIN
FCR WATER SERVE CONNECTON (TYP.)